OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE ... - Dealer E Process

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2021 FRONTIEROWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGWARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passengervehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you tochemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoidbreathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated areaand wear gloves or wash your hands frequently whenservicing your vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-derstand the operation and maintenanceof your vehicle so that you may enjoy manymiles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.Please read through this manual beforeoperating your vehicle.A separate Warranty Information Book-let explains details about the warrantiescovering your vehicle. The “Maintenanceand schedules” section of this manualexplains details about maintaining andservicing your vehicle. Additionally, aseparate Customer Care/Lemon LawBooklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-solve any concerns you may have withyour vehicle, and clarify your rights un-der your state's lemon law.When you require any service or have anyquestions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad toassist you with the extensive resourcesavailable to them.In addition to factory-installed options,your vehicle may also be equipped withadditional accessories installed prior to de-livery. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your ve-hicle is equipped. It is important that youfamiliarize yourself with all disclosures,warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessoriesprior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-cessory. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your ve-hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner's Manual carefully. This will ensurefamiliarity with controls and maintenancerequirements assisting you in the safe op-eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS!Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!• NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.• ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-tures or taking other actions thatcould distract you.

• ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-propriate child restraint systems.Pre-teen children should be seated inthe rear seat.

• ALWAYS provide information aboutthe proper use of vehicle safety fea-tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the be-ginning of the applicable sections/items.As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate 4-wheeldrive models correctly may result in lossof control or a collision. For additionalinformation, refer to “Driving safety pre-cautions” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVINGThis vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.For additional information, refer to “On-pavement and off-road driving precau-tions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover”and “Driving safety precautions” in the“Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect its perfor-mance, safety, emissions or durabilityand may even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting frommodifications may not be covered un-der NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that usesthe port during normal driving, for ex-ample remote insurance companymonitoring, remote vehicle diagnos-tics, telematics or engine reprogram-ming, may cause interference or dam-age to vehicle systems. We do notrecommend or endorse the use of anyaftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-less specifically approved by NISSAN.The vehicle warranty may not coverdamage caused by any aftermarketplug-in device.

This manual includes information for allfeatures and equipment available on thismodel. Features and equipment in your ve-hicle may vary depending on model, trimlevel, options selected, order, date of pro-duction, region or availability. Therefore,you may find information about features orequipment that are not included or in-stalled on your vehicle.All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect atthe time of printing. NISSAN reserves theright to change specifications, perfor-mance, design or component supplierswithout notice and without obligation.From time to time, NISSAN may update orrevise this manual to provide Owners withthe most accurate information currentlyavailable. Please carefully read and retainwith this manual all revision updates sentto you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and anyupdates can also be found in the Ownersection of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you havequestions concerning any information in

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause death or se-rious personal injury. To avoid or re-duce the risk, the procedures must befollowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damage toyour vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,the procedures must be followedcarefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in anillustration, it means the arrow points to thefront of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese call attention to an item in the illus-tration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-teries, may contain perchlorate material.The following advisory is provided: “Per-chlorate Material – special handling mayapply. For additional information, referto www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. andlicensed to Panasonicand Bosch.

APD1005

SiriusXM® servicesrequire a subscriptionafter trial period andare sold separately oras a package. Thesatellite service isavailable only in the48 contiguous USAand DC. SiriusXM®satellite service is alsoavailable in Canada;see www.siriusxm.ca.

© 2020 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.All rights reserved. No part of this Owner'sManual may be reproduced or stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted in anyform, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-erwise, without the prior written permis-sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and yourNISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and serviceneeds.However, if there is something that yourNISSAN dealer cannot assist you with oryou would like to provide NISSAN directlywith comments or questions, please con-tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-ment using our toll-free number:For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will askfor the following information:– Your name, address, and telephone

number– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on thedriver's side)

– Date of purchase– Current odometer reading– Your NISSAN dealer's name– Your comments or questionsOR

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-tion at:For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003or via e-mail at:[email protected]

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5or via e-mail at:[email protected]

If you prefer, visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofcontents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

1. Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-70)3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)4. Front seat belts with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster(P. 1-15, 1-70)

5. Supplemental front-impact air bags(P. 1-70)

6. Seats (P. 1-2)7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P. 1-70)8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-70)9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-28)10. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-28)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LII2310

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-13)2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)3. Windshield (P. 8-18)4. Windows (P. 2-49)5. Door locks (P. 3-4)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-2)Key fob (P. 3-2)Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-17)7. Tire pressure (P. 8-30)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)Tire chains (P. 8-30)

8. Headlight and turn signal switch(P. 2-30)Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system(if so equipped) (P. 2-30)Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LII2481

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear sliding window (if so equipped)(P. 2-49)

2. Vehicle loading (P. 10-14)Tailgate (P. 3-20)Truck box (P. 3-20)Rearview camera (P. 4-21)

3. Towing (if so equipped) (P. 10-25)4. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-39)5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-13)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LIC3975

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Power moonroof (if so equipped)(P. 2-52)

2. Map lights (P. 2-54)3. Sun visors (P. 3-16)4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-17)5. Glove box (P. 2-40)6. Shift lever (P. 5-14)7. Cup holders (P. 2-40)8. Console box (P. 2-40)9. Spare tire tools location (P. 6-3)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LII2646

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Vents (P. 4-22)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/

turn signal switch (P. 2-30)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-71)Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System(P. 4-79, 4-96)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-70)Horn (P. 2-34)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-24)

6. Cruise control switches (P. 5-19)7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)8. Storage (P. 2-40)9. Audio system (P. 4-36)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-70)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-70)13. USB connection port (P. 4-55)

AUX input (P. 4-55)14. Power outlets (P. 2-39)15. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-37)Heated seat switches (if so equipped)(P. 2-35)Rear sonar switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-38)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-36)LIC4475

INSTRUMENT PANEL


16. Shift lever (P. 5-14)17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)18. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-23)19. Climate controls (P. 4-22, P. 4-31)20. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)21. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-16)22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-34)

Hill descent control switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-36)Outside mirror controls (if so equipped)(P. 3-17)


VQ38DD engine1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)2. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20)3. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20)4. Fuse box (P. 8-20)5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)6. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)7. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)8. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)9. Drive belt location (P. 8-15)10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)11. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)12. Battery (P. 8-13)13. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)*Engine cover removed for clarity.Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LDI3520

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


Warninglight

Name Page

4WD warning light( model)

2-15

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

2-15

or

Apply parking brakewarning light

2-16

Automatic transmis-sion check warning

light

2-16

Warninglight

Name Page

Automatic transmis-sion park warning

light ( model)

2-16

or

Brake warning light 2-16

Charge warning light 2-17

Door open warninglight

2-17

Electric shift controlsystem warning light

2-17

Warninglight

Name Page

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-17

Low fuel warninglight

2-18

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-18

Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight (if so equipped)

2-19

NISSAN IntelligentKey® warning light

(if so equipped)

2-20

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-20

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS


Warninglight

Name Page

Shift P (Park)warning light

(if so equipped)

2-20

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-20

Indicatorlight

Name Page

4WD shift indica-tor light

( model)

2-21

Automatic trans-mission position

indicator light

2-21

CRUISE indicatorlight

2-21

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Electronic lockingrear differential(E-Lock) system

ON indicator light(if so equipped)

2-21

Engine startoperation

indicator light(if so equipped)

2-21

Front passengerair bag status light

2-22

High beam indi-cator light (blue)

2-22

Hill descentcontrol system

ON indicator light(if so equipped)

2-22

Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL)

2-22

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Security indicatorlight (if soequipped)

2-23

SET indicator light 2-23

Slip indicator light 2-23

Transfer 4LO posi-tion indicator light

( model)

2-23

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

2-24

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-24


MEMO


1 Safety-Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Rear bench seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Jump seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Armrest (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Adjustable head restraint/headrestcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Non-adjustable head restraint/headrestcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Front-seat active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Three-point type seat belt withretractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Rear-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH (Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Rear-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH — jump seat(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36Rear-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts (Crew Cab models) . . . . . 1-39Rear-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts — jump seat(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using LATCH(Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using LATCH — jump seat(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using the seat belts —front passenger and rear bench seat(Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using the seat belts —front passenger and jump seats(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . 1-70Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-85Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-85

WARNING

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

• For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back and upright in the seat withboth feet on the floor and adjust theseat properly. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Precautions on seatbelt usage” in this section.

• After adjustment, gently rock in theseat to make sure it is securelylocked.

• Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls ormake the vehicle move. Unattendedchildren could become involved inserious accidents.

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, do notleave children, people who requirethe assistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

• Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation. The seat maymove suddenly and could cause lossof control of the vehicle.

• The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort.Seat belts are most effective whenthe passenger sits well back andstraight up in the seat. If the seatbackis reclined, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and being injured isincreased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-ally. For additional information about ad-justing the seats, refer to the steps outlinedin this section.

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slidethe seat forward or backward to the de-sired position. Release the lever to lock theseat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever upand lean back. To bring the seatback for-ward, pull the lever up and lean your bodyforward. Release the lever to lock the seat-back in position.The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-age” in this section. Also, the seatback canbe reclined to allow occupants to restwhen the vehicle is stopped and the shift

WRS0175 WRS0176

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) positionwith the parking brake fully applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped fordriver's seat)Turn either dial to adjust the angle andheight of the seat cushion to the desiredposition.

Lumbar support (if so equippedfor driver's seat)The lumbar support feature provides ad-justable lower back support to the driver.Move the lever forward or backward to ad-just the seat lumbar area.

WRS0131 WRS0389


FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT(if so equipped)

Operating tips• The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 secondsthen reactivate the switch.

• Do not operate the power seat switch fora long period of time when the engine isoff. This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch as shown will slide theseat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch as shown until thedesired angle is obtained.The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-age” in this section. Also, the seatback canbe reclined to allow occupants to restwhen the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) positionwith the parking brake fully applied.

LRS2897


Seat lifter (driver's seat)Move the switch as shown to adjust theangle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (driver's seat)The lumbar support feature provides ad-justable lower back support to the driver.Move the lever forward or backward to ad-just the seat lumbar area.

REAR BENCH SEAT (if so equipped)The rear bench seat is non-adjustable.However, the seats can be folded up andfolded to lay flat. For additional information,refer to “Flexible seating” in this section.

LRS2898 WRS0389 LRS2903


JUMP SEAT (if so equipped)WARNING

• Do not use a child restraint in thedriver's side jump seat. This seatingposition is not suitable for child re-straint installation. A child restraintcan be installed in the passenger'sside jump seat when the seat exten-sion is unfolded from the seat base.

• When folding the jump seat, be care-ful not to squeeze your finger be-tween the seat cushion and the bodyside.

ARMREST (if so equipped)To use the center armrest on the rearbench seat, pull on the tab in the center ofthe seat and fold it down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATINGWARNING

• Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area or on the rear seats whenthey are in the fold-down position. Ina collision, people riding in these ar-eas without proper restraints aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

• Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.

• Do not allow more than one personto use the same seat belt.

• Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.– Make sure that the seat path is

clear before moving the seat.– Be careful not to allow hands or

feet to get caught or pinched inthe seat.

LRS0556 LRS2901


• Head restraints/headrests should beadjusted properly as they may pro-vide significant protection againstinjury in an accident. Always replaceand adjust them properly if they havebeen removed for any reason.

• If the head restraints/headrests areremoved for any reason, they shouldbe securely stored to prevent themfrom causing injury to passengers ordamage to the vehicle in case of sud-den braking or an accident.

• When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latchedposition. If they are not completelysecured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

• Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

Folding the rear bench seat up (ifso equipped)To fold the rear bench seat up:1. Lift up on the lever, located on the side of

the seat, while lifting the front of the seatcushion up.

2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion to-ward the back of the vehicle until it locksin place.

LRS2475 LRS2476


3. Repeat this process to raise and securethe seat cushion on the other side of thevehicle for maximum storage capacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seatingposition, reverse the process. Make sure toproperly push the seat cushion downinto place.

WARNING

• When the vehicle is being used tocarry cargo, properly secure all cargoto help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higherthan the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

• Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.Never ride in the rear seat unless theseat bottom cushions are in placeand latched.

• When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latchedposition. If they are not completelysecured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

A. Child restraint anchor points

Folding the rear bench seat down(if so equipped)The rear bench seatback can be tilted for-ward to access the child restraint anchorpoint locations or the jacking equipment.To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strapup O1 and tilt the seatback. The child re-straint anchor points can be accessed be-hind the rear bench seatback. The jackingequipment can be accessed from behindthe passenger's side seatback.

LRS2477 LRS2478


WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper re-straints could result in serious injury ordeath in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplementthe other vehicle safety systems. Theymay provide additional protectionagainst injury in certain rear end colli-sions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly,as specified in this section. Check theadjustment after someone else usesthe seat. Do not attach anything to thehead restraint/headrest stalks or re-move the head restraint/headrest. Donot use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the headrestraint/headrest was removed, rein-stall and properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupantuses the seating position. Failure to fol-low these instructions can reduce theeffectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk ofserious injury or death in a collision.

LRS2020Crew Cab

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS


The illustration shows the seating posi-tions equipped with head restraints/headrests.� Indicates the seating position isequipped with a head restraint.� Indicates the seating position isequipped with a headrest.+ Indicates the seating position is notequipped with a head restraint or headrest(if applicable).• Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

• Adjustable head restraints/headrestshave multiple notches along the stalk(s)to lock them in a desired adjustment po-sition.

• The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch tosecure them to the seat frame.

• Proper Adjustment:– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center ofyour ear is approximately level with thecenter of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher thanthe recommended alignment, placethe head restraint/headrest at thehighest position.

• If the head restraint/headrest has beenremoved, ensure that it is reinstalled andlocked in place before riding in that des-ignated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS3150King Cab®

LRS2300


NON-ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTRAINT/HEADRESTCOMPONENTS1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVEUse the following procedure to remove thehead restraint/headrest:1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrestfrom the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop-erly in a secure place so it is not loose inthe vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupantuses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302


INSTALL1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks

with the holes in the seat. Make sure thatthe head restraint/headrest is facing thecorrect direction. The stalk with thenotch (notches) O1 must be installed inthe hole with the lock knob O2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses theseating position.

ADJUSTFor adjustable head restraint/headrestAdjust the head restraint/headrest so thecenter is level with the center of your ears. Ifyour ear position is still higher than therecommended alignment, place the headrestraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrestMake sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob is engaged inthe notch before riding in that designatedseating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351


RaiseTo raise the head restraint/headrest, pull itup.Make sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob is engaged inthe notch before riding in that designatedseating position.

LowerTo lower, push and hold the lock knob andpush the head restraint/headrest down.Make sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob is engaged inthe notch before riding in that designatedseating position.

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEADRESTRAINTS

WARNING

• Always adjust the head restraintsproperly as specified in this section.Failure to do so can reduce the effec-tiveness of the active head restraint.

• Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

LRS2305 LRS2306 SPA1025


• Do not attach anything to the headrestraint stalks. Doing so could im-pair active head restraint function.

The active head restraint moves forwardutilizing the force that the seatback re-ceives from the occupant in a rear-end col-lision. The movement of the head restrainthelps support the occupant's head by re-ducing its backward movement and help-ing absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.Active head restraints are effective for col-lisions at low to medium speeds in which itis said that whiplash injury occurs most.Active head restraints operate only in cer-tain rear-end collisions. After the collision,the head restraints return to their originalpositions.Properly adjust the active head restraintsas described in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat with both feet on thefloor, your chances of being injured or killedin a collision and/or the severity of injurymay be greatly reduced. NISSAN stronglyencourages you and all of your passengersto buckle up every time you drive, even ifyour seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts beworn at all times when a vehicle is beingdriven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides inthis vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be in therear seats and in an appropriaterestraint.

WARNING

• The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do somay reduce the effectiveness of theentire restraint system and increasethe chance or severity of injury in anaccident. Serious injury or death canoccur if the seat belt is not wornproperly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING

• Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

• Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOTTHE WAIST. A lap belt worn too highcould increase the risk of internal in-juries in an accident.

• Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-curely fastened to the proper buckle.

• Do not wear the seat belt inside outor twisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

• Do not allow more than one personto use the same seat belt.

• Never carry more people in the ve-hicle than there are seat belts.

• If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed andall seat belts fastened, it may indi-cate a malfunction in the system.Have the system checked. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• No changes should be made to theseat belt system. For example, do notmodify the seat belt, add material, orinstall devices that may change theseat belt routing or tension. Doing somay affect the operation of the seatbelt system. Modifying or tamperingwith the seat belt system may resultin serious personal injury.

• Once seat belt pretensioner(s) haveactivated, they cannot be reused andmust be replaced together with theretractor. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any colli-sion. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.NISSAN recommends that all seatbelt assemblies in use during a colli-sion be replaced unless the collisionwas minor and the belts show nodamage and continue to operateproperly. Seat belt assemblies not inuse during a collision should also beinspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation isnoted.

• All child restraints and attachinghardware should be inspected afterany collision. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer's inspection in-structions and replacement recom-mendations. The child restraintsshould be replaced if they aredamaged.

SSS0014


SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT ANDCHIMEThe driver and front passenger seat isequipped with an enhanced seat belt re-minder function. If your vehicle is equippedwith an enhanced seat belt reminder func-tion, a visual and audible alert (Driver’s seatonly) will operate if a driver or front passen-ger seat belt is unbuckled at speeds of ap-proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more un-der the following conditions:• If the driver seat belt is not fastened.

• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas-tened and the seat is occupied by a pas-senger for 7 seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas-tened and objects or external force onthe passenger seat change the seat beltreminder classification to Occupied.

The seat belt warning light will flash underthe conditions shown above until the nec-essary seat belt is securely fastened.A warning chime will sound for approxi-mately 90 seconds or until one of the fol-lowing conditions is met:• The unbuckled front occupant’s seat belt

is securely fastened.• The ignition is turned off.The below situations could result in theseat belt reminder light being illuminatedand the chime sounding (Driver’s seat only),even with no occupant present in the pas-senger seat:• Heavy objects placed on the seat.• Someone pushing or pulling on the front

passenger seat.

• An object placed under the front passen-ger seat.

• An object placed between the seat cush-ion and center console or between theseat cushion and the door.

• An object hanging on the seat or placedin the seatback pocket.

• A child restraint or other object pressingagainst the rear of the seatback.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat belt shouldbe worn snug and always position the lapbelt as low as possible around the hips, notthe waist. Place the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Never runthe lap/shoulder belt over your abdominalarea. Contact your doctor for specific rec-ommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured personsuse seat belts. Check with your doctor forspecific recommendations.

LRS0786


THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides inthis vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be in therear seats and in an appropriaterestraint.

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

• For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back and upright in the seat withboth feet on the floor and adjust theseat belt properly.

• Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) mode seat belts. Ifthe seat belt becomes wrappedaround a child’s neck with the ALRmode activated, the child can be se-riously injured or killed if the seat beltretracts and becomes tight. This canoccur even if the vehicle is parked.Unbuckle the seat belt to release thechild. If the seat belt cannot be un-buckled or is already unbuckled, re-lease the child by cutting the seatbelt with a suitable tool (such as aknife or scissors) to release the seatbelt.

Fastening the seat belts (frontseats all models and rear seatsCrew Cab models)

WRS0175Manual front seat shown

(if so equipped)


1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-tor and insert the tongue into the buckleOA until you hear and feel the latchengage.• The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits theseat belt to move, and allows yousome freedom of movement in theseat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulledfrom its fully retracted position,firmly pull the belt and release it.Then smoothly pull the belt out ofthe retractor.

LRS2897Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2674


3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips OB as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack OC . Besure the shoulder belt is routed overyour shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rearseating positions’ three-point seat beltshave two modes of operation:• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-tend and retract to allow the driver andpassengers some freedom of movementin the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly orduring certain impacts.The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locksthe seat belt for child restraint installation.When the ALR mode is activated, the seatbelt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from thebuckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-turns to the ELR mode after the seat beltfully retracts. For additional information, re-fer to “Child restraints” in this section.The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During nor-mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALRmode should not be activated. If it is ac-tivated it may cause uncomfortable seatbelt tension. It can also change the op-eration of the front passenger air bag.For additional information, refer to“Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-tain that the seatbacks are completelysecured in the latched position. If theyare not completely secured, passen-gers may be injured in an accident orsudden stop.

LRS2675


Fastening the seat belts ( jumpseats for King Cab® models)1. Open the jump seat. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-tor and insert the tongue into the buckleOA until you hear and feel the latchengage.• The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits theseat belt to move, and allows yousome freedom of movement in theseat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulledfrom its fully retracted position,firmly pull the belt and release it.Then smoothly pull the belt out ofthe retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips OB as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack OC . Besure the shoulder belt is routed overyour shoulder and across your chest.

The jump seat position's three-point seatbelts have two modes of operation:• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extendand retract to allow the passengers somefreedom of movement in the seat. The ELRlocks the seat belt when the vehicle slowsdown rapidly or during certain impacts.

LRS0556 LRS2723 LRS2724


The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locksthe seat belt for child restraint installation.When the ALR mode is activated, the seatbelt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from thebuckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-turns to the ELR mode after the seat beltfully retracts. For additional information, re-fer to “Child restraints” in this section.The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During nor-mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALRmode should not be activated. If it is ac-tivated it may cause uncomfortable seatbelt tension. It can also change the op-eration of the front passenger air bag.For additional information, refer to“Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-tain that the seatbacks are completelysecured in the latched position. If theyare not completely secured, passen-gers may be injured in an accident orsudden stop.

Unfastening the seat beltsTo unfasten the seat belt, press the buttonon the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati-cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lockseat belt movement by two separatemethods:• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor• When the vehicle slows down rapidlyTo increase your confidence in the seatbelts, check the operation as follows:• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck, get the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service or to learn more about seat beltoperation.

WRS0139


Shoulder belt height adjustment(front seats)The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you. Foradditional information, refer to “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” in this section. Toadjust, pull out the adjustment button O1

and move the shoulder belt anchor to thedesired position O2 , so the belt passes overthe center of the shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Release the ad-justment button to lock the shoulder beltanchor into position.

WARNING

• After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move theshoulder belt anchor up and down tomake sure it is securely fixed inposition.

• The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so may re-duce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in anaccident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, itis not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extenderthat is compatible with the installed seatbelts is available for purchase. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)of length and may be used for either thedriver or front passenger seating position.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for assistance with purchasing anextender if an extender is required.

WARNING

• Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,made by the same company whichmade the original equipment seatbelts, should be used with NISSANseat belts.

• Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary usecould result in serious personal injuryin the event of an accident.

• Never use seat belt extenders to in-stall child restraints. If the child re-straint is not secured properly, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE• To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution rec-ommended for cleaning upholstery orcarpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allowthe seat belts to dry in the shade. Do notallow the seat belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

• If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul-der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

LRS0242


• Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, suchas buckles, tongues, retractors, flexiblewires and anchors, work properly. If looseparts, deterioration, cuts or other dam-age on the webbing is found, the entireseat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seatbelt becomes wrapped around a child’sneck with the ALR mode activated, thechild can be seriously injured or killed ifthe seat belt retracts and becomestight. This can occur even if the vehicleis parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-lease the child. If the seat belt cannotbe unbuckled or is already unbuckled,release the child by cutting the seatbelt with a suitable tool (such as a knifeor scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properly re-strained.In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, includ-ing doctors, teachers, government trafficsafety offices, and community organiza-tions. Every child is different, so be sure tolearn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:• Rear-facing child restraint• Forward-facing child restraint• Booster seatThe proper restraint depends on the child'ssize. Generally, infants up to about 1 yearand less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placedin rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for chil-dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-straints and are at least 1 year old. Boosterseats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-tection. The vehicle's seat belts maynot fit them properly. The shoulder beltmay come too close to the face or neck.The lap belt may not fit over their smallhip bones. In an accident, an improp-erly fitting seat belt could cause seriousor fatal injury. Always use appropriatechild restraints.

CHILD SAFETY


All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require the use of approved childrestraints for infants and small children. Foradditional information, refer to “Child re-straints” in this section.A child restraint may be secured in the ve-hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-chors and Tethers for CHildren) system orwith the vehicle seat belt. For additionalinformation, refer to “Child restraints” in thissection.NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rearseat if available (Crew Cab models). Stud-ies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.This is especially important becauseyour vehicle has a supplemental re-straint system (air bag system) for thefront passenger. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should beplaced in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSANrecommends that infants be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standards or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standards. You should choosea child restraint that fits your vehicle andalways follow the manufacturer's instruc-tions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over 1 year old and weighat least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in arear-facing child restraint as long as pos-sible up to the height or weight limit of thechild restraint. Children who outgrow theheight or weight limit of the rear-facingchild restraint and are at least 1 year oldshould be secured in a forward-facing childrestraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-facturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommen-dations. NISSAN recommends that smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose achild restraint that fits your vehicle and al-ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDRENChildren should remain in a forward-facingchild restraint with a harness until theyreach the maximum height or weight limitallowed by the child restraint manufac-turer.Once a child outgrows the height or weightlimit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommendsthat the child be placed in a commerciallyavailable booster seat to obtain properseat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, thebooster seat should raise the child so thatthe shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the chest and the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder. The shoulder beltshould not cross the neck or face andshould not fall off the shoulder. The lap beltshould lie snugly across the lower hips orupper thighs, not the abdomen. A boosterseat can only be used in seating positionsthat have a three-point type seat belt. Thebooster seat should fit the vehicle seat andhave a label certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.


A booster seat should be used until thechild can pass the seat belt fit test below:• Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?• Is the child able to sit without slouching?• Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on thefloor?

• Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lapbelt low and snug across the hips andshoulder belt across mid-chest andshoulder)?

• Is the child able to use the properly ad-justed head restraint/headrest?

• Will the child be able to stay in position forthe entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-tions, the child should remain in a boosterseat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may followdifferent guidelines. Check local andstate regulations to confirm your child isusing the correct restraint system beforetraveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in thecargo area. The child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a sudden stop or col-lision.

LRS2690


PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and instal-lation of child restraints could resultin serious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:– Do not install rear-facing child re-

straints in the driver's side rearseating position.

– For forward-facing child seatsand boosters, DO NOT install if thechild restraint base extends pastthe forward edge of the seatcushion.

– The child restraint must be usedand installed properly. Always fol-low all of the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions for instal-lation and use.

– Infants and children should neverbe held on anyone's lap. Even thestrongest adult cannot resist theforces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around botha child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that childrenare safer when properly re-strained in the rear seat than inthe front seat. If you must install aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, refer to “Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts” in thissection.

– Even with the NISSAN AdvancedAir Bag System, never install arear-facing child restraint in thefront seat. An inflating air bagcould seriously injure or kill a child.A rear-facing child restraint mustonly be used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-straint that will fit the child andvehicle. Some child restraints maynot fit properly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS


– Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used to at-tach adult seat belts, or otheritems or equipment to the vehicle.Doing so could damage the childrestraint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly in-stalled using the damaged an-chorage, and a child could beseriously injured or killed in acollision.

– Never use the anchor points foradult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in thefront passenger seat (King Cab®models).

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should al-ways be placed in an appropriatechild restraint while in the vehicle.

• When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH sys-tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose objects can injure oc-cupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seatingsurface and buckles before placing achild in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universalchild restraint anchor system, referred toas the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system. Some child restraintsinclude rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to these an-chors. For additional information, refer to“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system” in this section.If you do not have a LATCH compatiblechild restraint, the vehicle seat belts can beused.Several manufacturers offer child re-straints for infants and children of varioussizes. When selecting any child restraint,keep the following points in mind:• Choose only a restraint with a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the child restraint in your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle'sseat and seat belt system.

• If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in the childrestraint and check the various adjust-ments to be sure the child restraint iscompatible with your child. Choose achild restraint that is designed for yourchild's height and weight. Always followall recommended procedures.

• If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg),you may use either the LATCH anchors orthe seat belt to install the child restraint(not both at the same time).

• If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not thelower anchors) to install the child re-straint.

• Be sure to follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions for installa-tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-quires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to thedesignated anchor point on the vehicle.


LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with special an-chor points that are used with LATCH sys-tem compatible child restraints. This sys-tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIXor ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seatbelt to secure the child restraint unless thecombined weight of the child and child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs., (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and child restraintis greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-

cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) toinstall the child restraint. Be sure to followthe child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation.The LATCH lower anchor points are pro-vided to install child restraints in the rearoutboard seating positions only. Do not at-tempt to install a child restraint in the cen-ter position using the LATCH lower an-chors.

LATCH lower anchorWARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result in se-rious injury or death of a child or otherpassengers in a sudden stop or collision:– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH lower anchors. The child re-straint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower an-chor area. Feel to make sure thereare no obstructions over the an-chors such as seat belt webbing orseat cushion material. The child re-straint will not be secured properly ifthe lower anchors are obstructed.

LRS2962LATCH system lower anchor locations

(Crew Cab models)

LRS2963LATCH system lower anchor locations

(King Cab® models)


Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damage thechild restraint anchorages. The childrestraint will not be properly installedusing the damaged anchorage, and achild could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located asshown. A label is attached to the seatback(Crew Cab models) to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

LRS3036LATCH lower anchor location

LRS2984LATCH label locations

(Crew Cab models)


Installing child restraint LATCHlower anchor attachmentsLATCH compatible child restraints includetwo rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to two an-chors located at certain seating positionsin your vehicle. With this system, you do nothave to use a vehicle seat belt to secure thechild restraint. Check your child restraint fora label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in theinstructions provided by the child restraintmanufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint.

Top tether anchorWARNING

• Do not allow cargo to contact the toptether strap when it is attached tothe top tether anchor. Properly se-cure the cargo so it does not contactthe top tether strap. Cargo that is notproperly secured or cargo that con-tacts the top tether strap may dam-age it during a collision. A child couldbe seriously injured or killed in a col-lision if the top tether strap isdamaged.

• Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damagethe child restraint anchorages. Thechild restraint will not be properly in-stalled using the damaged anchor-ages, and a child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

LRS0661LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0662LATCH rigid-mounted attachment


Top tether anchor point locationsAnchor points are located in the followinglocations:• On the back of the front passenger seat

(King Cab® models) as shown.

• Under the rear window behind the rearbench seat (Crew Cab models) as shown.

1. Cover plate

2. Routing bracket

3. Anchor point• On the floor between the jump seat belt

buckles in the center of the vehicle (KingCab® models) as shown.

The anchor point is located on the floorbetween the jump seat belt buckles in thecenter of the vehicle. The routing bracket islocated behind the cover plate under therear window above the jump seat.

LRS0572Front passenger seat

(King Cab® models)

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

LRS0393Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models)

LRS2101Jump seats

(King Cab® models - passenger sideshown)


REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCH (CrewCab models)For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint in the rear seats using theLATCH system:1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.Check to make sure the LATCH attach-ment is properly attached to the loweranchors.

LRS2997Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2996Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2


3. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your hand to com-press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while tightening the webbing ofthe anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint or try installing by using the

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 4.

LRS0673Rear-facing – step 3



REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCH —JUMP SEAT (King Cab® models)

WARNING

• If a child restraint system is not in-stalled properly, the child could beseriously injured or killed in a suddenstop or collision.– Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint system on the driver's sidejump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the passenger's side jumpseat without unfolding the seatextender.

WARNING

• To install a rear-facing child restraint onthe passenger's side jump seat, it willbe necessary to move the front passen-ger's seat fully forward and place thefront seatback upright or tilt it forward.Failure to do so may cause the childrestraint to not be installed properlyand cause serious injury or death in asudden stop or collision.– The front seat cannot be used when

a rear-facing child restraint is in-stalled on the jump seat. Attemptingto do so could cause serious injury ina sudden stop or collision.

LRS2357 LRS2356


For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a child re-straint on the jump seat.1. To access the jump seat extension (pas-

senger's side only) OA on the jump seat,pull up OB on the extension to unfold it tothe open position. Then unfold the twosupport legs OC and lower the jump seatto the full open seating position.

LRS2725 LRS2502Full open seating position


2. Move the front passenger's seat into thefull forward position. Then move thefront seatback to the upright or tiltedforward position. Position the child re-straint on the jump seat. The direction ofthe child restraint depends on the typeof the child restraint and the size of thechild. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions.

3. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions.


LRS2552Rear-facing — step 2

LRS2997Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 4

LRS2996Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 4


5. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your hand to com-press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while tightening the webbing ofthe anchor attachments.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint or try installing by using the

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS (Crew Cab models)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury or death to achild in a sudden stop or collision. Also,it can change the operation of the frontpassenger air bag. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Front passenger airbag and status light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.




Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.

WRS0256Rear-facing – step 1



3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt re-tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraintmode). It reverts to the ELR mode whenthe seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraintto compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on theseat belt.





6. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Tryto tug it forward and check to see if thebelt holds the restraint in place. If therestraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse. If the seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS — JUMP SEAT (King Cab®models)

WARNING

• The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mustbe used when installing a child re-straint. Failure to use the ALR modewill result in the child restraint notbeing properly secured. The restraintcould tip over or be loose and causeinjury to a child in a sudden stop or


LRS0597


collision. Also, it can change the op-eration of the front passenger airbag. For additional information, referto “Front passenger air bag and sta-tus light” in this section.

• A child restraint system will not beinstalled properly and the child couldbe seriously injured or killed in a sud-den stop or collision.– Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint system on the driver's sidejump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the passenger's side jumpseat without unfolding the seatextender. WARNING

• To install a rear-facing child restrainton the passenger's side jump seat, itwill be necessary to move the frontpassenger's seat fully forward andplace the front seatback upright ortilt it forward. Failure to do so maycause the child restraint to not be in-stalled properly and cause seriousinjury or death in a sudden stop orcollision.– The front seat cannot be used

when a rear-facing child restraintis installed on the jump seat. At-

tempting to do so could cause se-rious injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

LRS0549


For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a child re-straint on the passenger's side jump seat.1. To access the jump seat extension OA on

the passenger's side jump seat, pull upOB on the extension to unfold it to theopen position. Then unfold the two sup-port legs OC and lower the jump seat tothe full open seating position.



2. Move the front passenger's seat into thefull forward position. Then move thefront seatback to the upright or tiltedforward position. Position the child re-straint on the jump seat. The direction ofthe child restraint depends on the typeof the child restraint and the size of thechild. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage OA .Be sure to follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions for beltrouting.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended OB . At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the ALR mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to the ELR modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.





5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt OC to remove any slackin the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the child re-straint to compress the vehicle seatcushion and seatback while pulling upon the seat belt.

7. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the seat belt path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug itforward and check to see if the seat beltholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the seat beltas necessary, or put the restraint in an-other seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.



WRS0918Rear-facing — step 7



After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCH (Crew Cab models)For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint in the rear seats usingthe LATCH system:1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.Check to make sure the LATCH attach-ment is properly attached to the loweranchors.If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap to thetether anchor point. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Installing top tetherstrap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that requirethe use of a top tether strap in seatingpositions that do not have a top tetheranchor.

LRS2995Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

LRS2994Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2


3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the child re-straint is removed. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating position ora different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your knee to com-press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while tightening the webbing ofthe anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer's instructions to re-move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

LRS0671Forward-facing – step 4

WRS0697Forward-facing – step 6



Installing top tether strap (rearbench seat for Crew Cab models)To access the anchor points behind therear bench seat, tilt the rear seatback for-ward by lifting up on the pull strap behindthe seatback.

Before securing the child restraint with theLATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat-ing positions for Crew Cab models) followthese steps.1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest to position the toptether strap as shown. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store it ina secure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint/headrest when the child

LRS0392Anchor point access

1. Pull strap

2. Anchor points


1. Top tether strap

2. Tether strap

3. Tether anchor point


restraint is removed. For additional in-formation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-chor point as shown.

4. Return the seatback to the lockedposition.

5. Refer back to child restraint installationsteps before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when install-ing a top tether strap, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice. FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCH — JUMP SEAT (King Cab®models)

WARNING

• If a child restraint system is not in-stalled properly, the child could beseriously injured or killed in a suddenstop or collision.– Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the passenger's side jumpseat without unfolding the seatextender.

– For forward-facing child seatsand boosters, DO NOT install if thechild restraint base extends pastthe forward edge of the driver'sside seat cushion.

LRS2360



Follow these steps to install a child re-straint on the jump seat.1. To access the jump seat extension (pas-

senger's side only) OA on the jump seat,pull up OB on the extension to unfold it tothe open position. Then unfold the twosupport legs OC and lower the jump seatto the full open seating position.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions.




If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap to thetether anchor point. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Installing top tetherstrap” in this section. Do not install childrestraints that require the use of a toptether strap in seating positions that donot have a top tether anchor.

4. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the child re-straint is removed. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating position ora different child restraint.

LRS2995Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 3

LRS2994Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3


5. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your knee to com-press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while tightening the webbing ofthe anchor attachments.


7. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should not movemore than 1 inch (25 mm), from side toside. Try to tug it forward and check tosee if the LATCH attachment holds therestraint in place. If the restraint is notsecure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in an-other seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.





Installing top tether strap — jumpseat (King Cab® models)

WARNING

• Do not secure the top tether strap tothe routing bracket. If the child restraintis not anchored properly, the risk of achild being injured or killed in a collisionor a sudden stop greatly increases.


The child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withLATCH lower anchor attachments.First, secure the child restraint with theLATCH lower anchors (rear seating posi-tions).1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top

tether strap routing bracket for the jumpseat.

2. Route the top tether strap through therouting bracket.

3. Secure the top tether strap to the tetheranchor point as shown.


If you have any questions when install-ing a top tether strap, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — FRONTPASSENGER AND REAR BENCHSEAT (Crew Cab models)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Front passenger air bagand status light” in this section.

LRS0561Jump seat (King Cab® models)

1. Top tether strap

2. Routing bracket




Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seatbelt in the rear seats (Crew Cab models) orin the front passenger seat:1. If you must install a child restraint in the

front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Child re-straints for infants must be used in therear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the child restraintis removed. For additional information, referto “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating position ora different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap to thetether anchor point (rear seat installa-tion only). For additional information, re-fer to “Installing top tether strap” in thissection.

WRS0699Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1



Do not install child restraints that requirethe use of a top tether strap in seatingpositions that do not have a top tetheranchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt re-tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraintmode). It reverts to ELR mode when theseat belt is fully retracted.





6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the child re-straint with your knee to compress thevehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer's instructions to removeany slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Tryto tug it forward and check to see if theseat belt holds the restraint in place. Ifthe restraint is not secure, tighten theseat belt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.




10. If the child restraint is installed in thefront passenger seat, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position. The frontpassenger air bag status lightshould illuminate. If this light is not illu-minated, refer to "Front passenger airbag and status light" in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Installing top tether strap (rearbench seat for Crew Cab models)To access the anchor points behind therear bench seat, tilt the rear seatback for-ward by lifting up on the pull strap behindthe seatback.

The child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withthe seat belts.First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest to position the toptether strap as shown. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store it in


LRS0392Anchor point access

1. Pull strap

2. Anchor points


1. Top tether strap

2. Tether strap



a secure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint/headrest when the childrestraint is removed. For additional in-formation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.



4. Return the seatback to the lockedposition.



FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — FRONTPASSENGER AND JUMP SEATS(King Cab® models)

WARNING

• The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mustbe used when installing a child re-straint. Failure to use the ALR modewill result in the child restraint notbeing properly secured. The restraintcould tip over or be loose and cause

injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the op-eration of the front passenger airbag. For additional information, referto “Front passenger air bag and sta-tus light” in this section.

• If a child restraint system is not in-stalled properly, the child could beseriously injured or killed in a suddenstop or collision.– Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the passenger's side jumpseat without unfolding the seatextender.

– For forward-facing child seatsand boosters, DO NOT install if thechild restraint system base ex-tends past the forward edge ofthe driver's side seat cushion.

LRS0598


For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seatbelt in the jump seats (King Cab® models)or in the front passenger seat:1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position.Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat.

2. To access the jump seat extension (pas-senger's side only) OA on the jump seat,pull up OB on the extension to unfold it tothe open position. Then unfold the twosupport legs OC and lower the jump seatto the full open seating position.

WRS0699Forward-facing (front passenger seat)

— step 1

LRS2725Forward-facing ( jump seat for King

Cab® models) — step 2

LRS2502Full open seating position


3. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the child re-straint is removed. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating position ora different child restraint.

4. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions for belt routing.If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether an-chor point. For additional information, referto “Installing top tether strap” in this section.Do not install child restraints that requirethe use of a top tether strap to seatingpositions that do not have a top tetheranchor.

WRS0919Forward-facing — step 3



5. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt re-tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraintmode). It reverts to the ELR mode whenthe seat belt is fully retracted.


7. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraintwith your knee to compress the vehicleseat cushion and seatback while pullingup on the seat belt.


LRS0667Forward-facing — step 5

LRS0668Forward-facing — step 6



9. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the seat belt path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to tugit forward and check to see if the beltholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the belt asnecessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need totry a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.


11. If the child restraint is installed in thefront passenger seat, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position. The front pas-senger air bag status light shouldilluminate. If this light is not illuminated,refer to “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” in this section. Move thechild restraint to another seating po-sition. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.




Installing top tether strap — frontpassenger seat (King Cab®models)

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damage thechild restraint anchorages. The childrestraint will not be properly installedusing the damaged anchorages, and achild could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withthe seat belts.First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest to position the toptether straps over the top of the seat-back. If the head restraint/headrest isremoved, store it in a secure place. Besure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is re-moved. For additional information, referto “Head restraints/headrests” in thissection.



4. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer’s instructions to re-move any slack.


LRS0572Front passenger seat (King Cab®

models)1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point


1. Top tether strap2. Routing bracket3. Tether anchor point

Installing top tether strap — jumpseat (King Cab® models)

WARNING

• Do not secure the top tether strap tothe routing bracket. If the child re-straint is not anchored properly, therisk of a child being injured or killed ina collision or a sudden stop greatlyincreases.


The child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withthe seat belts.First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top

tether strap routing bracket for the jumpseat.

2. Route the top tether strap through therouting bracket.

3. Secure the top tether strap to the tetheranchor point as shown.



BOOSTER SEATSFor additional information on installing abooster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured or killed in a sudden stop or col-lision greatly increases:– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child's faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child'sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0561Jump seat (King Cab® models)


Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the following pointsin mind:• Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca-nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the booster seat in your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle’sseat and seat belt system.

• Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or abovethe center of the child’s ears. For example,if a low back booster seat is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat should be used.

• If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place the child in the boosterseat and check the various adjustmentsto be sure the booster seat is compatiblewith the child. Always follow all recom-mended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated.The instructions in this section apply tobooster seat installation in the rear seatsor the front passenger seat.

LRS2479

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

LRS0453 LRS0464


Booster seat installation — frontpassenger seat (all models) andrear seat (Crew Cab models)

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use thelap/shoulder belt in the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-tions of this manual before installing a childrestraint.Follow these steps to install a booster seatin the rear seat or in the front passengerseat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front-facing direction.Always follow the booster seat manu-facturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the boosterseat is removed. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper booster

WRS0699 LRS0454Front passenger position


seat fit, try another seating position or adifferent booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat beltlow and snug on the child’s hips. Be sureto follow the booster seat manufactur-er’s instructions for adjusting the seatbelt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seatbelt toward the retractor to take up ex-tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt ispositioned across the top, middle por-tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’sinstructions for adjusting the seat beltrouting.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in “Three-point type seat beltwith retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switchin the ON position. The front passengerair bag status light may or may notilluminate, depending on the size of thechild and the type of booster seat beingused. For additional information, refer to“Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

Booster seat installation — jumpseat (King Cab® models)

WARNING

• If a child restraint system is not in-stalled properly, the child could beseriously injured or killed in a suddenstop or collision.– For boosters, DO NOT install if the

child restraint system base ex-tends past the forward edge ofthe seat cushion.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the passenger's side jumpseat without unfolding the seatextender.

• To avoid injury to child, do not use thelap/shoulder belt in the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) mode whenusing a booster seat with the seatbelts.

WRS0475


For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-tions of this manual before installing a childrestraint.Follow these steps to install a booster seatin the jump seats:

1. To access the jump seat extension (pas-senger's side only) OA on the jump seat,pull up OB on the extension to unfold it tothe open position. Then unfold the twosupport legs OC and lower the jump seatto the full open seating position.

LRS2725 LRS2502


2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front-facing direction.Always follow the booster seat manu-facturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the boosterseat is removed. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Head restraint/headrest” in this section.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper boosterseat fit, try another seating position or adifferent booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat beltlow and snug on the child’s hips. Be sureto follow the booster seat manufactur-er’s instructions for adjusting the seatbelt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seatbelt toward the retractor to take up ex-tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt ispositioned across the top, middle por-tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’sinstructions for adjusting the seat beltrouting.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in “Three-point type seat beltwith retractor” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRSThis SRS section contains important infor-mation concerning the following systems:• Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN AdvancedAir Bag System)

• Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag

• Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-temThe NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System canhelp cushion the impact force to the headand chest of the driver and front passengerin certain frontal collisions.Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag systemThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest area of the driver andfront passenger in certain side-impact col-lisions. The side air bags are designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted.

LRS0539

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS)


Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systemThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions in certainside-impact or rollover collisions. In a side-impact, the curtain air bags are designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bagsare designed to inflate and remain inflatedfor a short time.The SRS is designed to supplement thecrash protection provided by the seat beltsand is not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and theoccupant seated a suitable distance awayfrom the steering wheel, instrument paneland door finishers. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

WARNING

• The front air bags ordinarily will not in-flate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

• The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Front passenger air bagand status light” in this section.

• The seat belts and the front air bagsare most effective when you are sit-ting well back and upright in the seat.The front air bags inflate with greatforce. Even with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System, if you are un-restrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in anyway, you are at greater risk of injuryor death in a crash. You may also re-ceive serious or fatal injuries fromthe front air bag if you are up againstit when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far awayas practical from the steering wheel

WRS0031


or instrument panel. Always properlyuse the seat belts.

• The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sen-sors that detect if the seat belts arefastened. The NISSAN Advanced AirBag System monitors the severity ofa collision and seat belt usage, theninflates the air bags as needed. Fail-ure to properly wear seat belts canincrease the risk or severity of injuryin an accident.

• The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sen-sor (pressure sensor) that turns thefront passenger air bag OFF undersome conditions. This sensor is onlyused in this seat. Failure to be prop-erly seated and wearing the seat beltcan increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident. For additionalinformation, refer to “Front passen-ger air bag and status light” in thissection.

• Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them insidethe steering wheel rim could increasethe risk that they are injured whenthe front air bag inflates.

ARS1133


WARNING

• Never let children ride unrestrainedor extend their hands or face out ofthe window. Do not attempt to holdthem in your lap or arms. Some ex-amples of dangerous riding posi-tions are shown in the illustrations.

WARNING

• Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be prop-erly restrained in the rear seat, ifpossible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043


WARNING

• Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat.An inflating front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Childrestraints” in this section.

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256


WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bags:• The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the eventof a frontal impact, rear impact, orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reducethe risk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

WRS0431Do not lean against the door.

LRS0396Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162Do not lean against doors or windows.


WARNING

• The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags are most effectivewhen you are sitting well back andupright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain air bag inflate with greatforce. Do not allow anyone to placetheir hand, leg or face near the sideair bag on the side of the seatback ofthe front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting inthe front seats or rear outboard seatsto extend their hand out of the win-dow or lean against the door. Someexamples of dangerous riding posi-tions are shown in the previousillustrations.

WARNING

• When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, youmay be seriously injured. Be espe-cially careful with children, whoshould always be properly re-strained. Some examples of danger-ous riding positions are shown in theillustrations.

• Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withside air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159


NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

2. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag module

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bags

5. Seat belt buckle switches

6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

7. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s sideshown; passenger’s side similar)

8. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

9. Crash zone sensor

10. Occupant classification system controlunit

11. Occupant classification sensor (pres-sure sensor)

12. Satellite sensors (passenger’s sideshown; driver’s side similar)

LRS3124


This vehicle is equipped with the NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System for the driver andfront passenger seats. This system is de-signed to meet certification requirementsunder U.S. regulations. It is also permitted inCanada. However, all of the information,cautions and warnings in this manualstill apply and must be followed.The driver supplemental front-impact airbag is located in the center of the steeringwheel. The front passenger supplementalfront-impact air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The frontair bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although theymay inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity frontal impact. They may not in-flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicledamage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-cation of proper front air bag system op-eration.The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Systemmonitors information from the crash zonesensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seatbelt buckle sensors, occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator opera-tion is based on the severity of a collisionand seat belt usage for the driver. For the

front passenger, it additionally monitorsthe weight of an occupant or object on theseat and seat belt tension. Based on infor-mation from the sensors, only one front airbag may inflate in a crash, depending onthe crash severity and whether the frontoccupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-tionally, the front passenger air bag may beautomatically turned off under some con-ditions, depending on the weight detectedon the front passenger seat and how theseat belt is used. If the front passenger airbag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta-tus light will be illuminated (if the seat isunoccupied, the light will not be illumi-nated, but the air bag will be off). For addi-tional information, refer to “Front passen-ger air bag and status light” in this section.One front air bag inflating does not indicateimproper performance of the system.If you have any questions about your airbag system, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to obtain informationabout the system. If you are consideringmodification of your vehicle due to a dis-ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-tact information is contained in the front ofthis Owner's Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by the re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-tion and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.Front air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants.They can help save lives and reduce seri-ous injuries. However, an inflating front airbag may cause facial abrasions or otherinjuries. Front air bags do not provide re-straint to the lower body.Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seatbelts should be correctly worn and thedriver and front passenger seated uprightas far as practical away from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. The front airbags inflate quickly in order to help protectthe front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can in-crease the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, the front air bagmodule during inflation.The front air bags deflate quickly after acollision.


The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START po-sition.After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designedto automatically turn OFF under someconditions. Read this section carefullyto learn how it operates. Proper use ofthe seat, seat belt and child restraints isnecessary for most effective protec-tion. Failure to follow all instructions inthis manual concerning the use ofseats, seat belts and child restraintscan increase the risk or severity of in-jury in an accident.

Status lightThe front passenger air bag status light

is located near the climate controls.After the ignition switch is placed in the"ON" position, the front passenger air bagstatus light on the instrument panel illumi-nates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff or remains illuminated depending onthe front passenger seat occupied status.The light operates as follows:• Unoccupied front passenger's seat: The

light is OFF and the front passengerair bag is OFF and will not inflate in acrash.

• Front passenger's seat occupied by asmall adult, child or child restraint as out-lined in this section: The light illumi-nates to indicate that the front passen-ger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in acrash.

• Occupied front passenger seat and thepassenger meet the conditions outlinedin this section: The light is OFF toindicate that the front passenger air bagis operational.

WRS0475


Front passenger air bagThe front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF when the vehicle isoperated under some conditions as de-scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFFit will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bagand other air bags in your vehicle are notpart of this system.The purpose of the regulation is to helpreduce the risk of injury or death from aninflating air bag to certain front passengerseat occupants, such as children, by requir-ing the air bag to be automatically turnedOFF. Certain sensors are used to meet therequirements.One sensor used is the occupant classifi-cation sensor (pressure sensor). It is in thebottom of the front passenger seat cush-ion and is designed to detect an occupantand objects on the seat by weight. It workstogether with seat belt sensors describedin this section. For example, if a child is inthe front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System is designed to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF in accor-dance with the regulations. Also, if a childrestraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and thechild’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classifi-cation sensor operation can vary depend-ing on the front passenger seat belt sen-sors.The front passenger seat belt sensors aredesigned to detect if the seat belt is buck-led and the amount of tension on the seatbelt, such as when it is in the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) mode (child re-straint mode). Based on the weight on theseat detected by the occupant classifica-tion sensor and the belt tension detectedon the seat belt, the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System determines whether the frontpassenger air bag should be automaticallyturned OFF as required by the regulations.Front passenger seat adult occupants whoare properly seated and using the seat beltas outlined in this manual should notcause the front passenger air bag to beautomatically turned OFF. For small adultsit may be turned OFF, however, if the occu-pant does not sit in the seat properly (forexample, by not sitting upright, by sitting onan edge of the seat, or by otherwise beingout of position), this could cause the sensorto turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if theoccupant improperly uses the seat belt inthe ALR mode, this could cause the air bagto be turned OFF. Always be sure to be

seated and wearing the seat belt properlyfor the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.NISSAN recommends that pre-teens andchildren be properly restrained in a rearseat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-propriate child restraints and boosterseats be properly installed in a rear seat. Ifthis is not possible, the occupant classifica-tion sensor and seat belt sensors are de-signed to operate as described above toturn the front passenger air bag OFF forspecified child restraints as required by theregulations. Failing to properly secure childrestraints and to use the ALR mode mayallow the restraint to tip or move in a colli-sion or sudden stop. This can also result inthe passenger air bag inflating in a crashinstead of being OFF. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-tion.If the front passenger seat is not occupied,the front passenger air bag is designed notto inflate in a crash. However, heavy objectsplaced on the seat could result in air baginflation, because of the object’s weight de-tected by the occupant classification sen-sor. Other conditions could also result in airbag inflation, such as if a child is standingon the seat, or if two children are on the


seat, contrary to the instructions in thismanual. Always be sure that you and allvehicle occupants are seated and re-strained properly.Using the front passenger air bag statuslight, you can monitor when the front pas-senger air bag is automatically turned OFFwith the seat occupied. The light will notilluminate when the front passenger seat isunoccupied.If an adult occupant is in the seat but thefront passenger air bag status light is illu-minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),it could be that the person is a small adult,or is not sitting on the seat properly or notusing the seat belt properly.If a child restraint must be used in the frontseat, the front passenger air bag status lightmay or may not be illuminated, dependingon the size of the child and the type of childrestraint being used. If the air bag status lightis not illuminated (indicating that the air bagmight inflate in a crash), it could be that thechild restraint or seat belt is not being usedproperly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used prop-erly and the occupant is positioned properly.If the air bag status light is not illuminated,reposition the occupant or child restraint in arear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status lightwill not illuminate even though you believethat the child restraint, the seat belts andthe occupant are properly positioned, thesystem may be sensing an unoccupiedseat (in which case the air bag is OFF). ANISSAN dealer can check that the system isOFF by using a special tool. However, untilyou have confirmed with a dealer that yourair bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System andfront passenger air bag status light willtake a few seconds to register a change inthe passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front pas-senger seat exits the vehicle, the front pas-senger air bag status light will go from OFFto ON for a few seconds and then to OFF.This is normal system operation and doesnot indicate a malfunction.If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-ger air bag system, the supplemental airbag warning light , located in the me-ter and gauges area of the instrumentpanel, will blink. Have the system checked. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact airbag precautions

WARNING

• Do not place any objects on thesteering wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel. Also, do not place anyobjects between any occupant andthe steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause in-jury if the front air bags inflate.

• Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the supplemental air bag system.This is to prevent accidental inflationof the supplemental air bag or dam-age to the supplemental air bagsystem.

• Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle's electrical system,suspension system or front endstructure. This could affect properoperation of the front air bag system.


• Tampering with the front air bag sys-tem may result in serious personalinjury. Tampering includes changesto the steering wheel and the instru-ment panel assembly by placing ma-terial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel orby installing additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

• Modifying or tampering with thefront passenger seat may result inserious personal injury. For example,do not change the front seats byplacing material on the seat cushionor by installing additional trim mate-rial, such as seat covers, on the seatthat are not specifically designed toassure proper air bag operation. Ad-ditionally, do not stow any objectsunder the front passenger seat or theseat cushion and seatback. Such ob-jects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the seat belt system. This may af-fect the front air bag system. Tam-pering with the seat belt system mayresult in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the front air bag. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring har-nesses* should not be modified ordisconnected. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on the airbag system.

• A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect the function of thesupplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identifica-tion.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the front airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner'sManual.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag androof-mounted curtainside-impact and rolloversupplemental air bag systemsThe side air bags are located in the outsideof the seatback of the front seats. The cur-tain air bags are located in the side roofrails. All of the information, cautions andwarnings in this manual apply and mustbe followed. The side air bags and curtainair bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity side collisions, although they may

LRS2501


inflate if the forces in another type of colli-sion are similar to those of a higher severityimpact. They are designed to inflate on theside where the vehicle is impacted. Theymay not inflate in certain side collisions.Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate incertain types of rollover collisions or near roll-overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements(for example, during severe off-roading) maycause the curtain air bags to inflate.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not alwaysan indication of proper side air bag andcurtain air bag operation.When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke isnot harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as itmay cause irritation and choking. Thosewith a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.Side air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest and pelvic area of the front occu-pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants inthe front and rear outboard seating posi-tions. They can help save lives and reduceserious injuries. However, an inflating side

air bag or curtain air bag may cause abra-sions or other injuries. Side air bags andcurtain air bags do not provide restraint tothe lower body.The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and passenger seated up-right as far as practical away from the sideair bag. Rear seat passengers should beseated as far away as practical from thedoor finishers and side roof rails. The sideair bags and curtain air bags inflate quicklyin order to help protect the occupants. Be-cause of this, the force of the side air bagand curtain air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, these air bag modules dur-ing inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.The curtain air bags will remain inflated fora short time.The side air bags and curtain air bagsoperate only when the ignition switch isin the ON or START position.After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

WARNING

• Do not place any objects near theseatback of the front seats. Also, donot place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door fin-isher and the front seat. Such objectsmay become dangerous projectilesand cause injury if a side air baginflates.

• Right after inflation, several side airbag and curtain air bag system com-ponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burnyourself.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damageto or accidental inflation of the sideair bag and curtain air bag systems.

• Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle's electrical system,suspension system or side panel.This could affect proper operation ofthe curtain air bag systems.


• Tampering with the side air bag sys-tem may result in serious personalinjury. For example, do not changethe front seats by placing materialnear the seatbacks or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the side air bag and curtainair bag. It is also recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-tion of electrical equipment. The SRSwiring harnesses* should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthor-ized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be usedon the side air bag or curtain air bagsystems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectorsare yellow or orange for easy identifica-tion.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the side air bagand curtain air bag systems and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner's Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)(front seats)

WARNING

• The pretensioner(s) cannot be re-used after activation. They must bereplaced together with the retractorand buckle as a unit.

• If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but pretensioner(s) are notactivated, be sure to have the preten-sioner system checked and, if neces-sary, replaced. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the pretensioner system. This is toprevent damage to or accidental ac-tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam-pering with the pretensioner systemmay result in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the pretensioner system. It isalso recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for installation of elec-trical equipment. Unauthorized elec-trical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on thepretensioner system.

• If you need to dispose of the preten-sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. Incorrect dis-posal procedures could cause per-sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activatewith the supplemental air bag system incertain types of collisions. Working with theseat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) helptighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.The pretensioner(s) are encased within theseat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.These seat belts are used the same way asconventional seat belts.


When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indi-cate a fire. Care should be taken not toinhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breath-ing condition should get fresh air promptly.After the pretensioner(s’) activation, loadlimiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces againstthe chest.The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in thepretensioner system. For additional infor-mation, refer to "Supplemental air bagwarning light" in this section. If the opera-tion of the supplemental air bag warninglight indicates there is a malfunction, havethe system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the preten-sioner system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner'sManual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLABELSWarning labels about the supplementalfront-impact air bag system are placed inthe vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restrainton a seat protected by an air bag infront of it. If the air bag deploys, it maycause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLIGHTThe supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.When the ignition switch is placed in the ONor START position, the supplemental airbag warning light illuminates for about 7seconds and then turns off. This means thesystem is operational.

WRS0885

1. SRS Air bag warning labelsThe warning labels are located on thesurface of the sun visor.

LRS0100


If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand pretensioner systems need servicing:• The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

• The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

• The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensionersystems may not operate properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand/or pretensioner systems will notoperate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible. Itis recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacementprocedureThe front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags and pretensioner(s) are designed toinflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-mental air bag warning light remains illu-minated after inflation has occurred. Thesesystems should be repaired and/or re-placed as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.When maintenance work is required on thevehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-lated parts should be pointed out to theperson performing the maintenance. Theignition switch should always be placed inthe LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

• Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function againand must be replaced. Additionally,the activated pretensioner(s) mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.However, the air bag module and pre-tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

• The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems and the preten-sioner system should be inspected ifthere is any damage to the front endor side portion of the vehicle. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag or pretensioner sys-tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

• If there is an impact to your vehiclefrom any direction, your OccupantClassification Sensor (OCS) should bechecked to verify it is still functioningcorrectly. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.The OCS should be checked even if noair bags deploy as a result of the im-pact. Failure to verify proper OCSfunction may result in an improperair bag deployment resulting in in-jury or death.


MEMO


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Compass and outside temperature display(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-25NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Rear window or outside mirror defrosterswitch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . 2-36Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-36Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Rear-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Under-seat storage bins(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Manual windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56Programming HomeLink® for Canadiancustomers and gate openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Operating the HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-59Reprogramming a single HomeLink®button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

1. Vents (P. 4-22)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/

turn signal switch (P. 2-30)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-71)Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System(P. 4-79, 4-96)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-70)Horn (P. 2-34)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-24)

6. Cruise control switches (P. 5-19)7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)8. Storage (P. 2-40)9. Audio system (P. 4-36)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-70)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-70)13. USB connection port (P. 4-55)

AUX input (P. 4-55)14. Power outlets (P. 2-39)15. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-37)Heated seat switches (if so equipped)(P. 2-35)Rear sonar switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-38)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-36)LIC4475

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

16. Shift lever (P. 5-14)17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)18. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-23)19. Climate controls (P. 4-22, P. 4-31)20. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)21. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-16)22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-34)

Hill descent control switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-36)Outside mirror controls (if so equipped)(P. 3-17)

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Warning and indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Speedometer4. Fuel gauge5. Change/reset button

6. OdometerTwin trip odometerTrip computer (if so equipped)Instrument brightness control knob

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETERThis vehicle is equipped with a speedom-eter and odometer. The speedometer islocated on the right side of the meter clus-ter. The odometer is located within the tripcomputer.

LIC4376

METERS AND GAUGES


SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-played when the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position.The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle is driven.The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the displayFor vehicles equipped with a twin tripodometer, pressing the change/reset but-ton changes the display as follows:Trip → Trip → Trip

For vehicles equipped with a trip computer,pressing the change/reset buttonchanges the display as follows:Trip → Trip → Distance toEmpty → Average speed → Average fuelconsumption → Journey time → TripFor additional information, refer to “Tripcomputer” in this section.Resetting the trip odometerPressing the change/reset button formore than 1 second resets the currentlydisplayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC4377 LIC0780With twin trip odometer

WIC0922With trip computer


Loose fuel cap warning messagePress the change/reset button OA for morethan 1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAPwarning message after the fuel cap hasbeen tightened. For additional information,refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section of thismanual.

Check tire pressure warningmessageThe CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warningmessage is displayed when the low tirepressure warning light is illuminated andlow tire pressure is detected. Check andadjust the tire pressure to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label. TheCHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-sage turns off when the low tire pressurewarning light turns off.

The low tire pressure warning light remainsilluminated until the tires are inflated to therecommended COLD tire pressure. TheCHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-sage is displayed each time the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position as longas the low tire pressure warning light re-mains illuminated.For additional information, refer to “Low tirepressure warning light” in this section, “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section, and “Wheelsand tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual.

LIC4378 LIC4379


TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).Do not rev the engine into the red zone O1 .

CAUTION

Operating the engine in the red zonemay cause serious engine damage.When engine speed approaches thered zone, shift to a higher gear or re-duce engine speed.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGEThe gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature. The engine coolant tempera-ture is within the normal range O1 whenthe gauge needle points within the zoneshown in the illustration.The engine coolant temperature varieswith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tem-perature near the hot (H) end of thenormal range, reduce vehicle speed todecrease temperature. If the gauge isover the normal range, stop the vehicleas soon as safely possible. If the engineis overheated, continued operation ofthe vehicle may seriously damage theengine. For additional information, re-fer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual for immediate action required.

LIC4407 LIC0739


FUEL GAUGEThe gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hills.The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler dooris located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

• If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible.After a few driving trips, the lightshould turn off. If the light remains onafter a few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthis section.

DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)Displays the estimated distance the ve-hicle can be driven before refueling. Thevalue is calculated based on recent fueleconomy, the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank, and the actual fuel consump-tion.Changes in driving patterns or conditionscan cause the DTE value to vary. As a result,the value displayed may differ from the ac-tual distance that can be driven.

DTE display will change to “---” when thefuel level in the tank is getting low, prior tothe fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

NOTE:• The DTE value after refill is estimated

based on recent fuel economy andamount of fuel added.

• If a small amount of fuel is added, orthe ignition is on during refueling, thedisplay may not be updated.

• Conditions that affect the fueleconomy will also affect the estimatedDTE value (city/highway driving, idletime, remote start time, terrain, sea-sonal weather, added vehicle weight,added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

LIC0740


TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)The display of the trip computer is situatedin the speedometer display. When the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position, thedisplay scrolls all the modes of the tripcomputer and then shows the mode cho-sen before the ignition switch was placedin the OFF position.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, modes of the trip computer canbe selected by pressing the change/resetbutton. The following modes can be se-lected:

Average fuel consumption (Mpgor l/100km)The average fuel consumption modeshows the average fuel consumption sincethe last reset. Resetting is done by pressingthe change/reset button for more than ap-proximately 1 second. The display is up-dated every 30 seconds. At about the first1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the displayshows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h)The average speed mode shows the aver-age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset-ting is done by pressing the change/resetbutton for more than approximately 1 sec-ond. The display is updated every 30 sec-onds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, thedisplay shows (----).

Journey timeThe journey time mode shows the timesince the last reset. The displayed time canbe reset by pressing the change/reset but-ton for more than approximately 1 second.

Trip computer resetPressing the change/reset button formore than 3 seconds will reset all modesexcept Trip A and distance to empty.

LIC4381


This unit has the following functions:• Measures terrestrial magnetism and in-

dicates the heading direction of the ve-hicle

• Indicates outside air temperatureWith the ignition switch in the ON position,press the or button as describedin the charts below to activate various fea-tures of the automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror.

Type A (if so equipped)

Press and holdthebutton forabout:

Feature:(Press button again for about 1second to change settings)

1 second Compass toggles on/off

8 seconds Automatic anti-glare/indicatorlight toggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changedto correct false compass read-ings

13 seconds Compass enters calibrationmode

Type B (if so equipped)

Press and holdthebutton forabout:

Feature:(Press button again for about 1second to change settings)

1 second Compass toggles on/off

8 secondsCompass zone can be changedto correct false compass read-ings

10 seconds Compass enters calibrationmode

For additional information, refer to “Auto-matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion of this manual.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAYPress the or button for about 1second when the push-button ignitionswitch is in the ON position to toggle theoutside temperature and compass direc-tion display O1 on or off.• To change from °F to °C, press and hold

the button for about 5 seconds orthe button for about 3 seconds untilthe display begins to flash. Press the but-ton again to toggle between °C and °F.

WIC0904Type A (if so equipped

COMPASS AND OUTSIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if soequipped)


• When the outside temperature is be-tween 140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), thedisplay will read 140°F (60°C). When thetemperature is above 194°F (90°C), thedisplay will read “SC.”

• When the outside temperature is be-tween than -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C),the display will read -40°F (-40°C). Whenthe temperature is below -60°F (-51°C),the display will read “OC.”

• The outside temperature sensor is lo-cated in front of the radiator. The sensormay be affected by road or engine heat,wind direction and other driving condi-tions. The display may differ from the ac-tual outside temperature or the tem-perature displayed on various signs orbillboards.

COMPASSPress the or button for about 1second when the ignition switch is placedin the ON position to toggle the outsidetemperature and compass direction dis-play O1 on or off. The display will indicatethe direction that the vehicle is heading.N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C,” calibrate the com-pass by driving the vehicle in three com-plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).You can also calibrate the compass by driv-ing your vehicle on your everyday route.The compass will be calibrated once it hastracked three complete circles.

LIC0583Type B (if so equipped


Zone variation change procedureThe difference between magnetic northand geographical north is known as vari-ance. In some areas, this difference cansometimes be great enough to cause falsecompass readings. Follow these instruc-tions to set the variance for your particularlocation if this happens:1. Press and hold the button for about

11 seconds or the button for about 8seconds. The current zone number willappear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zonemap. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button re-peatedly to toggle through the zonenumbers until the desired number ap-pears in the display. Once you have se-lected a zone number, the display willshow a compass direction within a fewseconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

WIC0355


Inaccurate compass directionThe compass display is equipped with au-tomatic correction function. If the correctdirection is not shown, follow this proce-dure.1. With the display turned on, press and

hold the button for about 13 sec-onds or the button for about 10seconds. The “C” icon in the compassdisplay will illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the ve-hicle in three complete circles at a maxi-mum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

CAUTION

• Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect theoperation of the compass.

• When cleaning the mirror, use a pa-per towel or similar material damp-ened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirroras it may cause the liquid cleaner toenter the mirror housing.


4WD warning light ( model) Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light

or Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (blue)

or Apply parking brake warninglight

NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light(if so equipped)

Hill descent control system ON indicatorlight (if so equipped)

Automatic transmission check warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warninglight ( model)

Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped) Security indicator light (if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light SET indicator light

Charge warning light 4WD shift indicator light ( model) Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Automatic transmission position indicatorlight

Transfer 4LO position indicator light( model)

Electric shift control system warning light CRUISE indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFindicator light

Low fuel warning light Engine start operation indicator light(if so equipped)

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTSAND AUDIBLE REMINDERS


CHECKING LIGHTSWith all doors closed, apply the parkingbrake, fasten the seat belts and place theignition switch in the ON position withoutstarting the engine. The following lights (ifso equipped) will come on:

or , , , ,The following lights (if so equipped) willcome on briefly and then go off:

, or , , , , ,

, , , , . ,If any light fails to come on or operate in away other than described, it may indicate aburned-out bulb and/or a system mal-function. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTSThis vehicle has various warning lights thatmay illuminate to indicate a potential prob-lem. For additional information, refer to thespecific light in this section.

4WD warning light( model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when theignition switch is placed in the ON position.It turns off soon after the engine is started.If the engine or vehicle is not functioningproperly, the warning light will either re-main illuminated or blink. For additional in-formation, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive(4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

CAUTION

• If the warning light comes on orblinks during operation, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

• Do not drive on dry hard surfaceroads in the 4H or 4LO position. If the4WD warning light turns on when youare driving on dry hard surface roads:– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position for automatictransmission models, stop the ve-hicle and shift the shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position with thebrake pedal depressed and shiftthe 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

• If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the ABS warning light illuminatesand then turns off. This indicates the ABS isoperational.If the ABS warning light illuminates whilethe engine is running or while driving, itmay indicate the ABS is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lockfunction is turned off. The brake systemthen operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information,refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

or Apply parkingbrake warninglight (if soequipped)

This warning light appears when a mal-function occurs in the electric shift controlsystem below 3 mph (5 km/h).Have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Automatic Transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about 2seconds. If the light comes on at any othertime, it may indicate the automatic trans-mission system is not functioning properly.Have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Automatic TransmissionPark warning light (model)

WARNING

• If the ATP light is ON, this indicatesthat the automatic transmission P(Park) position will not function andthe transfer case is in neutral.

• When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illumi-nates and the parking brake is set.Failure to engage the transfer posi-tion in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result inthe vehicle moving unexpectedly, re-sulting in serious personal injury orproperty damage.

• Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4Hor 4LO position again to turn off theATP warning light when the shift le-ver is in the P position and the ATPwarning light is ON. (Before shiftingthe 4WD switch into the 4LO position,move the shift lever into the N posi-tion once, shift the shift lever into Pagain and make sure the ATP warn-ing light is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatictransmission parking function is not en-gaged. If the transfer control is not securedin any drive position while the shift lever isin the P (Park) position, the transmission willdisengage and the drive wheels will notlock.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and the foot brake systems.Parking brake indicatorWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.Low brake fluid warning lightWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluidlevel. If the light comes on while the engineis running with the parking brake not ap-plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-lowing:1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.


2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

WARNING

• Your brake system may not be work-ing properly if the warning light is on.Driving could be dangerous. If youjudge it to be safe, drive carefully tothe nearest service station for re-pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicletowed because driving it could bedangerous.

• Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brakefluid level may increase your stop-ping distance and braking will re-quire greater pedal effort as well aspedal travel.

• If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked. It isrecommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the charging sys-tem is not functioning properly. Turn theengine off and check the generator belt. Ifthe belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if thelight remains on, have the system checked.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION

• Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Do-ing so will bypass the variable volt-age control system and the vehiclebattery may not charge completely.For additional information, refer to“Variable voltage control system” inthe “Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

• Do not continue driving if the genera-tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doorsare not closed securely while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Electric shift control systemwarning light

This light illuminates when a malfunctionoccurs in the electric shift control system.Have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Engine oil pressurewarning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during nor-mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,stop the engine immediately and call aNISSAN dealer or other authorized repairshop.The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level. Foradditional information, refer to “Engine oil”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.


CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Turn off the engine as soonas it is safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level inthe fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soonas it is convenient, preferably before thefuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will bea small reserve of fuel in the tank whenthe fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-tors the tire pressure of all tires except thespare.The low tire pressure warning light warnsof low tire pressure or indicates that theTPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1second and turns off.Low tire pressure warningIf the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illumi-nate. A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)warning message is also displayed in theodometer.When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjustthe tire pressure of all four tires to therecommended COLD tire pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information la-bel located in the driver's door opening.The low tire pressure warning light doesnot automatically turn off when the tirepressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-flated to the recommended pressure,the vehicle must be driven at speedsabove 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the low tire pressurewarning light. Use a tire pressure gaugeto check the tire pressure.The low tire pressure warning light remainsilluminated until the tires are inflated to therecommended COLD tire pressure. TheCHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-played each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the lowtire pressure warning light remains illumi-nated.For additional information, refer to “Checktire pressure warning message” in this sec-tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sectionand in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.TPMS malfunctionIf the TPMS is not functioning properly, thelow tire pressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Have thesystem checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does notappear if the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.For additional information, refer to “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section and “Tirepressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual.


WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Thosewho use a pacemaker should contactthe electric medical equipmentmanufacturer for the possible influ-ences before use.

• If the light does not illuminate withthe ignition switch placed in the ONposition, have the vehicle checked assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehiclespeed, pull off the road to a safe loca-tion and stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Driving with under-inflatedtires may permanently damage thetires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury or death. Check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust thetire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure show on the Tireand Loading Information label lo-cated in the driver’s door opening to

turn the low tire pressure warninglight off. If the light still illuminateswhile driving after adjusting the tirepressure, a tire may be flat or theTPMS may be malfunctioning. If youhave a flat tire, replace it with a sparetire as soon as possible. If no tire isflat and all tires are properly inflated,have the vehicle checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tirepressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these services.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could af-fect the proper operation of theTPMS.

CAUTION

• The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sureto check the tire pressure regularly.

• If the vehicle is being driven atspeeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),the TPMS may not operate correctly.

• Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the four wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washerfluid warning light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Addwindshield-washer fluid as necessary. Foradditional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.


NISSAN Intelligent Key®warning light (if soequipped)

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light comes on for about 2seconds and then turns off. This light illumi-nates or blinks as follows:• The light blinks in yellow when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outsidethe vehicle and the ignition switch in theON position. Make sure that the IntelligentKey is inside the vehicle.

• The light blinks in green when the Intelli-gent Key battery is running out of power.Replace the battery with a new one. Foradditional information, refer to “Battery”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

• The light illuminates in yellow when itwarns of a malfunction with the electricalsteering lock system or the Intelligent Keysystem.

If the warning light illuminates in yellowwhile the engine is stopped, it may be im-possible to free the steering lock or to startthe engine. If the light comes on while theengine is running, you can drive the vehicle.However, in these cases, have the vehiclechecked and repaired as soon as possible.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.For additional information, refer to “NISSANIntelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section of this manual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fastenyour seat belts. The light illuminates when-ever the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition and remains illuminated until thedriver's seat belt is fastened. At the sametime, the chime sounds for about 6 sec-onds unless the driver's seat belt is se-curely fastened.The seat belt warning light may also illumi-nate if the front passenger's seat belt is notfastened when the front passenger's seatis occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, the sys-tem does not activate the warning light forthe front passenger.For additional information, refer to “Seatbelts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual.

Shift P (Park) warning light(if so equipped)

This light blinks red and the key reminderchime sounds if the shift lever is in anyposition other than P (Park) and the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position. Return theshift lever to P (Park) with the ignitionswitch in the OFF position and the warninglight along with the chime will turn off. Foradditional information, refer to “NISSAN In-telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section of this manual.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates for about 7 seconds andthen turns off. This means the system isoperational.If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,and pretensioner seat belt systems needservicing:• The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

• The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.


• The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these services.Unless checked and repaired, the supple-mental restraint system (air bag system)and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-tion properly. For additional information, re-fer to “Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand/or pretensioner systems will notoperate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible. Itis recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTSThis vehicle has various indicator lightsthat may illuminate to indicate a systemstatus. For additional information, refer tothe specific light in this section.

4WD shift indicator light( model)

The light should turn off within 1 secondafter placing the ignition switch in the ONposition.While the engine is running, the 4WD shiftindicator light will illuminate the positionselected by the 4WD shift switch.The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other.

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

For additional information, refer to “Drivingthe vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

CRUISE indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise controlON/OFF switch is pushed. The light goesout when the ON/OFF switch is pushedagain. When the CRUISE indicator lightcomes on, the cruise control system is op-erational. For additional information, referto “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

Electronic locking reardifferential (E-Lock) systemON indicator light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when the electroniclocking rear differential (E-Lock) systemclutch is fully engaged.The indicator light flashes when the sys-tem is first turned on. When the system fullyengages, the light remains on. If the switchis on and the indicator light continues toflash, the system is not engaged.For additional information, refer to “Electroniclocking rear differential (E-Lock) systemswitch” in this section and “Electronic lockingrear differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

Engine start operationindicator light (if soequipped)

For vehicles equipped with push-button igni-tion this indicator illuminates when the igni-tion switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ON positionwith the shift lever in the P (Park) position.This indicator means that the engine willstart by pushing the push-button ignitionswitch with the brake pedal depressed.


Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status lightwill be lit and the passenger front air

bag will be off depending on how the frontpassenger seat is being used.For additional information, refer to “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” in the“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-light high beams are on and goes out whenthe low beams are selected.The high beam indicator light also comeson when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control systemON indicator light (if soequipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light comes on briefly andthen turns off.The light comes on when the hill descentcontrol system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on andthe indicator light blinks, the system is notengaged.If the indicator light does not come onwhen the hill descent switch is on, the sys-tem may not be functioning properly. Havethe system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.For additional information, refer to “Hill de-scent control switch” in this section and “Hilldescent control system” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady orblinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate a potential emission control mal-function.The MIL may also come on steady if thefuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if thevehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make surethe fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.After a few driving trips, the lightshould turn off if no other potential emis-sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 secondswhen the engine is not running, it indicatesthat the vehicle is not ready for an emissioncontrol system inspection/maintenancetest. For additional information, refer to“Readiness for inspection/maintenance(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.OperationThe MIL will come on in one of two ways:• MIL on steady — An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.Check the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUELCAP warning appears in the trip com-puter. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or miss-ing, tighten or install the cap and con-tinue to drive the vehicle. The lightshould turn off after a few driving trips. Ifthe light does not turn off after a fewdriving trips, have the vehicle inspected. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the dealer.

• MIL blinking — An engine misfire has beendetected which may damage the emis-sion control system. To reduce or avoidemission control system damage:– Do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h).


– Avoid hard acceleration or decelera-tion.

– Avoid steep uphill grades.– If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.The MIL may stop blinking and come onsteady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, reducedfuel economy, and possible damage tothe emission control system.

Security indicator light(if so equipped)

This light blinks when the ignition switch isin the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This func-tion indicates the security systemsequipped on the vehicle are operational.For additional information, refer to “Securitysystems” in this section.

SET indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speedis controlled by the cruise control system. Ifthe light blinks while the engine is running,it may indicate the cruise control system isnot functioning properly. Have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC sys-tem is operating, thus alerting the driver tothe fact that the road surface is slipperyand the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.You may feel or hear the system working;this is normal.The light will blink for a few seconds afterthe VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.The indicator light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in theON position. The light will turn off after ap-proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-erational. If the light does not come onhave the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Transfer 4LO positionindicator light( model)

This light comes on when the 4WD shiftswitch is set in the 4LO position with theignition switch in the ON position.The transfer case may be damaged if youshift the switch while driving.Make sure the transfer 4LO position indica-tor light turns on when you shift the 4WDshift switch to 4LO.The indicator light may blink while shift-ing from one drive mode to the other.The 4LO indicator light must stop blinkingand remain illuminated or turn off beforeshifting the transmission into gear. If theshift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral)position to any other gear when the 4LOindicator light is blinking, the vehicle maymove unexpectedly.When you shift between 4H and 4LO, followthe instructions below:• Stop the vehicle and move the shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position with the brakepedal depressed, then depress and turnthe 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H.


You cannot move the transfer 4WD shiftswitch between 4H and 4LO unless youstop the vehicle and move the shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position with the brakepedal depressed.

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turnsignal switch is activated.

NOTE:

In case of turn signal light bulb malfunc-tion, the turn signal will flash at a higherfrequency when the turn signal switch isactivated.Both lights flash when the hazard switch isturned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when theVDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF posi-tion, the transfer case is in the 4LO position( model), or when the VDC system isnot functioning properly. This indicates theVDC system is not operating.Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine and the system will operate

normally. For additional information, referto “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.The VDC light also comes on when thepush-button ignition switch is in the ONposition. The light will turn off after about 2seconds if the system is operational. If thelight stays on or comes on along with the

indicator light while you are driving,have the VDC system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.If the battery is removed or discharged, theVDC system is disabled and the VDC indi-cator light will not turn off after 2 secondswhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition. To reset the system, you mustperform the reset procedure. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.If the light does not go off after performingthe reset procedure, have the traction con-trol system checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.While the VDC system is operating, youmight feel slight vibration or hear the sys-tem working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

The VDC system will be disabled and theVDC light will illuminate when the elec-tronic locking rear differential (E-lock) sys-tem switch (if so equipped) is turned onand the E-lock system is engaged. If theE-lock system disengages or the switch isturned off, the VDC system will be enabledand the VDC light will turn off.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a disc brake pad requiresreplacement, it makes a high pitchedscraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked as soonas possible if the warning sound is heard.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFFposition, a chime sounds when the driver'sdoor is opened if the headlights or parkinglights are on.Turn the headlight control switch off beforeleaving the vehicle.


NISSAN Intelligent Key® doorbuzzerThe Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds ifany one of the following improper opera-tions is found.• The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors.• The Intelligent Key is taken outside the

vehicle when operating the vehicle.When the buzzer sounds, be sure to checkboth the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. Foradditional information, refer to “NISSAN In-telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section of this manual.

Your vehicle may have two types of securitysystems:• Vehicle security system (if so equipped)• NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so

equipped)

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if soequipped)The vehicle security system provides visualand audible alarm signals if someoneopens the doors when the system isarmed. It is not, however, a motiondetection-type system that activateswhen a vehicle is moved or when a vibra-tion occurs.The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent thetheft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your keys in the vehicle, andalways lock the vehicle when unattended.Be aware of your surroundings, and park insecure, well-lit areas whenever possible.Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offersuch equipment. Check with your insur-ance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protectionfeatures.

LIC3766

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)


How to arm the vehicle securitysystem1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from thevehicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the key, power doorlock switch (if the door is opened, lockedand then closed), or with the key fob.Key fob operation:

• Press the button on the key fob. Alldoors lock. The hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once to indicate alldoors are locked.

• When the button is pressed with alldoors locked, the hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once as a reminderthat the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. For addi-tional information, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section of thismanual.

4. Confirm that the indicator lightcomes on. The indicator lightstays on for about 30 seconds. The ve-hicle security system is now pre-armed.After about 30 seconds the vehicle se-curity system automatically shifts intothe armed phase. The indicatorlight begins to flash once every 3 sec-onds. If, during the 30-second pre-armtime period, the driver's door is unlockedby the key or the key fob or the ignitionswitch is placed in ACC or ON position,the system will not arm.

• If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver's door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position towardthe unlock position the system may bedisarmed when the key is removed. Ifthe indicator light fails to glow for aperiod of time, unlock the door onceand lock it again.

• Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition switch placed in theOFF position.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give thefollowing alarm:• The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.• The alarm automatically turns off after a

period of time. However, the alarm reacti-vates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by un-locking the driver's door with the key orby pressing the button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:• Opening a door without using the key or

key fob (even if the door is unlocked byusing the inside lock knob or the powerdoor lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-er's door with the key or by pressing the

button on the key fob.


NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (if so equipped)The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of a registered key.If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the de-vice (which may have caused the inter-ference) separate from the registeredkey.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.

FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions; (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's author-ity to operate the equipment.For Canada:This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

Security indicator light (if soequipped)This light blinks when the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK position.This function indicates the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System is operational.If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ismalfunctioning, the light will remain onwhile the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

LIC0474


If the light still remains on and/or theengine will not start, seek service for theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System assoon as possible. Please bring all regis-tered keys that you have. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

SWITCH OPERATIONThe windshield wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.Push the lever down to operate the wiperat the following speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-tion can be adjusted by turning theknob toward OA (Slower) or OB (Faster)

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speedoperation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speedoperation

Push the lever up O4 to have one sweepoperation (MIST) of the wiper.Pull the lever toward you O5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate severaltimes.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the windshieldand obscure your vision which maylead to an accident. Warm the wind-shield with the defroster before youwash the windshield.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if the res-ervoir tank is empty.

LIC3775

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


To defrost the rear window glass (if soequipped), place the ignition switch in theON position and push the rear window de-froster switch on. The rear window de-froster indicator light on the switch comeson. Push the switch again to turn the de-froster off.

To defrost the outside mirrors (if soequipped), place the ignition switch in theON position and push the outside mirrordefroster switch on. The outside mirror de-froster indicator light on the switch comeson. Push the switch again to turn the de-froster off.

The rear window/outside mirror defroster(if so equipped) automatically turns off af-ter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defroster.

LIC1419Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3279Type B (if so equipped)

REAR WINDOW OR OUTSIDE MIRRORDEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped)


HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCHLighting

�1 Rotate the switch to the position,and the front parking, tail, license plate,and instrument panel lights will comeon.

�2 Rotate the switch to the position,and the headlights will come on and allthe other lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

WIC1424Type A (if so equipped)

WIC1452Type B (if so equipped)

WIC1426Type C (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


Autolight system (if so equipped)The autolight system allows the headlightsto be set so they turn on and off automati-cally. The autolight system can:• Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lightsautomatically when it is dark.

• Turn off all the lights when it is light.• Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you place the ignition switch in theOFF position and all doors are closed.

To turn on the autolight system:1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position O1 .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ONposition.

3. The autolight system automaticallyturns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position and a door is opened and leftopen, the headlights remain on for a periodof time. If another door is opened while theheadlights are on, then the timer is reset.To turn the autolight system off, turn theswitch to the OFF, , or position.The headlights will turn on automatically attwilight or in rainy weather (when the wind-shield wiper is operated continuously).If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFFposition and one of the doors is openedand this condition is continued, the head-lights remain on for 5 minutes.

Be sure you do not put anything on topof the autolight sensor O1 located in thetop side of the instrument panel. The au-tolight sensor controls the autolight; if itis covered, the autolight sensor reacts asif it is dark out and the headlights willilluminate. If this occurs while parkedwith the engine off and the switch in theON position, your vehicle's battery couldbecome discharged.

LIC0561 LIC0835


Headlight beam select�1 To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are engaged andpush the lever forward. The high beamlights come on and the light illumi-nates. For additional information, referto “Headlight control switch” in thissection.

�2 Pull the lever back to return to the lowbeams.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashesthe headlight high beams on and off.The low beams need not be engagedfor this function.

Battery saver systemThe battery saver system automaticallyturns off the following lights after a periodof time when the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position and the doors are closed:• Headlights, when the headlight switch is

in the or position• Interior lights, when left in the ON position

(if so equipped)After the headlights automatically turn offwith the headlight switch in the or

position, the headlights will illuminateagain if the headlight switch is moved tothe OFF position and then turned to the

or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver featureautomatically turns off the headlightsafter a period of time, you should turnthe headlight switch to the OFF posi-tion when the engine is not running toavoid discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)SYSTEM (if so equipped)The DRL system automatically illuminateswhen the engine is started with the parkingbrake released. The DRL system operateswith the headlight switch in the OFF posi-tion or in the position. Turn the head-light switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the DRL system does notilluminate. The DRL system illuminateswhen the parking brake is released. TheDRL system will remain on until the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the DRL system is active, taillights on your vehicle are not on. It isnecessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and oth-ers.

LIC0562


INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control oper-ates when the headlight control switch is inthe AUTO (if so equipped), orposition.Turn the control OA to adjust the bright-ness of the instrument panel lights whendriving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCHTurn signal�1 Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signal cancelsautomatically.

Lane change signal�2 Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the leverdoes not latch, to signal a lane change.Hold the lever until the lane change iscomplete.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlightswitch to the position, then turn thefog light switch to the position.To turn the fog lights on with the headlightswitch in the AUTO position (if so equipped),the headlights must be on, then turn thefog light switch to the position.To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog lightswitch to the OFF position.

LIC4382 LIC0563 LIC0393


The headlights must be on and the lowbeams selected for the fog lights to oper-ate. The fog lights automatically turn offwhen the high beam headlights are se-lected.

To sound the horn, push the area betweenthe horn icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the supplementalfront air bag system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switchdown to the ON position.

CAUTION

Be sure to turn the light switch to theOFF position when you leave the ve-hicle for extended periods of time, oth-erwise the battery will go dead.

WIC1449 LIC0616

HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCH


The front seats are warmed by built-inheaters.1. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,as desired, depending on the tempera-ture. The indicator light in the switch willilluminate.The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on andoff. The indicator light will remain on aslong as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn theswitch off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to usethe seat heater if you or the occupantscannot monitor elevated seat tem-peratures or have an inability to feelpain in body parts that contact theseat. Use of the seat heater by suchpeople could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not use the seat heater for ex-tended periods or when no one is us-ing the seat.

• Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates heat, such as a blan-ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-wise, the seat may becomeoverheated.

• Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result indamage to the heater.

• Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.

• When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or anysimilar materials.

• If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• The battery could run down if theseat heater is operated while the en-gine is not running.LIC3762

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if soequipped)


The vehicle should be driven with the VDCsystem on for most driving conditions.If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.To turn off the VDC system, push the VDCOFF switch. The indicator will comeon.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn on the system. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehiclespeed when driving on steep down-hill grades. Always drive carefullywhen using the hill descent controlsystem and decelerate the vehiclespeed by depressing the brake pedalif necessary. Be especially carefulwhen driving on frozen, muddy or ex-tremely steep downhill roads. Failureto control vehicle speed may result ina loss of control of the vehicle andpossible serious injury or death.

LIC3344 LIC0743

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (ifso equipped)


• The hill descent control may not con-trol the vehicle speed on a hill underall load or road conditions. Always beprepared to depress the brake pedalto control vehicle speed. Failure to doso may result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system op-erates continuously for a long time, thetemperature of the brake pads may in-crease and the hill descent control sys-tem may be temporarily disabled (the in-dicator light will blink). If the indicatorlight does not come on continuously af-ter blinking, stop using the system.

The hill descent control system is designedto reduce driver workload when going downsteep hills. The hill descent control systemhelps to control vehicle speed so the drivercan concentrate on steering the vehicle.To activate the hill descent control system:• The shift lever must be in forward or re-

verse gear,• The 4WD switch must be in the 4L posi-

tion and the vehicle speed must be under15 mph (25 km/h) or

• The 4WD switch must be in the 4H posi-tion and the vehicle speed must be under21 mph (35 km/h), and

• The hill descent control system switchmust be ON.

The hill descent control system ON indica-tor light will come on when the system isactivated. Also, the stop/tail lights illumi-nate while the hill descent control systemapplies the brakes to control vehicle speed.If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressedwhile the hill descent control system is on,the system will stop operating temporarily.As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal isreleased, the hill descent control system be-gins to function again if the hill descent con-trol operating conditions are fulfilled.The hill descent control system ON indica-tor light blinks if the switch is on and allconditions for system activation are notmet or if the system becomes disengagedfor any reason.To turn off the hill descent control system,push the switch to the OFF position.For additional information, refer to “Hill de-scent control system ON indicator light” inthis section and “Hill descent control sys-tem” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

The E-Lock system can help provide addedtraction if the vehicle is stuck or becomingstuck.To activate the E-Lock system:• The 4WD switch must be in the 4LO posi-

tion (4-Wheel Drive vehicles),• The vehicle must be stopped or moving

at 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and• The E-Lock system switch must be

turned on.

LIC0729

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEMSWITCH (if so equipped)


When the E-Lock switch is turned on, theindicator light will flash until the systemengages. However, if all operation condi-tions listed above are not met or the sys-tem becomes disengaged, the indicatorlight will continue to flash.The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is dis-abled and the ABS light illuminates whenthe E-Lock system is on. Also, the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system is disabledand the VDC light illuminates when theE-Lock system is on.For additional information, refer to “Elec-tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-tem” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual for further explanation andsystem limitations.

WARNING

• Never leave the E-Lock system onwhen driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehiclemay result in the rear wheels slippingand result in an accident and per-sonal injury. After using the E-Locksystem to free the vehicle, turn thesystem off.

• Use the E-Lock system only whenfreeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LOposition before using the E-Lock sys-tem. Never use the E-Lock system ona slippery road surface such as snowor ice surface. Using the E-Lock sys-tem when driving in these road con-ditions may cause unexpectedmovement of the vehicle during en-gine braking, accelerating or turning,which may result in an accident andserious personal injury.

CAUTION

• After using the E-Lock system, turnthe switch off to prevent possibledamage to driveline componentsfrom extended use.

• Do not drive over 12 mph (20 km/h)when the system is engaged. Doingso could result in possible damage tothe driveline.

• Do not turn on the E-Lock systemwhile the tires are spinning. Doing socould damage drivetrain components.

WARNING

The Rear Sonar System is a conve-nience but it is not a substitute forproper backing. Always turn and checkthat it is safe to do so before backingup. Always back up slowly.

The RSS (if so equipped) is active when theignition switch is placed in the ON positionand the shift lever is in R (Reverse).When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone isemitted.

LIC0471

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFFSWITCH (if so equipped)


The RSS can be disabled by pushing theOFF switch. When the system is disabled,the indicator light on the switch will illumi-nate.The system will automatically reset thenext time the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position.For additional information, refer to “RearSonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section in this manual.

The power outlets are for powering electri-cal accessories such as cellular tele-phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)maximum.The power outlets are powered only whenthe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON po-sition.Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

• The outlet and plug may be hot dur-ing or immediately after use.

• Only certain power outlets are de-signed for use with a cigarette lighterunit. Do not use any other power out-let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for additional information.

LIC4418Front row

LIC0761Center console

POWER OUTLETS


• Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

• Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

• Use power outlets with the enginerunning to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

• Avoid using power outlets when theair conditioner, headlights or rearwindow defroster is on.

• Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned off.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tem-perature fuse may open.

• When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquids to contact the outlet.

FRONT-DOOR POCKETSREAR-DOOR POCKETS

WIC0824 LIC0826Type A (if so equipped)

STORAGE


SEATBACK POCKET (if soequipped)A seatback pocket may be located on theback of the driver's seat. The pocket maybe used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, please observe the followingitems:• Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatbackpocket or head restraint/headrest.

• Do not place heavy loads heavierthan 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,head restraint/headrest or in theseatback pocket.


LIC1328


UNDER-SEAT STORAGE BINS (if soequipped)

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo with ropesor straps to help prevent it from slid-ing or shifting. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

• The cargo restrained in the under-seat storage bins must not exceedthe weight limits listed below or thebins may not stay secured. In a sud-den stop or collision, the unsecuredbins could cause personal injury.King Cab® model: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)Crew Cab model

Driver’s side: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)Passenger’s side: 25 lbs. (11.33 kg)

• If the under-seat storage bins are re-moved for any reason, they should besecurely stored to prevent them fromcausing injury to passengers or dam-age to the vehicle in case of suddenbraking or an accident.

• Do not place sharp objects in theunder-seat storage bins. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury when the ve-hicle is moving or if the vehicle isinvolved in a collision.

LIC4496Rear row under-seat storage bin

(King Cab® model)

LIC4497Rear row under-seat storage bin

(Crew Cab model)


To access the under-seat storage bins:For King Cab® models, lift up the jump seat.For additional information, refer to “Jumpseat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual.For Crew Cab models, lift up the rear benchseat. For additional information, refer to“Folding the rear bench seat down” in the“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

To remove the under-seat storage bins:1. Turn the knobs to the UNLOCK position

O2 .

2. Remove the tray by lifting it out of thestorage bin (King Cab® model).

To install the under-seat storage bins:1. Position the under-seat storage bin so

the holes line up with the holes in thefloorboard.

2. Insert the knobs and turn them to theLOCK position O1 .

LIC0822


STORAGE TRAYS WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the traysto help prevent injury in an accident orsudden stop.

GLOVE BOXTo open the top portion of the glove box,push the latch OA up and raise the lid.To open the lower portion of the glove box,pull the handle OB down and lower the lid.

WARNING

Keep the glove box lid closed whiledriving to help prevent injury in an ac-cident or a sudden stop.

LIC1539Top center tray

LIC4419Instrument panel

LIC0768


CONSOLE BOXPull up on the lever O1 to open the consolebox lid O2 .

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSESSTORAGETo open the sunglasses holder, push andrelease.Only store one pair of sunglasses in theholder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to avoid obstructing thedriver’s view and to help prevent an ac-cident.

CAUTION

• Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

• Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.LIC0766 LIC3387


CUP HOLDERSThe front cup holders have adapters thatcan be removed to accommodate largercups.

WARNING

• The cup holder should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

• Avoid abrupt starting and brakingwhen the cup holder is being used toprevent spilling the drink. If the liquidis hot, it can scald you or yourpassenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

To open the rear row cup holders (rear ofthe front console), lower the lid. To close,raise the lid. If stepped on, the cup holder isdesigned to snap loose from the console.To re-install, close the cup holder assemblyand push it back into the console opening.To fold the rear seat back, first close the cupholder.

LIC4420Front

WIC0771Rear seat (rear of front console)


CAUTION

• Do not use the bottle holder for anyother objects that could be thrownabout in the vehicle and possibly in-jure people during sudden braking oran accident.

• Do not use the bottle holder for openliquid containers.

LIC0784Front bottle holders

WIC0828Rear bottle holders


ROOF RACK (if so equipped) WARNING

• Drive extra carefully when the vehicleis loaded at or near the cargo carry-ing capacity, especially if the signifi-cant portion of that load is carried onthe roof rack.

• Heavy loading of the roof rack hasthe potential to affect the vehiclestability and handling during suddenor abnormal handling maneuvers.

• Roof rack load should be evenlydistributed.

• Do not exceed maximum roof rackload weight capacity.


CAUTION

Use care when placing or removingitems from the roof rack. If you cannotcomfortably lift the items onto the roofrack from the ground, use a ladder orstool.

Always evenly distribute the cargo on thetubular roof rack. The maximum totalload is 125 lbs. (56 kg) evenly distributed.Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWRare located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located

WIC0857


on the driver's side door jamb pillar). Foradditional information, refer to “Vehicleloading information” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.The front crossbar can be adjusted or re-moved. Use the TORX® driver provided inthe tool kit to loosen both crossbar adjust-ing screws.To adjust:1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

TORX® driver O1 by turning counter-clockwise OA .

2. When the clamp is loosened, move thecrossbar so the cargo can be positionedon the crossbar OB .

3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screwswith the TORX® driver by turningclockwise.

4. Secure the cargo with rope.

5. Always check the tightness of the cross-bar adjusting screws.

To remove:1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

TORX® driver O1 by turning counter-clockwise OA .

2. Rotate the clamps OC .

3. Remove the crossbar.

4. Reverse to install.

5. Always check the tightness of the cross-bar adjusting screws.

If you hear wind noise coming from the roofrack while driving, adjust the roof rackcrossbar to the neutral position.

MANUAL WINDOWS (if soequipped)The side windows can be opened or closedby turning the hand crank on each door.

LIC3352

WINDOWS


POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)WARNING

• Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc., inside the vehiclewhile it is in motion and before clos-ing the windows. Use the windowlock switch to prevent unexpecteduse of the power windows.

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do notleave children, people who requirethe assistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition switch is placed in the ON position orfor a period of time after the ignition switchis placed in the ACC or OFF position. If thedriver's or passenger's door is opened dur-ing this period of time, the power to thewindows is canceled.

Driver's side power window switchThe driver's side control panel is equippedwith switches to open or close the frontand rear passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch andhold it down. To close a window, pull theswitch and hold it up. To stop the openingor closing function at any time, simply re-lease the switch.

LIC1329

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side window switch

4. Right rear passenger window switch(Crew Cab models only)

5. Left rear passenger window switch(Crew Cab models only)

6. Driver's side automatic switch


Front passenger's power windowswitchThe passenger's window switch operatesonly the corresponding passenger's win-dow. To open the window, push the switchand hold it down O1 . To close the window,pull the switch up O2 .

Rear power window switch (CrewCab models only)The rear power window switches open orclose only the corresponding passengerwindow. To open the window, push theswitch and hold it down O1 . To close thewindow, push the switch up O2 .

Locking passengers' windowsWhen the window lock switch is depressed,only the driver's side window can beopened or closed. Push it again to cancelthe window lock function.

Automatic operation (if soequipped)To fully open a window equipped with au-tomatic operation, push the windowswitch down to the second detent and re-lease it; it need not be held. The windowautomatically opens all the way. To stopthe window, lift the switch up while the win-dow is opening.

WIC0260 LIC2663 LIC0410


REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if soequipped)

WARNING

• You must ensure all occupants andobjects are free of the rear windowarea prior to and during operation.Failure to do so may result in injuryand/or damage to the rear windowsystem.

• The rear window is not designed tocarry long items through it.

• Do not place objects through theopened rear window. Do not use therear window as a cargo area pass-through. This may result in damageto the rear window system or per-sonal injury.

Squeeze the handles of the lever O1 , thenslide the window open O2 .

POWER MOONROOF

LIC3488 WIC0882Type A (if so equipped)

MOONROOF (if so equipped)


The moonroof will only operate when theignition switch is in the ON position. Thepower moonroof is operational for about45 seconds, even if the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or OFF position. If thedriver's door or the front passenger's dooris opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the moonroof is can-celed.

Sliding the moonroofTo fully open the moonroof, push theswitch toward DOWN/OPEN O1 .To fully close the moonroof, push theswitch toward UP/CLOSE O2 .To open or close the moonroof part way,push the switch in any direction while themoonroof is sliding to stop it in the desiredposition.

Tilting the moonroofClose the moonroof by pushing the switchtoward UP/CLOSE O2 . Release the switch,then push the UP/CLOSE switch again totilt the moonroof up.To tilt the moonroof down, push the switchtoward DOWN/OPEN O1 .

Auto-reverse function (whenclosing or tilting down themoonroof)The auto-reverse function can be acti-vated when the moonroof is closed ortilted down by automatic operation whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition or for a period of time after the igni-tion switch is placed in the OFF position.Depending on the environment or driv-ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-tion may be activated if an impact orload similar to something being caughtin the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-diately before the closed positionwhich cannot be detected. Make surethat all passengers have their hands,etc., inside the vehicle before closingthe moonroof.

When closingIf the control unit detects somethingcaught in the moonroof as it moves to thefront, the moonroof will immediately openbackward.



When tilting downIf the control unit detects somethingcaught in the moonroof as it tilts down, themoonroof will immediately tilt up.If the auto-reverse function malfunctionsand repeats opening or tilting up themoonroof, keep pushing the tilt downswitch within 5 seconds after it happens;the moonroof will fully close gradually.Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-roof.

WARNING

• In an accident you could be thrownfrom the vehicle through an openmoonroof. Always use seat belts andchild restraints.

• Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body outof the moonroof opening while thevehicle is in motion or while themoonroof is closing.

CAUTION

• Remove water drops, snow, ice orsand from the moonroof beforeopening.

• Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your moonroof checked and re-paired. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding itforward or backward. The interior lights have a three-position

switch and operate regardless of ignitionswitch position.When the switch is in the ON position O1 ,the interior lights illuminate, regardless ofdoor position. The lights will go off after aperiod of time unless the ignition switch isin the ON position.When the switch is in the O (DOOR) positionO2 , the interior lights will stay on for a pe-riod of time when:

LIC0789Type A (if so equipped)

INTERIOR LIGHTS


• The doors are unlocked by the key fob, akey or the power door lock switch whileall doors are closed and the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position.

• The driver’s door is opened and thenclosed while the key is removed from thevehicle.

The lights will turn off while the timer isactivated when:• The driver’s door is locked by the key fob,

a key, or the power door lock switch.• The ignition switch is turned on.

The lights will turn off automatically after aperiod of time while doors are open to pre-vent the battery from becoming dis-charged.When the switch is in the OFF position O3 ,the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-less of door position.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHTSTo turn the map lights on, press the lenses.To turn them off, press the lenses of thelights again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.


LIC0630Type C (if so equipped)

LIC4383


The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:• Will operate most radio frequency de-

vices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks andsecurity systems.

• Is powered by your vehicle's battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the ve-hicle's battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLink® will retain all pro-gramming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-ceiver is programmed, retain the originaltransmitter for future programming pro-cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. For additional infor-mation, refer to “ProgrammingHomeLink®” in this section.

WARNING

• Your vehicle's engine should beturned off while programming theHomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Donot breathe exhaust gases; they con-tain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-gerous. It can cause unconscious-ness or death.

• Do not use the HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standardsbecame effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). Agarage door opener which cannotdetect an object in the path of a clos-ing garage door and then automati-cally stop and reverse, does not meetcurrent federal safety standards. Us-ing a garage door opener withoutthese features increases the risk ofserious injury or death.

• During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that peopleor objects are clear of the garagedoor, gate, etc. that you areprogramming.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion (without starting the engine) whenprogramming HomeLink®. It is also rec-ommended that a new battery be placedin the hand-held transmitter of the de-vice being programmed to HomeLink®for quicker programming and accuratetransmission of the radio frequency.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)


1. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away fromthe HomeLink® surface, keeping theHomeLink® indicator light O1 in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously pressand hold the desired HomeLink® buttonand hand-held transmitter button. DONOT release until the HomeLink® indica-tor light O1 flashes slowly and then rap-idly. When the indicator light flashes rap-idly, both buttons may be released. (Therapid flashing indicates successfulprogramming.)

NOTE:Some devices may require you to replaceStep 2 with the cycling procedure notedin “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-dian customers and gate openers” in thissection.

3. Press and hold the programmedHomeLink® button and observe the indi-cator light.• If the indicator light O1 is solid/

continuous, programming is com-plete and your device should activatewhen the HomeLink® button ispressed and released.

• If the indicator light O1 blinks rapidlyfor 2 seconds and then turns to asolid/continuous light, continuewith Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-vice. A second person may make thefollowing steps easier. Use a ladder orother device. Do not stand on your ve-hicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garagedoor opener motor in the garage, locatethe “learn” or “smart” button (the nameand color of the button may vary bymanufacturer but it is usually locatednear where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the unit). If there is difficultylocating the button, reference the ga-rage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”button.

LIC2365 LIC2366


NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have ap-proximately 30 seconds to initiate thenext step.6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the trained HomeLink® buttonfor 2 seconds and release. Repeat the“press/hold/release” sequence up tothree times to complete the trainingprocess. HomeLink® should now acti-vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web siteat: www.homelink.com or call1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATEOPENERSCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission –which may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal duringtraining. Similar to this Canadian law, someU.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-culties training a gate operator or garagedoor opener by using the “Training” proce-dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage dooropener, etc., unplug the device duringthe “cycling” process to prevent possibledamage to the garage door openercomponents.1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in thissection.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously pressand hold the desired HomeLink® buttonand the hand-held transmitter button.During training, your hand-held trans-mitter may automatically stop transmit-ting. Continue to press and hold the de-sired HomeLink® button while you pressand re-press (“cycle”) your hand-heldtransmitter every 2 seconds until thefrequency signal has been learned. TheHomeLink® indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly after severalseconds upon successful training. DONOT release until the HomeLink® indica-tor light flashes slowly and then rapidly.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly,both buttons may be released. The rapidflashing indicates successful training.Proceed with “ProgrammingHomeLink®” step 3 to complete.If the device was unplugged during theprogramming procedure, remember toplug it back in when programming iscompleted.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, afterit is programmed, can be used to activatethe programmed device. To operate, sim-ply press and release the appropriate pro-grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-ceiver button. The amber indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being trans-mitted.For convenience, the hand-held transmit-ter of the device may also be used at anytime.


PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLink® does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:• Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.• Position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from theHomeLink® surface.

• Press and hold both the HomeLink® andhand-held transmitter buttons withoutinterruption.

• Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitterin that position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLink® is not programmed withinthat time, try holding the transmitter inanother position – keeping the indicatorlight in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONThe following procedure clears the pro-grammed information from both buttons.Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-ever, individual buttons can be repro-grammed. For additional information, referto “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®button” in this section.To clear all programming:1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins toflash in approximately 10 seconds. Donot hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.HomeLink® is now in the programmingmode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with “ProgrammingHomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINK® BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver button, complete the following:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash af-ter 20 seconds. Without releasing theHomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-ton has now been reprogrammed. Thenew device can be activated by pressingthe HomeLink® button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affectany other programmed HomeLink® but-tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should changethe codes of any non-rolling code devicethat has been programmed intoHomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual ofeach device or call the manufacturer ordealer of those devices for additional infor-mation.When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-versal Transceiver with your new trans-mitter information.


FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.For Canada:This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6Rear doors (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Child safety rear door lock(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . 3-18Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Bed extender (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Tie down hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®Your vehicle can only be driven with theIntelligent Keys which are registered toyour vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-ponents and NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem components.Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can beregistered and used with one vehicle. Thenew keys must be registered prior to theuse with the Intelligent Key system andNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of yourvehicle. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service. Since theregistration process requires erasing allmemory in the Intelligent Key componentswhen registering new keys, be sure to takeall Intelligent Keys that you have to theNISSAN dealer.A key number plate is supplied with yourkeys. Record the key number and keep it ina safe place (such as your wallet), not in thevehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forduplicates by using the key number.NISSAN does not record key numbers so itis very important to keep track of your keynumber plate.A key number is only necessary when youhave lost all keys and do not have one toduplicate from. If you still have a key, it canbe duplicated without knowing the keynumber.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the Intelli-gent Key:• Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-nents, to come into contact with wa-ter or salt water. This could affect thesystem function.

• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.• Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.• Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.• Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,immediately wipe until it is com-pletely dry.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area wheretemperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

• Do not attach the Intelligent Key witha key holder that contains a magnet.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipmentand personal computers.

LPD3123

1. Intelligent Key

2. Mechanical key

3. Master key

4. Key number plate

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of thatIntelligent Key from the vehicle. This mayprevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-mation regarding the erasing procedure, itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer.

Mechanical keyThe Intelligent Key contains the mechani-cal key.To remove the mechanical key, release thelock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.To install the mechanical key, firmly insert itinto the Intelligent Key until the lock knobreturns to the lock position.Use the mechanical key to lock or unlockthe driver's door, tailgate and glove box.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors”and “Truck box” in this section and “Storage”in the “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

Valet hand-offWhen you have to leave a key with a valet,give them the Intelligent Key itself and keepthe mechanical and master keys with youto protect your belongings.To prevent the glove box and tailgate frombeing opened during valet hand-off, followthe procedures below:1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box and tailgate with themechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key without the me-chanical key to the valet, keep the me-chanical and master keys with you.

For additional information, refer to ”Truckbox” in this section and Storage” in the “In-struments and controls” section of thismanual.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYSYou can only drive your vehicle using theIntelligent Keys which are registered to theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-ponents in your vehicle.The mechanical key can be used for all thelocks.Never leave the keys in the vehicle.Additional or replacement keys:If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existingkey can be duplicated without knowing thekey number. As many as four NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys can be used withone vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System keys that you haveto the NISSAN dealer for registration. This isbecause the registration process will erasethe memory of all key codes previously reg-istered into the NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem. After the registration process, thesecomponents will only recognize keys codedinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemduring registration. Any key that is not givento the dealer at the time of registration willno longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer systemkey, which contains an electrical tran-sponder, to come into contact with wa-ter or salt water. This could affect sys-tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors cannot beopened using the inside or outside doorhandles. The doors must be unlocked toopen the doors.

WARNING

• Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from uninten-tionally opening the doors, and willhelp keep out intruders.

• Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do not leavechildren, people who require the assis-tance of others or pets unattended inyour vehicle. Additionally, the tem-perature inside a closed vehicle on awarm day can quickly become highenough to cause a significant risk ofinjury or death to people and pets.

DOORS


LOCKING WITH KEYThe power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors at the same timeusing the master or mechanical key.Turning the key toward the front O1 of thevehicle locks all the doors and activates thesecurity system.

Turning the key 1 time toward the rear O2 ofthe vehicle unlocks that door. From thatposition, returning the key to neutral O3

(where the key can only be removed andinserted) and turning it toward the rear O4

again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors.For additional information, refer to “Securitysystems” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOBTo lock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the lock position O1 ,then close the door.To unlock the door without the key, movethe inside lock knob to the unlock positionO2 .

LPD0240Driver's side

LPD0298Inside lock


LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver's or front passen-ger's side) to the lock position O1 . Whenlocking the door this way, be certain not toleave the key inside the vehicle.To unlock all the doors without a key, pushthe door lock switch (driver's or front pas-senger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

Lockout protectionWhen a door opens, the power door lockswitch is moved to the lock position andthe Intelligent key is left in the vehicle, alldoors will lock and then unlock automati-cally. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)1. Open the driver's or passenger's door.

WPD0381 LPD0278


2. From the outside, pull the door handleOA toward you.

3. Open the door to the desired position.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS• All doors lock automatically when the ve-

hicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).• All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park) po-sition or when the ignition is switched tothe OFF position.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(if so equipped)Child safety locks help prevent the reardoors from being opened accidentally, es-pecially when small children are in the ve-hicle.The child safety lock levers are located onthe edge of the rear doors.When the lever is in the LOCK position,the door can be opened only from theoutside.

LPD0312 WPD0313 LPD3124


WARNING


• The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and com-munication systems. Do not operatethe Intelligent Key while on an air-plane. Make sure the buttons are notoperated unintentionally when theunit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the doorlocks using the remote control function. Theoperating environment and/or conditionsmay affect the Intelligent Key operation.Be sure to read the following before usingthe Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Keywith you when operating the vehicle.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicat-ing with the vehicle as it receives radiowaves. The Intelligent Key transmits weakradio waves. Environmental conditionsmay interfere with the operation of the In-telligent Key under the following operatingconditions:• When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, suchas a TV tower, power station and broad-casting station.

• When in possession of wireless equip-ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans-ceiver, or a CB radio.

• When the Intelligent Key is in contact withor covered by metallic materials.

• When any type of radio wave remote con-trol is used nearby.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personalcomputer.

• When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-tions before using the Intelligent Key func-tion or use the mechanical key.Although the life of the battery varies de-pending on the operating conditions, the

battery’s life is approximately two years. Ifthe battery is discharged, replace it with anew one.When the Intelligent Key battery is low, theNISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light willblink after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position.Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-ceiving radio waves, if the key is left nearequipment which transmits strong radiowaves, such as signals from a TV and per-sonal computer, the battery life may be-come shorter.When the battery is discharged, firmly applythe foot brake and touch the ignition switchwith the Intelligent Key. Then push the igni-tion switch while depressing the brake pedalwithin 10 seconds after the chime sound. Foradditional information, refer to “Push-buttonignition switch” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.For additional information, refer to “Batteryreplacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.As many as four Intelligent Keys can beregistered and used with one vehicle. Forinformation about the purchase and use ofadditional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®


HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can op-erate all door locks using the remote key-less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-mote keyless function can operate at adistance of 99 ft (30 m) away from the ve-hicle. The operating distance dependsupon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function may notfunction under the following conditions:• When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.• When the doors are open or not closed

securely.• When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel-ligent Key, be sure not to leave the keyin the vehicle.

Locking doors1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelli-gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WARNING

After locking the doors using the Intel-ligent Key, be sure that the doors havebeen securely locked by operating thedoor handles. Failure to follow these in-structions may result in inadvertentlyunlocking the doors, which may de-crease the safety and security of yourvehicle.

Unlocking doors1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key to unlock the driver’s door.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5seconds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically un-less one of the following operations is per-formed within 1 minute after pressing the

button:• Opening any doors.• Pushing the ignition switch.The interior lights will illuminate for a periodof time when a door is unlocked and theinterior lights switch is in the O (DOOR) po-sition.

LPD3600

1. (lock) button

2. (unlock) button

3. (panic) button


The lights can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the following opera-tions:• Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.• Switching the interior lights switch to the

OFF position.For additional information, refer to “Interiorlights” in the “Instruments and controls”section in this manual.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the panic alarm tocall attention by pressing and holding the

button on the Intelligent Key for lon-ger than 0.5 seconds.The panic alarm and headlights will stay onfor a period of time.The panic alarm stops when:• It has run for a period of time.• Any button is pressed on the Intelligent

Key.• The request switch (if so equipped) on the

driver or passenger door is pushed andthe Intelligent Key is in range of the doorhandle.

Answer back horn featureIf desired, the answer back horn featurecan be deactivated using the IntelligentKey. When it is deactivated and thebutton is pressed, the hazard indicatorlights flash twice. When the button ispressed, neither the hazard indicator lightsnor the horn operates.To deactivate:Press and hold the and but-tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazardindicator lights will flash three times to con-firm that the answer back horn feature hasbeen deactivated.To activate:Press and hold the and but-tons for at least 2 seconds once more.The hazard indicator lights will flash onceand the horn will sound once to confirmthat the horn beep feature has been reac-tivated.Deactivating the horn beep feature doesnot silence the horn if the alarm is trig-gered.


Intelligent Key button operationlightThe light blinks only when you press anybutton on the Intelligent Key. The light illu-mination only signifies that the key fob hastransmitted a signal. You may look and/orlisten to verify that the vehicle has per-formed the intended operation. The num-ber of blinks identifies each registered key(i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) foryour own identification purposes.

If the light does not blink, your battery maybe too weak to communicate to the ve-hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need tobe replaced. For additional information re-garding the replacement of a battery, referto “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly by erroneous operation ofthe Intelligent Key or to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen, a chime or chirpsounds from inside and outside the vehicleand a warning is displayed in the instru-ment panel.When a chime or beep sounds or a warningis displayed, be sure to check the vehicleand the Intelligent Key.For additional information, refer to“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and“Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

LPD2836


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, thevehicle system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch tostop the engine

The Shift P (Park) warning light appearson the display and the inside warningchime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) po-sition.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-sition.

When opening the driver's door to getout of the vehicle

The door open warning light appearson the display and the inside warningchime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the AUTO ACCposition.

Place the ignition switch in the ON po-sition or close the driver’s door.

When closing the door after gettingout of the vehicle

The NISSAN Intelligent Key® warninglight appears on the display, the out-side chime sounds three times and theinside warning chime sounds for ap-proximately three seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not detected in-side of the vehicle.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The Shift P (Park) warning light appearson the display and the inside and out-side chimes sound continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFFposition and the shift lever is not in theP (Park) position.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When closing the door with the insidelock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi-mately three seconds and all the doorsunlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch tostart the engine

The NISSAN Intelligent Key® warninglight appears on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.For additional information, refer to“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

The NISSAN Intelligent Key® warninglight appears on the display .

The Intelligent Key is not detected in-side of the vehicle.

Carry the registered Intelligent Keywith you.


1. Pull the hood lock release handle O1 lo-cated below the driver's side instrumentpanel. The hood will spring up slightly.

2. Push the lever O2 at the front of thehood to the side as illustrated with yourfingertips and raise the hood.

3. Insert the support rod into the slot onthe underside of the hood O3 .

When closing the hood, return the hood rodto its original position. Lower the hood ap-proximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latchand release it. This allows proper engage-ment of the hood latch.

WARNING

• Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause the hoodto fly open and result in an accident.

• If you see steam or smoke comingfrom the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

FUEL-FILLER CAPWARNING

• Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seri-ously injured if it is misused or mis-handled. Always stop the engine anddo not smoke or allow open flames orsparks near the vehicle whenrefueling.

LPD0302 LPD2698

HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR


• Do not attempt to top off the fueltank after the fuel pump nozzleshuts off automatically. Continuedrefueling may cause fuel overflow,resulting in fuel spray and possibly afire.

• Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed forproper operation of the fuel systemand emission control system. An in-correct cap can result in a seriousmalfunction and possible injury. Itcould also cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

• Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyto attempt to start your vehicle.

• Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portablefuel containers:– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.– Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you arefilling it.

– Use only approved portable fuelcontainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

• Do not use a fuel containing morethan 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Foradditional information, refer to “Fuelrecommendation” in the “Technicaland consumer information” sectionof this manual.

• The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-pear if the fuel-filler cap is not prop-erly tightened. It may take a few driv-ing trips for the message to bedisplayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSEFUEL CAP warning appears maycause the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) to illuminate.

• Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu-minate. If the light illuminatesbecause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, haveyour vehicle inspected. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and controls” sec-tion in this manual.

• If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoidpaint damage.


To remove the fuel-filler cap:1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise

to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holderO1 while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until asingle click is heard.

LOOSE FUEL CAP warningmessageThe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning messagedisplays in the odometer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after thevehicle has been refueled. It may take a fewdriving trips for the message to be dis-played. To turn off the warning message,perform the following:1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

described above as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the loose fuel cap change/resetbutton OA in the meter for about onesecond to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAPwarning message after tightening thefuel-filler cap.

For additional information, refer to “Metersand gauges” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

LPD2699 LIC4378


TILT OPERATIONPull the lock lever toward the driver andhold it to adjust the steering wheel up ordown to the desired position.Release the lock lever to lock the steeringwheel in place.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving. You could lose controlof your vehicle and cause anaccident.

• Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary forproper steering operation and com-fort. The driver’s air bag inflates withgreat force. If you are unrestrained,leaning forward, sitting sideways orout of position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive seriousor fatal injuries from the air bag if youare up against it when it inflates. Al-ways sit back against the seatbackand as far away as practical from thesteering wheel. Always use the seatbelts.LPD0304

WPD0344

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS


1. To block glare from the front, swingdown O1 the main sun visor.

2. To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mountand swing the visor to the side O2 .

3. To extend O3 the sun visor, slide in or outas needed (if so equipped).

CAUTION

• Do not store the sun visor before re-turning the extension to its originalposition.

• Do not pull the extension sun visorforcedly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sunvisor down and flip open the mirror cover.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEWMIRROR (if so equipped)Use the night position O1 to reduce glarefrom the headlights of vehicles behind youat night.Use the day position O2 when driving indaylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when nec-essary, because it reduces rear viewclarity.

LPD2595 WPD0126

MIRRORS


AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRRORThe inside mirror is designed so that it au-tomatically dims during nighttime condi-tions and according to the intensity of theheadlights of the vehicle following you. Theautomatic anti-glare feature is activatedwhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.The indicator light O2 will illuminate whenthe automatic anti-glare feature is operat-ing.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-sors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivityof the sensors, resulting in improperoperation.

Type A (if so equipped)With the ignition switch in the ON position,press the button as described:• To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

and hold the button for 8 seconds.The indicator light will turn off.

• To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressand hold the button again for 8seconds. The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information about the com-pass O3 and compass features, refer to“Compass and outside temperature dis-play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

Type B (if so equipped)With the ignition switch in the ON position,press the button as described:• To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

and hold the button for 8 seconds.The indicator light will turn off.

• To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressand hold the button again for 8seconds. The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information about the com-pass O3 and compass features, refer to“Compass and outside temperature dis-play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

LPD2505 LPD2419


For additional information on HomeLink®Universal Transceiver operation, refer tothe “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” inthe “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

• Objects viewed in the outside mirroron the passenger side are closer thanthey appear. Be careful when movingto the right. Using only this mirrorcould cause an accident. Use the in-side mirror or glance over yourshoulder to properly judge distancesto other objects.

• Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-ing. You could lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

Manual control type (if soequipped)The outside mirrors can be moved in anydirection for a better rear view.

Electric control type (if soequipped)The outside mirror remote control will op-erate only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or ON position.Move the small switch O1 to select the rightor left mirror. Move the large switch O2 toadjust each mirror to the desired position.Move the small switch O1 to the center(neutral) position to prevent accidentallymoving the mirror.

LPD2825 LPD0237


Foldable outside mirrorsPull the outside mirror toward the door tofold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated todefog, defrost or de-ice for improved visibil-ity. For additional information, refer to “Rearwindow and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

TAILGATEOpening the tailgatePull the tailgate handle upward and lowerthe tailgate. The support cables hold thetailgate open.When closing the tailgate, make sure thelatches are securely locked.Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgatedown, unless equipped with NISSAN'sBed Extender (accessory) or equivalentin the extended position.

For additional information on proper truckbox loading, refer to “Vehicle loading infor-mation” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

WARNING

• Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area or on the rear seat when itis in the folded position. Use of theseareas by passengers without properrestraints could result in serious in-jury or death in an accident or sud-den stop.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

• Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.

LPD0259 LPD0270

TRUCK BOX


Disconnecting the rear cameraBefore removing the tailgate disconnectthe rear camera by performing the follow-ing:1. Open the tailgate to access the rear

camera connector bracket O1 locatedon the rear sill.

2. Remove the connector bracket O2 fromthe sill by pressing the locking tab in-ward, in the direction shown, while pull-ing the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harnessO3 by pressing inward on the lockingtab, in the direction shown, while pullingthe connectors apart. Hold the connec-tor firmly to prevent the connector in thechassis harness from falling into the sill.

4. Use the supplied chassis plug andbracket and connect them to the chas-sis wiring harness to avoid contamina-tion to the terminals which will lead tomalfunction of the rear camera.

5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove boxand connect it to the tailgate wiring har-ness to avoid contamination which willlead to malfunction of the rear camera.

7. Remove the tailgate. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Removing the tailgate”in this section.

LPD2097


Removing the tailgate1. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION

• The tailgate is heavy. Two peopleshould remove or install it. Be carefulnot to drop it during removal.

• After releasing the support cables,do not let the tailgate rest on thebumper.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle.

3. Pull the tailgate out from the right sidehinge.

4. Slide the tailgate out of the left sidehinge.

Installing the tailgate1. Insert the tailgate into the left side hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angleand insert into the right side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 15 de-gree angle and attach the tailgate sup-port cables.

4. Close the tailgate securely.

LPD2208


Connecting the rear cameraBefore closing the tailgate reconnect therear camera by performing the following:1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the

truck, keep the tailgate open and checkthat the tailgate harness is not hangingbelow the tailgate.

2. Remove the connector bracket O2 fromthe sill by pressing the locking tab in-ward, in the direction shown, while pull-ing the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis plug andbracket from the chassis wiring harnessO3 . Keep the connector and bracket in asafe place such as the glove box.

4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from thetailgate wiring harness. Keep the tail-gate plug in a safe place such as theglove box.

5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness tothe chassis wiring harness.

6. Securely fix the rear camera connectorbracket O1 to the rear sill.

7. Close the tailgate securely.

Locking the tailgateTo lock the tailgate, turn the key toward thepassenger side of the vehicle O1 . To unlock,turn the key toward the driver side O2 .

LPD2097 LPD0272


BED EXTENDER (if so equipped)

CAUTION

• Do not overload the bed extender.Maximum load on the open tailgateis 200 lbs. (890N).

• Evenly distribute and properly secureall cargo.

• Do not use the bed extender or tail-gate to secure cargo.

Positioning the bed extenderTo use the bed extender in the inward po-sition perform the following:1. Rotate the bed extender O1 toward the

cab of the truck.2. If necessary, remove tethers from the

tailgate latch.3. Tighten the knobs to secure the ex-

tender into the desired position.4. Close the tailgate.5. Place cargo inside the bed extender in

the truck bed.6. Properly secure the cargo.

To use the bed extender in the outwardposition perform the following:1. Open the tailgate.

2. Rotate the bed extender O2 away fromthe cab of the truck until the extendersits on the tailgate.

3. Lock the buckles O3 into the tailgatelatch on both sides.

The bed extender can be adjusted in theoutward position by moving the extenderalong the rail.

LPD0480 LPD0479


NOTE:

Use care when rotating extender, buck-les may come in contact with the truckbed railing.

Removing and installing the bedextenderTo remove or install the bed extender per-form the following:1. Open the tailgate.

2. Rotate the bed extender into a verticalposition and lift straight up (to remove)or lower straight down (to install).

To store the bed extender in the front of thetruck when not in use perform the follow-ing:1. Position the sliding brackets past the

center of the wheel well.

2. Re-install the extender into the brackets(see above).

3. Rotate the extender to the inwardposition.

4. Push the brackets forward until the ex-tender comes in contact with the frontwall of the truck box.

TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped)For your convenience, tie down hooks areplaced at each corner of the truck box.These may be used to help secure cargoloaded into the truck box.• The weight of the cargo load must be

evenly distributed over both the front andthe rear axles.

• All cargo should be securely fastenedwith ropes or straps to prevent it fromshifting or sliding within the vehicle.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

LTI0102


MEMO


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems

Control panel buttons — models withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9How to use the VOL (volume) knob /PUSH (power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Control panel buttons — models withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13How to use the button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL(volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-17How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Difference between predicted andactual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-20System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Heater and air conditioner (manual)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-37Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

FM/AM radio (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44FM/AM/SAT radio with Compact Disc(CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49USB (Universal Serial Bus) connectionport (models without NavigationSystem) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55USB (Universal Serial Bus) connectionport (models with Navigation System)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58iPod®* player operation withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-60iPod®* player operation with NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63Bluetooth® streaming audio withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-66Bluetooth® streaming audio withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-69CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . 4-71Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped) . . 4-72Registering with NissanConnect®Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72Connect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72Application download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Siri® Eyes Free (models without NavigationSystem) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

Siri® Eyes Free (models with NavigationSystem) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Siri® Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwithout Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . 4-79

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85Phone display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88

During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . .4-94

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

NISSAN Voice Recognition System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemvoice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . 4-109Audio system voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109Information voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109My Apps voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

iPod®/iPhone® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111

WARNING

• Positioning of the heating or air con-ditioning controls and display con-trols should not be done while driv-ing in order that full attention may begiven to the driving operation.

• Do not disassemble or modify thissystem. If you do, it may result in ac-cidents, fire, or electrical shock.

• Do not use this system if you noticeany abnormality, such as a frozenscreen or lack of sound. Continueduse of the system may result in acci-dent, fire or electric shock.

• In case you notice any foreign objectin the system hardware, spill liquidon it, or notice smoke or smell com-ing from it, stop using the system im-mediately. Ignoring such conditionsmay lead to accidents, fire or electri-cal shock. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer forservicing.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. MENU button

2. button*

3. Display screen

4. (brightness control) button

5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power)button

* For additional information regarding theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemcontrol button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without NavigationSystem” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.If you use the system with the engine notrunning for a long time, it will dischargethe battery, and the engine will not start.Reference symbols:“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer toa key shown only on the display. These keyscan be selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION

• The glass display screen may break ifit is hit with a hard or sharp object. Ifthe glass screen breaks, do not touchit. Doing so could result in an injury.

• To clean the display, never use arough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinneror any kind of solvent or paper towelwith a chemical cleaning agent. Theywill scratch or deteriorate the panel.

• Do not splash any liquid such as wa-ter or car fragrance on the display.Contact with liquid will cause the sys-tem to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functionscannot be operated while driving.

LHA4680

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

The on-screen functions that are not avail-able while driving will be “grayed out” ormuted.

WARNING

• ALWAYS give your full attention todriving.

• Avoid using vehicle features thatcould distract you. If distracted, youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.

Touch-screen operationMenu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ” key toreturn to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “−” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page oneitem at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.123 Touch to manually enter numbers.OK Completes the character input.

LHA5318


Touch-screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry,soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-gent with a soft cloth. Never spray thescreen with water or detergent. Dampenthe cloth first and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO USE THE MENUBUTTON

To select and/or adjust several functions,features and modes that are available foryour vehicle:1. Press the MENU button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA5319 LHA5318


Menu item ResultSettings Touch to change the following steps.

Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional infor-mation, refer to “USB connections screen” and “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this section.

Phone For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System” in thissection.

Sound For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.Volume & Beeps For additional information, refer to “Volume & beeps” in this section.Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings.

On-screen Clock Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12 hours or 24 hours formats.Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjusts the daylight saving time to ON or OFF.Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes.

System Voice For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will

appear.Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer to “Adjusting the

screen” in this section.Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.Return All Settings To Default Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.


(brightness control) BUTTONTo change the display brightness, press the

button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to the day or the nightdisplay.Press and hold the button for morethan 2 seconds to turn the display off. Pressand hold the button again to turn the dis-play on.

HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)KNOB / PUSH (power)BUTTONPress the PUSH (power) button to turnaudio function on and off. Turn the VOL(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.

SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCHBARVarious system functions can be accessedby touching the items on the Launch BarO1 which is displayed on most of the mainmenu screens (the Launch Bar does notappear on some screens such as settingsscreens, camera screens, etc.)

Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to dis-play the corresponding menu screens.The following menu items are available onthe Launch Bar:• AM• FM• USB/iPod• Bluetooth• AUX• Settings

LHA4707


1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

3. button**

4. button

5. (brightness control) button

6. BACK button

7. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE knob

8. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) controlknob

9. CAMERA button

10. NAV button** For additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner's Manualregarding the Navigation system controlbuttons.** For additional information, refer to the“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwith Navigation System” in this section.When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will discharge the battery, andthe engine will not start.Reference symbols:“Example” — Words marked in quotes referto a key shown only on the display. Thesekeys can be selected by touching thescreen.

LHA3138

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —MODELS WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)


HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION

• The glass display screen may break ifit is hit with a hard or sharp object. Ifthe glass screen breaks, do not touchit. Doing so could result in an injury.

• To clean the display, never use arough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinneror any kind of solvent or paper towelwith a chemical cleaning agent. Theywill scratch or deteriorate the panel.

• Do not splash any liquid such as wa-ter or car fragrance on the display.Contact with liquid will cause the sys-tem to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functionscannot be operated while driving.The on-screen functions that are not avail-able while driving will be grayed out ormuted.Park the vehicle in a safe location and thenoperate the navigation system.

WARNING

• ALWAYS give your full attention todriving.

• Avoid using vehicle features thatcould distract you. If distracted, youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident. Touch-screen operation

LHA3748


Menu Item ResultSelecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to

return to the previous screen.Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “−” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page.

Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page.Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.Space Inserts a space.Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the charac-

ters.OK Completes the character input.

Touch-screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry,soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-gent with a soft cloth. Never spray thescreen with water or detergent. Dampenthe cloth first and then wipe the screen.


HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTONPress the BACK button to return to the pre-vious screen.

HOW TO USE THE BUTTON For additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner's Manualregarding the “SiriusXM® Travel Link” and“SiriusXM® Traffic” features.For additional information, refer to“NissanConnect® Mobile Apps” in this section.For additional information, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition System” in this section.To select and/or adjust several functions,features and modes that are available foryour vehicle:1. Press the [ ] button.2. Touch the “Settings” key.3. Touch the desired item.

LHA2773 LHA3748


Menu item ResultAudio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will ap-

pear.Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are

suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock/Date Touch this key to adjust the time and date.Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.Date Format Select from two possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows

you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. Select a time zone using the “Time Zone” key.Set Clock Manually Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down.

“Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.Daylight Savings Time Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.Color Adjust touch-screen color.


Menu item ResultTemperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on

the screen is touched.System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up mes-

sage appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.Return to Factory Settings/ClearMemory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.Minimize Voice Feedback Touch this key to turn ON or OFF the control voice feedback.System Software Version Touch this key to display software version information.

Traffic Touch this key display the traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Own-er’s Manual.

SXM Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information, refer to the “Audio System” in thissection.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, press the

button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to auto or night displaymode.If no operation is performed within 5 sec-onds, the display will return to the previousdisplay.Press and hold the button for morethan 2 seconds to turn the display off. Pressthe button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE ON-OFFBUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROLKNOBPress the ON-OFF button to turn audiofunction on and off. Turn the volume con-trol knob to adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERABUTTONFor additional information, refer to “Rear-View Monitor” in this section.


1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)

WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the Rear-View Monitor system could result inserious injury or death.

• RearView Monitor is a conveniencefeature and is not a substitute forproper backing. Always turn and lookout the windows and check mirrorsto be sure that it is safe to move be-fore operating the vehicle. Alwaysback up slowly.

• The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in showing large station-ary objects directly behind the ve-hicle, to help avoid damaging thevehicle.

LHA5768

REARVIEW MONITOR


• The distance guide line and the ve-hicle width line should be used as areference only when the vehicle is ona level paved surface. The distanceviewed on the monitor is for refer-ence only and may be different thanthe actual distance between the ve-hicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens whencleaning dirt or snow from the front ofthe camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-cally shows a rear view of the vehicle whenthe shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)position. Press the CAMERA button (if soequipped) while in the R (Reverse) positionto cycle through guideline options. The ra-dio can still be heard while the RearViewMonitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-tor system uses a camera located next tothe tailgate handle O1 .

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMOPERATIONWith the ignition switch in the ON position,move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESGuiding lines which indicate the vehiclewidth and distances to objects with refer-ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis-played on the monitor.Distance guide linesIndicate distances from the vehicle body.• Red line O1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)• Yellow line O2 : approx. 1 m (3 ft)• Green line O3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft)Vehicle width guide lines O4

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

LHA3671 LHA4754


DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTEDAND ACTUAL DISTANCESThe displayed guidelines and their loca-tions on the ground are for approximatereference only. Objects on uphill or downhillsurfaces or projecting objects will be actu-ally located at distances different fromthose displayed in the monitor relative tothe guidelines (refer to illustrations). Whenin doubt, turn around and view the objectsas you are backing up, or park and exit thevehicle to view the positioning of objectsbehind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphillWhen backing up the vehicle up a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown closer than the actualdistance. Note that any object on the hill isfurther than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhillWhen backing up the vehicle down a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown farther than the actualdistance. Note that any object on the hill iscloser than it appears on the monitor.

LHA5181 LHA5182


Backing up near a projectingobjectThe vehicle may seem to nearly clear theobject in the display. However, the vehiclemay hit the object if it projects over theactual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projectingobjectThe position OC is shown farther than theposition OB in the display. However, the po-sition OC is actually at the same distance asthe position OA . The vehicle may hit theobject when backing up to the position OA

if the object projects over the actual back-ing up course.

LHA4757 LHA5183


ADJUSTING THE SCREENThe procedure for adjusting the displaysettings of the screen differs depending onthe type of screen present on the vehicle.For vehicles without Navigation System1. While on the main menu screen, touch

the “Settings” key.

2. Touch the “Camera” key.

3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Tint”“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “-”key on the touch-screen display.

• Do not adjust the display settings of theRearView Monitor while the vehicle ismoving.

For vehicles with Navigation System1. Firmly apply the brake and place the

shift lever in R (Reverse)

2. Press the button on the controlpanel.

3. The screen will display the Nightsettings.

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the settingup or down.

5. Press the button again to accessthe Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the settingup or down.

• Do not adjust the display settings of theRearView Monitor while the vehicle ismoving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMLIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor RearView Monitor. Failure to oper-ate the vehicle in accordance withthese system limitations could result inserious injury or death.• The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not showevery object.

• Underneath the bumper and the cor-ner areas of the bumper cannot beviewed on the RearView Monitor be-cause of its monitoring range limita-tion. The system will not show smallobjects below the bumper, and maynot show objects close to the bum-per or on the ground.

LHA3522Models without Navigation System

LHA5033Models with Navigation System


• Objects viewed in the RearViewMonitor differ from actual distancebecause a wide-angle lens is used.

• Objects in the RearView Monitor willappear visually opposite comparedto when viewed in the rearview andoutside mirrors.

• Use the displayed lines as a refer-ence. The lines are highly affected bythe number of occupants, fuel level,vehicle position, road conditions androad grade.

• Make sure that the tailgate is se-curely closed when backing up.

• Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled on the tailgate.

• When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causingwater condensation on the lens, amalfunction, fire or an electric shock.

• Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it maymalfunction or cause damage result-ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations anddo not represent a system malfunction:• When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not clearly displayobjects.

• When strong light directly shines on thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly.

• Vertical lines may be seen in objects onthe screen. This is due to strong reflectedlight from the bumper.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight.

• The colors of objects on the RearViewMonitor may differ somewhat from theactual color of objects.

• Objects on the monitor may not be clearin a dark environment.

• There may be a delay when switchingbetween views.

• If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on thecamera, RearView Monitor may not dis-play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipeoff any wax with a clean cloth dampenedwith a diluted mild cleaning agent, thenwipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-ner to clean the camera. This willcause discoloration.

• Do not damage the camera as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam-era O1 , the RearView Monitor may not dis-play objects clearly. Clean the camera bywiping it with a cloth dampened with a di-luted mild cleaning agent and then wiping itwith a dry cloth.

LHA3671


Adjust air flow direction for the vents di-rected at the driver's and passenger's sidewindows O1 , driver and passenger O2 , orcenter O3 by moving the vent slide and/orvent assemblies. Open or close the driverand passenger vents by using the dial.Move the dial toward the to open thevents or toward the to close them.

WARNING

• The air conditioner cooling functionoperates only when the engine isrunning.

• Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

• Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

NOTE:• Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditionerunit. Odor can enter the passengercompartment through the vents.

• When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

LHA4512

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (if so equipped)


CONTROLS1. Fan speed control dial

2. Front window defroster button

3. Rear window defroster switch (if soequipped)

4. Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial

6. Max A/C button

7. Air flow control buttons

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

WHA1406Type A (if so equipped)


CONTROLS1. Fan speed control dial


3. Outside mirror defroster switch (ifso equipped)


5. Temperature control dial

6. Max A/C button



Fan speed control dialThe fan speed control dial turns thefan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttonsThe air flow control dial or buttons allowyou to select the air flow outlets.

MAX A/C — Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling(air conditioning).

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot out-lets.

— Air flows from defroster out-lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from de-froster outlets.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you toadjust the temperature of the outlet air. Tolower the temperature, turn the dial to theleft. To increase the temperature, turn thedial to the right.

LHA3167Type B (if so equipped)


Air recirculation buttonON position (Indicator light on)Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.Press the button to the ON positionwhen:• driving on a dusty road.• to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.• for maximum cooling when using the air

conditioner.OFF position (Indicator light off)Outside air is drawn into the passengercompartment and distributed through theselected outlet.Use the OFF position for normal heater orair conditioner operation.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position andpress the button to turn on the airconditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,press the button again.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window or outside mirrordefroster switch (if so equipped)For additional information about the rearwindow or outside mirror defroster switch,refer to “Rear window or outside mirror de-froster switch.” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

HeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air tothe foot outlets. Some air also flows fromthe defrost outlets.1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan speed control dial tothe desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to thedesired position between the middleand the hot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the sideand center vents.1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion. The indicator light on the but-ton will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.


4. Turn the temperature control dial to thedesired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrostoutlets to defrost/defog the windows.1. Press the defrost/defog button.



• To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan speed control dialto the highest setting and the tempera-ture control to the full HOT position.


• When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passen-ger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance. The recircula-tion mode cannot be activated in the

position.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air tothe side and center vents and to the frontand rear floor outlets.1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion. The indicator light on the but-ton will go off.




Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogsthe windshield.1. Press the air flow control button.



• When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on ifthe outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). If the air flow controlbutton is selected for more than 1 minute,the air conditioning system will continueto operate until the fan speed con-trol dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle isshut off, or the A/C button is used to turnoff the compressor even if the air flowcontrol dial is turned to a position otherthan the position. This dehumidi-fies the air which helps defog the wind-shield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to fur-ther improve the defogging perfor-mance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield.This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position, andpress the button to activate the airconditioner. When the air conditioner is on,cooling and dehumidifying functions areadded to the heater operation.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidifythe air.1. Press the button to the OFF

position.



4. Press the button.



• For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, press the button tothe ON position. Be sure to return the

to the OFF position for normal cool-ing. The indicator light on the buttonwill go off. You may also select MAX A/Cfor quick cooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidifythe air.1. Press the air flow control button.


3. Press the button on.


Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windowsand dehumidify the air.1. Press the air flow control button.


• When the or are selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on ifthe outside temperature is more than 36°F (2° C). This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passen-ger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance.

• The air conditioner is always on in themode, regardless of whether the in-

dicator light is on or off.3. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

Operating tips• Keep the windows and moonroof (if so

equipped) closed while the air condi-tioner is in operation.

• After parking in the sun, drive for two orthree minutes with the windows open tovent hot air from the passenger com-partment. Then, close the windows. Thisallows the air conditioner to cool the inte-rior more quickly.

• The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

• A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe ventilators in hot, humid conditionsas the air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.

• If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. For additionalinformation, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button anddial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICKheating, cooling or defrosting. The air re-circulation ( ) button should alwaysbe in the OFF position for heating anddefrosting.


WHA0916 LHA4443


LHA4444 LHA4453


LHA4446


1. Driver temperature control dial



4. Fan speed control dial

5. OFF button

6. Fresh air intake button


8. Passenger temperature control dial

9. DUAL button


11. AUTO button

LHA2886Type A (if so equipped)

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)






5. OFF button

6. Rear window defroster switch



9. DUAL button


11. AUTO button

LHA2611Type B (if so equipped)






5. OFF button

6. Outside mirror defroster switch



9. DUAL button


11. AUTO button

WARNING

• The air conditioner cooling functionoperates only when the engine isrunning.


• Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controlsto activate the air conditioner.

LHA3168Type C (if so equipped)


NOTE:• Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditionerunit. Odor can enter the passengercompartment through the vents.

• When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically worksto keep a constant temperature. Air flowdistribution and fan speed are also con-trolled automatically.1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.Driver and passenger temperatures canbe set independently. Press DUAL to ac-tivate dual climate control functions.Turn the passenger's side temperaturecontrol dial to the left or right to set thedesired passenger's temperature.

• Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

• The temperature of the passenger com-partment will be maintained automati-cally. Air flow distribution, fan speed andA/C on/off are also controlled automati-cally.

• A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe vents in hot, humid conditions as theair is cooled rapidly. This does not indicatea malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF)The air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to setthe desired temperature.

• The temperature of the passenger com-partment will be maintained automati-cally. Air flow distribution and fan speedare also controlled automatically.

• Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwise,the system may not work properly.

• Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting ordefogging1. Push the defroster control switch

to turn the system on. The indicator lightin the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.

• To quickly remove ice from the outside ofthe windows, turn the manual fan controlto the maximum position.

• As soon as possible after the windshieldis clean, press the AUTO button to returnto the auto mode.

• When the control is activated, the airconditioner will automatically be turnedon at outside temperatures above 36°F(2°C). If in defrost mode for more than 1minute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fan controlis turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off or theA/C button is used to turn off the com-pressor even if an air flow button otherthan is selected. This dehumidifiesthe air which helps defog the windshield.The air recirculation mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to fur-ther improve the defogging perfor-mance.


MANUAL OPERATIONFan speed controlTurn the fan speed control dial tomanually control the fan speed.Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculationPress the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehicle.Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic mode.The air recirculation cannot be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in the frontdefogging mode.

Fresh air intake (if so equipped)Press the fresh air intake button todraw outside air into the passenger com-partment. The indicator light on thebutton will come on.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position andpress the button to turn on the airconditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow controlPress the air flow control buttons to manu-ally control air flow and select the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system offPress the OFF button.

Rear window or outside mirrordefroster switch (if so equipped)For additional information, refer to “Rearwindow or outside mirror defroster switch”in the “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

OPERATING TIPSThe sunload sensor O1 , located on the topcenter of the instrument panel, helps thesystem maintain a constant temperature.Do not put anything on or around this sen-sor.• When the engine coolant temperature

and outside air temperature are low, theair flow from the foot outlets may notoperate for a maximum of 150 seconds.However, this is not a malfunction. Afterthe coolant temperature warms up, airflow from the foot outlets will operatenormally.

LIC0515


The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-signed with the environment in mind.This refrigerant does not harm theearth's ozone layer.Special charging equipment and lubricantis required when servicing your NISSAN airconditioner. Using improper refrigerants orlubricants will cause severe damage toyour air conditioner system. For additionalinformation, refer to “Air conditioner sys-tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer to service your “environmentallyfriendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equip-ment.

RADIOWith the ignition placed in the ACC or ONposition, press the PUSH (power) orON•OFF button to turn the radio on. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not run-ning, the ignition should be placed in theACC position.Radio reception is affected by station sig-nal strength, distance from radio transmit-ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and otherexternal influences. Intermittent changesin reception quality normally are caused bythese external influences.Using a cellular phone in or near the vehiclemay influence radio reception quality.

Radio receptionYour NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-hance radio reception. These circuits aredesigned to extend reception range, and toenhance the quality of that reception.However, there are some general charac-teristics of both FM and AM radio signalsthat can affect radio reception quality in amoving vehicle, even when the finestequipment is used. These characteristicsare completely normal in a given receptionarea and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantlychange because of vehicle movement.Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-ference from other vehicles can workagainst ideal reception. Described beloware some of the factors that can affect yourradio reception.Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers.Storing the device in a different locationmay reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 –30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (singlechannel) FM having slightly more rangethan stereo FM. External influences maysometimes interfere with FM station re-ception even if the FM station is within 25mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many ofthe same characteristics as light. For ex-ample, they will reflect off objects.Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves awayfrom a station transmitter, the signals willtend to fade and/or drift.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM


Static and flutter: During signal interfer-ence from buildings, large hills or due toantenna position (usually in conjunctionwith increased distance from the stationtransmitter), static or flutter can be heard.This can be reduced by adjusting the treblecontrol to reduce treble response.Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-tive characteristics of FM signals, direct andreflected signals reach the receiver at thesame time. The signals may cancel eachother, resulting in momentary flutter or lossof sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency,can bend around objects and skip alongthe ground. In addition, the signals can bebounced off the ionosphere and bent backto earth. Because of these characteristics,AM signals are also subject to interferenceas they travel from transmitter to receiver.Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areaswith many tall buildings. It can also occur forseveral seconds during ionospheric turbu-lence even in areas where no obstacles exist.Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even trafficlights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the firsttime or the battery has been replaced, thesatellite radio may not work properly. Thisis not a malfunction. Wait more than 10minutes with satellite radio ON and the ve-hicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the neces-sary data.No satellite radio reception is available and“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT bandoption is selected unless optional satellitereceiver and antenna are installed and aSiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscrip-tion is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.Satellite radio performance may be af-fected if cargo carried on the roof blocksthe satellite radio signal.If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-lite antenna.A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-mance. Remove the ice to restore satelliteradio reception.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONSCompact Disc (CD) player (if soequipped)

LHA0099


CAUTION

• Do not force a compact disc into theCD insert slot. This could damage theCD and/or CD player.

• Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/orCD player.

• Only one CD can be loaded into theCD player at a time.

• Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc orpackaging.

• During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

• The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

• The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low. Decrease/increase the temperature before use.

• Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.• CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

• The following CDs may not work prop-erly:– Copy Control Compact Discs (CCCD)– Recordable Compact Discs (CD-R)– Rewritable Compact Discs (CD-RW)

• Do not use the following CDs as they maycause the CD player to malfunction:– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter– CDs that are not round– CDs with a paper label– CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges• This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to re-cord or burn CDs.

• If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.CHECK DISC:–– Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up, etc.).–– Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.PRESS EJECT:This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperatureof the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (ifso equipped)Terms• MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital au-dio file format. This format allows for near“CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of thesize of normal audio files. MP3 conversionof an audio track from CD-ROM can re-duce the file size by approximately a 10:1ratio with virtually no perceptible loss inquality. MP3 compression removes theredundant and irrelevant parts of asound signal that the human ear doesn’thear.

• WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Mi-crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compressionthan the MP3 codec, enabling storage ofmore digital audio tracks in the sameamount of space when compared toMP3s at the same level of quality.


• Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital musicfile. The size and quality of a compresseddigital audio file is determined by the bitrate used when encoding the file.

• Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-quency is the rate at which the samplesof a signal are converted from analog todigital (A/D conversion) per second.

• Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writ-ing data once to the media is called asingle session, and writing more thanonce is called a multisession.

• ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digitalmusic file such as song title, artist, encod-ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title line on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-istered trademarks and trademarks in theUnited States of America and other coun-tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 orWMA files is as illustrated.• The names of folders not containing MP3

or WMA files are not shown in the display.

• If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

• The playback order is the order in whichthe files were written by the writing soft-ware. Therefore, the files might not play inthe desired order.

WHA1078Playback order chart


Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RWSupported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Samplingfrequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Samplingfrequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBRTag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.


Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of char-acters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively longtime before the musicstarts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the musicstarts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might notmatch the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bitrate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately tothe next song when play-ing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright pro-tection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-sired order.


USB (Universal Serial Bus)connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operatethe USB device while driving. Doing socan be a distraction. If distracted youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not force the USB device into theUSB port. Inserting the USB devicetilted or up-side-down into the portmay damage the port. Make surethat the USB device is connected cor-rectly into the USB port.

• Do not grab the USB port cover (if soequipped) when pulling the USB de-vice out of the port. This could dam-age the port and the cover.

• Do not leave the USB cable in a placewhere it can be pulled unintention-ally. Pulling the cable may damagethe port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-vice. USB devices should be purchasedseparately as necessary.This system cannot be used to format USBmemory devices. To format a USB device,use a personal computer.In some jurisdictions, the USB device for thefront seats plays only sound without im-ages for regulatory reasons, even when thevehicle is parked.This system supports various USBmemory devices, USB hard drives andiPod® players. Some USB devices may notbe supported by this system.• Partitioned USB devices may not play

correctly.• Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may notappear properly in the display. Using Eng-lish language characters with a USB de-vice is recommended.

General notes for USB use• For additional information, refer to your

device manufacturer's owner informa-tion regarding the proper use and care ofthe device.

Notes for iPod® useiPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.• Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a check mark to be displayed onand off (flickering). Always make sure thatthe iPod® is connected properly.

• An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-main in fast forward or rewind mode if it isconnected during a seek operation. Inthis case, please manually reset theiPod®.

• An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is dis-connected during a seek operation.

• An incorrect song title may appear whenthe Play Mode is changed while using aniPod® nano (2nd Generation).

• Audiobooks may not play in the sameorder as they appear on an iPod®.

• Large video files cause slow responses inan iPod®. The vehicle center display maymomentarily black out, but will soon re-cover.

• If an iPod® automatically selects largevideo files while in the shuffle mode, thevehicle center display may momentarilyblack out, but will soon recover.


Bluetooth® streaming audio• Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not

be recognized by the in-vehicle audiosystem.

• It is necessary to set up the wireless con-nection between a compatibleBluetooth® audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module before usingthe Bluetooth® audio.

• Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®audio will vary depending on the devices.Make sure how to operate your audio de-vice before using it with this system.

• The Bluetooth® audio may be stoppedunder the following conditions:– Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.– Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.• Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device

in an area surrounded by metal or faraway from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®module to prevent tone quality degrada-tion and wireless connection disruption.

• While an audio device is connectedthrough the Bluetooth® wireless connec-tion, the battery power of the device maydischarge quicker than usual.

• This system supports the Bluetooth® Au-dio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. andlicensed to Visteonand Bosch.


FM/AM RADIO (if so equipped)1. MENU button

2. AUDIO button

3. Display screen

4. / (SEEK/TRACK) buttons

5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power)button

For additional information, refer to “Audiooperation precautions” regarding all opera-tion precautions in this section.

Audio main operationVOL (volume) knob / PUSH

(power) buttonPlace the ignition switch in the ON positionand press the PUSH (power) buttonwhile the system is off to call up the mode(radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®)that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off.To turn the system off, press the PUSH

(power) button.Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust thevolume.This vehicle may be equipped with SpeedSensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

LHA4672


MENU buttonPress the MENU button to show theMenu screen. Touch the “Settings” key onthe display, then touch the “Sound” key.

Sound SettingsBass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, themore the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-” or “+” keys.AUDIO buttonPush to display the audio screen. When thisbutton is pushed while the audio screen isnot displayed, the last audio source playedwill play.


AM/FM radio screen1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key

Touch to display the radio menu screen.

2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped)Touch to manually enter a station.

3. Audio source indicatorIndicates the currently selected audiosource.

4. Reception information displayReception information currently avail-able such as frequency, station name,etc. is displayed.

5. Preset listTo listen to a preset station, touch thecorresponding station from the presetlist. If displayed, touch the “ <” or “ >” keysto scroll the preset list.

AM radio operationPress the MENU button and touch the“AM” key or press the AUDIO button andselect AM on the bottom of the Launch Barto bring up the AM display screen.If another audio source is playing when the“AM” key is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and thelast radio station played will begin playing.AM MenuTouch the “AM Menu” key to display the AMMenu screen options:• SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch

the “AM Menu” key on the radio screenand then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta-tions will be tuned from low to high fre-quencies and stop at each broadcastingstation for several seconds. Touching the“SCAN” key again during this period ofseveral seconds will stop tuning and theradio will remain tuned to that station.

• Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scanand update the station list displayed onthe right side of the AM Menu screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttonsPress the or buttons to tunefrom low to high or high to low frequenciesand to stop at the next broadcasting sta-tion.1 to 6 station memory operationsUp to six stations can be registered in thepreset list.1. Select the AM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will bedisplayed on the preset list.To select and listen to the preset stations,push or on the steering wheelbriefly or touch a preferred station on thepreset list on the radio screen.

LHA4708


FM radio operationPress the MENU button and touch the“FM” key or press the AUDIO button andselect FM on the bottom of the Launch Barto bring up the FM display screen.If another audio source is playing when the“FM” key is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and thelast radio station played will begin playing.The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shownon the screen during FM stereo reception.When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,the radio automatically changes from ste-reo to monaural reception.FM MenuTouch the “FM Menu” key to display the FMMenu screen options:• SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch

the “FM Menu” key on the radio screenand then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta-tions will be tuned from low to high fre-quencies and stop at each broadcastingstations for several seconds. Touchingthe “SCAN” key again during this period ofseveral seconds will stop tuning and theradio will remain tuned to that station.

• Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up-date the station list displayed on the rightside of the FM Menu screen.

• RDS Info: Radio station and song informa-tion can be displayed on the FM displayscreen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttonsPress the or buttons to tunefrom low to high or high to low frequenciesand to stop at the next broadcasting sta-tion.1 to 12 Station memory operationsUp to 12 stations can be registered in thepreset list.1. Select the FM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will bedisplayed on the preset list.To select and listen to the preset stations,push or on the steering wheelbriefly or touch a preferred station on thepreset list on the radio screen.

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operationConnecting auxiliary devicesConnect an AUX device into the AUX inputjack located on the center console belowthe heater and air conditioner controls.The AUX input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portablecassette player, CD player, MP3 player orphone.Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug inthe audio input jack. If a cable with a monoplug is used, the audio output may notfunction normally.Activation and playingTurn on the AUX device. Connect an AUXcable to the AUX device and the AUX inputjack. Select AUX mode from the audiosource menu screen or by pressing theSource button on the steering wheel.


AUX screen• Audio source indicator

Indicates that the AUX source is currentlyplaying.

• “Volume Setting” keysTouch one of the keys to select the soundoutput gain from Low, Medium and High.

• AUX from Launch BarTouch to change from another source toAUX.

Additional featuresFor additional information, refer to “iPod®player operation without Navigation Sys-tem” in this section.For additional information, refer to “USB(Universal Serial Bus) connection port(models without Navigation System)” in thissection.For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-gation System” in this section.

Microsoft (WMA) Obligation ofLabelingAdditional Obligation of LabelingThis product is protected by certain intel-lectual property rights of MicrosoftCorporation and third parties. Use or distri-bution of such technology outside of thisproduct is prohibited without a licensefrom Microsoft or an authorized Microsoftsubsidiary and third parties.

LHA4709


FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if soequipped)1. CD eject button

2. FM-AM button

3. AUX button

4. CD insert slot

5. Backward seek button andForward seek button

6. BACK button

7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob

8. Display screen

9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) controlknob

10. CD button

11. SXM button**No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the SXM button is pressed to accesssatellite radio stations unless optional sat-ellite receiver and antenna are installedand an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio servicesubscription is active. Satellite radio is notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.For additional information, refer to “Audiooperation precautions” regarding all opera-tion precautions in this section.

LHA2895


Audio main operationON-OFF button / VOL (volume) controlknobPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the ON-OFF buttonwhile the system is off to call up the mode(radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB oriPod®) that was playing immediately beforethe system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON-OFFbutton.Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-just the volume.This vehicle may be equipped with SpeedSensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

Audio settings1. Press the [ ] button.


3. Touch the “Audio” key.Use the touch-screen to adjust the follow-ing items to the desired setting:

AudioBass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speak-

ers.Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the

speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “ 0 ” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the vol-ume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Avail-able options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust.When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to themain audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.


SXM settingsTo view the SXM settings:1. Press the [ ] button.


3. Touch the “SXM” key.The signal strength, activation status andother information are displayed on thescreen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM·AM buttonPress the FM·AM button to change theband as follows:AM →P1→ FM1 →FM→P2If another audio source is playing when theFM·AM button is pressed, the audio sourceplaying will automatically be turned off andthe last radio station played will begin play-ing.The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shownon the screen during FM stereo reception.When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,the radio automatically changes from ste-reo to monaural reception.

SXM band selectPressing the SXM button will change theband as follows:SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite,if so equipped)When the SXM button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the last station played.The last station played will also come onwhen the ON-OFF button is pressed to turnthe radio on.*When the SXM button is pressed, the sat-ellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radiois not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.If a compact disc is playing when the SXMbutton is pressed, the compact disc willautomatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.While the radio is in SXM mode, the opera-tion can be controlled through the touch-screen. Touch the “Categories” key to dis-play a list of categories. Touch a categorydisplayed on the list to display optionswithin that category.

Tuning with the touch-screenWhen in AM or FM mode, the radio can betuned using the touch-screen. To bring upthe visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on thelower right corner of the screen. A screenappears with a bar running from low fre-quencies on the left to high frequencies onthe right. Touch the screen at the locationof the frequency you wish to tune and thestation will change to that frequency. Toreturn to the regular radio display screen,touch the “OK” key.Tuning with the TUNE knobThe radio can also be manually tuned us-ing the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode,turn the TUNE knob to the left for lowerfrequencies or to the right for higher fre-quencies. When in SXM mode, turn theTUNE knob to change the channel.

SEEK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press the orseek buttons to tune from low to high

or high to low frequencies and to stop atthe next broadcasting station.When in SXM mode, press the orseek buttons to change the category.


1 to 6 Station memory operationsTwelve stations can be set for the FM band(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations canbe set for the AM band. Eighteen stationscan be set for the SXM band (six for SXM1, sixfor SXM2 & six SXM3).1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button or choosethe radio band SXM1, SXM2 & SXM3 usingthe SXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station usingmanual or seek tuning. Press and holdany of the desired station memory but-tons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come onand the sound will resume. Program-ming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if thefuse opens, the radio memory will be can-celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-tions.Presets can also be selected by touchingthe desired preset number on the screen.

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (ifso equipped)The Smart Favorites feature allows theuser to designate presets, within the SXM1,SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Fa-vorites. When any of the Smart Favoritepresets are selected, the current track onthat station will play from the beginning ofthe song.To program a Smart Favorite preset:1. Press the SXM button.

2. Touch the “Setup” key.

LHA2899 LHA3085


3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select anavailable preset.

For additional information, refer to “1 to 6station memory operations” in this sectionregarding preset memory options.

NOTE:

• Smart Favorites will start functioningonly after the audio unit is turned on fora few minutes.• Tune Start is supported for music chan-nels only.

Replay ScreenThe Replay Screen gives the user the abilityto replay, skip, pause or rewind the cur-rently aired track.When the “Replay” key is touched, the Re-play Screen is prompted.

REPLAY To replay a track from thebeginning, press the “ ”key. The user can continueto press the “ ” key toreplay previous songs, butcan only go back as far asthe system permits. Thesystem will warn the userwhen they cannot skip anyfurther back by displaying“At the End” in the bottomleft corner of the screen.

SKIP To skip a track, press the “” key. “Live” will appear

in the bottom left corner ofthe screen indicating thedifference from play time tolive audio.

PAUSE To pause a track, press the “” key.

REWIND/FASTFORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward atrack, hold the “ ” or “

” key.

LHA3087


Compact Disc (CD) playeroperationIf the radio is already operating, it automati-cally turns off and the compact disc beginsto play.

CD buttonWhen the CD button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded,the system will turn on and the compactdisc will start to play.When the CD button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded and the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off andthe compact disc will start to play.

CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded withtext is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed list-ing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD isplaying:

Random/Mix

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-ing “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on thedisplay. To cancel Random/Mix mode, touch the “Random” or “Mix” key until the key is no longerhighlighted.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This textwill appear on the display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longerhighlighted

Browse

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in thelist to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list thefolders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose afolder.


SEEK (Reverse or FastForward) buttons

Press and hold the or seek but-tons for 1.5 seconds while the compact discis playing to reverse or fast forward thetrack being played. The compact disc playsat an increased speed while reversing orfast forwarding. When the button is re-leased, the compact disc returns to normalplay speed.

SEEK buttons

Press the seek button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to return to thebeginning of the current track. Press the

seek button several times to skipbackward several tracks.Press the seek button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to advance onetrack. Press the seek button severaltimes to skip forward several tracks. If thelast track on a CD is skipped, the first trackon the disc is played. If the last track in afolder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, thefirst track of the next folder is played.

AUX buttonThe AUX IN audio input port accepts anystandard analog audio input such as froma portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3player or a laptop computer. Press the AUXbutton to play a compatible deviceplugged into the AUX IN port.

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressedwith a compact disc loaded, the compactdisc will eject and the last source will beplayed.If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,the disc will reload.

Additional featuresFor additional information, refer to “iPod®player operation with Navigation System”in this section.For additional information, refer to “USB(Universal Serial Bus) connection port(models with Navigation System)” in thissection.For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Naviga-tion System” in this section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)CONNECTION PORT (modelswithout Navigation System) (if soequipped)

Connecting a device to the USBconnection port

WARNING


LHA4319


CAUTION

• To avoid damage and loss of functionwhen using a USB device, note thefollowing precautions.




For additional information, refer to your de-vice manufacturer's owner information re-garding the proper use and care of thedevice.

The USB port is located on the center con-sole beneath the heater and air condi-tioner controls. Insert the USB device intothe connection port.When a compatible storage device isplugged into the connection port, compat-ible audio files on the storage device can beplayed through the vehicle's audio system.The port is illuminated for better visibilitywhen the headlight switch is in the ON po-sition.

USB connections screenPress the MENU button and touch the“Connections” key or touch the “Settings”key and touch the “Connections” key tochange USB settings.• Auto Change Source

Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audiosource settings for USB memory devicesor an iPod® connected through a USBcable.

LHA4711


USB screen1. “USB Menu” key

Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen.

2. Track informationTrack information such as the songname, artist name and album name aredisplayed.


4. USB operation keysTouch to control USB playbackfunctions

5. Play time and progress barThe play time of the track is displayed.The bar indicates the progress in playinga track.

USB operation keysTouch to control USB playback functions.

Keys DescriptionEach time “ ” key istouched, the repeat modechanges.Touch to return to the begin-ning of the current track.Touch again to select theprevious track. Touch andhold to rewind the currenttrack.Touch to play the track.Touch to pause the track.Touch to select the nexttrack. Touch and hold tofast-forward the track.Each time “ ” key istouched, the random modechanges.

USB memory device playeroperation

Activation and playingConnecting the USB memory device intothe port will start playing the USB memory.USB memory device can also be played bytouching the “USB” key on the Menu screenor by touching USB on the Launch Bar.To pause playing the USB memory devicetouch the “ ” key. To resume playing,touch the “ ” key.Skipping tracksTo skip the tracks, push the orbuttons on the control panel or touch the “

” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat-edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping tothe previous track may require pushingthe button or touching the key twice.Pushing the button or touching the keyonce may only restart the current trackfrom the beginning.

LHA4710


Fast-forwarding/rewindingTo rewind or fast-forward the track, pushand hold the or buttons on thecontrol panel or touch and hold the “ ”or “ ” keys on the screen.Changing play modeRepeat modeTouch the “ ” key on the USB screen tochange the repeat mode.The following modes are available:No text displayed: Repeat offAll: Repeat all1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder1 Track: Repeat trackRandom modeTouch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the random mode as follows:No text displayed: Random offRandom: Random playAll: Repeat all1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

USB menuTouch the “USB Menu” key on the USBscreen to display the USB Menu screen.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USBscreen.

“Folder List” key Touch to display the folder list.Touch an item on the list toselect the folder. The sub-folder or track list will be dis-played. Select a sub-folder ortrack from the list.

“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the albumartwork display on the USBscreen.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)CONNECTION PORT (models withNavigation System) (if soequipped)

Connecting a device to the USBconnection port

WARNING


LHA4319


CAUTION




For additional information, refer to your de-vice manufacturer’s owner information re-garding the proper use and care of thedevice.The USB port is located on the instrumentpanel. Insert the USB device into the instru-ment panel.When a compatible storage device isplugged into the connection port, compat-ible audio files on the storage device can beplayed through the vehicle's audio system.

Audio file operationAUX (auxiliary) buttonPlace the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the AUX button toswitch to the USB input mode. If anotheraudio source is playing and a USB connec-tion port device is inserted, press the AUXbutton until the center display changes tothe USB memory mode.If the system has been turned off while theUSB memory was playing, press the ON-OFF button to restart the USB memory.

Play informationInformation about the audio files beingplayed is shown on the display screen ofthe vehicle's audio system. Touch “Browse”to display the list of folders and files on theUSB device. Touch the name of a song onthe screen to begin playing that song.

Seeking buttons

Press the seeking button while anaudio file on the USB device is playing toreturn to the beginning of the current track.Press the seeking button severaltimes to skip backward several tracks.

LHA4006


Press the seeking button while anaudio file on the USB device is playing toadvance one track. Press the seekingbutton several times to skip forward sev-eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on theUSB device is skipped, the first track of thenext folder is played.Random and repeat play modeWhile files on a USB device are playing, theplay pattern can be altered so that songsare repeated or played randomly.RandomTouch the “Random” key to apply a randomplay pattern to the USB device. When theRandom mode is active, the text “Random”on the key will illuminate and the text “Ran-dom Folder” appears. By touching the “Ran-dom” key once more, the text “Random All”appears. To cancel Random mode, touchthe “Random” key until no text is illumi-nated.

RepeatTouch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeatplay pattern to the USB device. When theRepeat mode is active, the text on the “Re-peat” key will illuminate and the text “Re-peat Track” appears. By touching the “Re-peat” key once more, the text “RepeatFolder” appears. To cancel Repeat mode,touch the “Repeat” key until no text is illumi-nated.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATIONWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (ifso equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING


LHA4319


CAUTION




For additional information, refer to your de-vice manufacturer’s owner information re-garding the proper use and care of thedevice.To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so thatthe iPod® can be controlled with the audiosystem controls and display screen, usethe USB connection port located on thecenter console below the heater and airconditioner controls. Connect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® andthe USB end of the cable to the USB con-nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®supports charging via a USB connection, its

battery will be charged while connected tothe vehicle with the ignition switch in theON position. The port is illuminated for bet-ter visibility when the headlight switch is inthe ON position.While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®can only be operated by the vehicle audiocontrols.To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,remove the USB end of the cable from theUSB connection port on the vehicle, thenremove the cable from the iPod®.* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

CompatibilityThe following models are compatible:• iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)• iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware


version 2.0.4 or later)• iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)*• iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

• iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmwareversion 5.1 or later)

• iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmwareversion 1.3.1 or later)

• iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)

• iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)

• iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmwareversion 1.0.4 or later)


• iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmwareversion 1.1 or later)

• iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)• iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)• iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)• iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)* Some features of this iPod® may not befully functional.Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-dated to the version indicated above.


iPod screen1. “iPod Menu” key

Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.



4. Album artworkAn image of the album artwork is dis-played when available if the setting isturned on.

5. iPod® operation keysTouch to control iPod® playbackfunctions


iPod® operation keysTouch to control iPod® playback functions.


iPod® memory device playeroperationActivation and playingConnecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USBcable will activate the iPod® mode.The iPod® can also be played by touchingthe “iPod” key on the Menu screen or bytouching iPod on the Launch Bar.Skipping tracksTo skip the tracks, push the orbuttons on the control panel or touch the “

” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat-edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping tothe previous track may require pushingthe button or touching the key twice.Pushing the button or touching the keyonce may only restart the current trackfrom the beginning.Fast-forwarding/rewindingTo rewind or fast-forward the track, pushand hold the or buttons on thecontrol panel or touch and hold the “ ”or “ ” keys on the screen,

LHA4724


Changing play modeRepeat modeTouch the “ ” key on the iPod® screento change the repeat mode. The followingmodes are available.No text displayed: Repeat offAll: Repeat allOne: Repeat trackRandom modeTouch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the random mode as follows.No text displayed: Random offSongs: Random play

iPod® MenuTouch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod®screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USBscreen.

“Folder List” key (ifso equipped)

Touch to display the folder list.Touch an item on the list toselect the folder. The sub-folder or track list will be dis-played. Select a sub-folder ortrack from the list.

“Album Artwork”key

Touch to run on/off the albumartwork display on the USBscreen.

“Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac-cording to the selected item.“Artists” key

“Albums” key“Songs” key“Podcasts” key“Genres” key“Composers” key“Audiobooks” key“iTunes Radio”key

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operatethe USB device while driving. Doing socan be a distraction. If distracted youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident or serious injury.

LHA4319


CAUTION




For additional information, refer to your de-vice manufacturer’s owner information re-garding the proper use and care of thedevice.To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so thatthe iPod® can be controlled with the audiosystem controls and display screen, usethe USB port located on the instrumentpanel. Connect the iPod®-specific end ofthe cable to the iPod® and the USB end ofthe cable to the USB port on the vehicle. Ifyour iPod® supports charging via a USBconnection, its battery will be charged

while connected to the vehicle with the ig-nition switch in the ACC or ON position.While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®can only be operated by the vehicle audiocontrols.To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,remove the USB end of the cable from theUSB port on the vehicle, then remove thecable from the iPod®.* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

CompatibilityThe following models are compatible:• iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware



version 2.0.4 or later)• iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)*• iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)• iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)• iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

• iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)

• iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)



• iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmwareversion 1.1 or later)

• iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)• iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)• iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)• iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)* Some features of this iPod® may not befully functional.Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-dated to the version indicated above.


Audio main operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition. Press the AUX button repeatedlyto switch to the iPod® mode.If the system has been turned off while theiPod® was playing, pressing the ON·OFFbutton will start the iPod®.AUX buttonWhen the AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the iPod® connected, thesystem will turn on. If another audio sourceis playing and the iPod® is connected, pressthe AUX button repeatedly until the centerdisplay changes to the iPod® mode.

InterfaceThe interface for iPod® operation shown onthe vehicle's audio system display screen issimilar to the iPod® interface. Use thetouch-screen, BACK button or the scrollingknob to navigate the menus on the screen.When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”key to bring up the iPod® interface.Depending on the iPod® model, the follow-ing items may be available on the menu listscreen. For additional information, refer tothe iPod® Owner's Manual regarding eachmenu item.• Playlists

• Artists• Albums• Genres• Songs• Composers• Audiobooks• PodcastsShuffle and repeat play modeWhile the iPod® is playing, the play patterncan be altered so that songs are repeatedor played randomly.ShuffleTouch the “Shuffle” key to apply a randomplay pattern to the iPod®. When the Shufflemode is active, the text is illuminated andwill display “Shuffle songs” text above the“Shuffle” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touchthe “Shuffle” key again until the text is nolonger illuminated.RepeatTouch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeatplay pattern to the iPod®. When the repeatmode is active, the text is illuminated andwill display “Repeat song” text above the“Repeat” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touchthe “Repeat” key again until the text is nolonger illuminated.

LHA4007 LHA2907


SEEK buttons

Press the SEEK button or to skipbackward or forward one track.Press and hold the SEEK button or

for 1.5 seconds while a track is playingto reverse or fast forward the track beingplayed. The track plays at an increasedspeed while reversing or fast forwarding.When the button is released, the track re-turns to normal play speed.

Scrolling menusWhile navigating long lists of artists, al-bums or songs in the music menu, it ispossible to scroll the list by the first charac-ter in the name. To activate character in-dexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in theupper right corner of the screen. Turn theTUNE knob to choose the number or letterto jump to in the list and then press theENTER/AUDIO button.If no character is selected after a few sec-onds, the display returns to normal.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIOWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (ifso equipped)If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audiodevice that is capable of playing audio files,the device can be connected to the vehi-cle's audio system so that the audio files onthe device play through the vehicle'sspeakers.

LHA2279


Connecting procedureNOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-formed when the vehicle is stationary. Ifthe vehicle starts moving during the pro-cedure, the procedure will be canceled.To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System:Manual Connecting Procedure1. Press the MENU button on the con-

trol panel.

2. Touch the “Connections” key on thescreen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add New”key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found amessage with a PIN appears on thescreen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept theconnection.

Menu Item ResultBluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Automatic Connecting ProcedureIf no phone is connected to the system,press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, thesystem will announce “transferring to theadd phone settings menu”. The system willstart the pairing procedure. When a com-patible phone is found, a message with a

PIN appears on the screen. Operate theBluetooth® phone to complete the con-nection process. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connectionsscreen” in this section.

LHA4726


Bluetooth® screen1. “BT Menu” key

Depending on the Bluetooth® versionsupported by the connected device, ei-ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections”key is displayed.



4. Bluetooth® audio operation keysTouch to control Bluetooth® audio play-back functions


Bluetooth® operation keysTouch to control Bluetooth® playbackfunctions.


Bluetooth® audio operationThe ability to pause, change tracks, fastforward, rewind, randomize and repeatmusic may be different between devices.Some or all of these functions may not besupported on each device.

NOTE:

Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de-vice that is connected, it may not be pos-sible to perform audio operations or a de-lay may occur before music is played back.Activation and playingA Bluetooth® audio device can be played bytouching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menuscreen or by touching Bluetooth on theLaunch Bar.To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ” keyto resume playing.Changing foldersTo change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.Fast-forwarding/rewindingTo fast-forward or rewind the track, pushand hold the or buttons on thecontrol panel or touch the “ ” or “ ”keys on the screen.

LHA4727


Changing play modeRepeat modeTouch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the repeat mode.Random modeTouch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the random mode.

NOTE:

Available repeat/random modes changedepending on the connected device.

BT MenuTouch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth®audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au-dio menu screen.The following items are available.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display theBluetooth® audio screen.

“Current List” key (if soequipped)*

A list of track in the cur-rently selected folder is dis-played.

“Connections” key Touch to display the con-nections screen.

“Folder List” key* Touch to display the folderlist. Touch an item on thelist to select the folder.

*: displayed only when available.

NOTE:

Depending on the connected device, the“BT Menu” key may not be displayed.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIOWITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audiodevice that is capable of playing audio files,the device can be connected to the vehi-cle's audio system so that the audio files onthe device play through the vehicle'sspeakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audioTo connect your Bluetooth® audio deviceto the vehicle, follow the procedure below:1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

LHA2773


4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the com-mand and asks you to initiate connect-ing from the phone handset.

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellularphone varies according to each cellularphone model. For additional informa-tion, refer to the cellular phone owner’smanual. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-tions on connecting NISSAN recom-mended cellular phones.

Audio main operationTo switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,press the AUX button repeatedly until theBluetooth® audio mode is displayed on thescreen.The controls for the Bluetooth® audio aredisplayed on the screen.

CD CARE AND CLEANING• Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.• Always place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.• To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean,soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using acircular motion.

• Do not use a conventional record cleaneror alcohol intended for industrial use.

• A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA2844 LHA0049


STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROLThe audio system can be operated usingthe controls on the steering wheel.1. Volume control switch

2. MODE select switch

3. Tuning switch

MODE select switchPush the MODE select switch to changethe mode in the following sequence:AM →P1→ FM1 → FM2→ P2→ (SXM1 → SXM2→ SXM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped)) →CD* (if so equipped) → USB/iPod®* →Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM→P1.* These modes are only available whencompatible media storage is inserted intothe device or connected to the system.

Volume control switchPush the volume control switch to increaseor decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

While the display is showing a map or audioscreen, tilt the Tuning switch upward ordownward to select a station, track, CD orfolder. For most audio sources, tilting theswitch up/down for more than 1.5 secondsprovides a different function than a tiltingup/down for less than 1.5 seconds.AM and FM• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

seek up or down to the next station.

SXM (if so equipped)• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

go to the next or previous channel.iPod®• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.CD (if so equipped)• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number(if playing compressed audio files).

USB• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number.Bluetooth® Audio• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song.• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the current song.

LHA2559


ANTENNAThe antenna cannot be shortened, but canbe removed. When you need to remove theantenna, turn the antenna rod counter-clockwise.To install the antenna rod, turn the antennarod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

• Always properly tighten the antennarod during installation or the an-tenna rod may break during vehicleoperation.

• Be sure that the antenna is removedbefore the vehicle enters an auto-matic car wash.

Your vehicle may be equipped withNissanConnect® Mobile Apps, allowing youto control various compatible smartphoneapplications through the vehicle’s displayscreen. A basic package is included for aperiod of time form the original in-servicedate of the vehicle. For more details aboutyour Mobile Apps trial, please visitwww.nissanusa.com/connect/faq#apps-&-features.

NOTE:

A compatible smartphone and registra-tion is required to use mobile applica-tions or to access connected features ofcertain vehicle applications.

REGISTERING WITHNISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPSTo use the Smartphone Integration feature, itis necessary for the user to register. In orderto register, visit the NissanConnect® MobileApps website, www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or www.nissan.ca/en/connect orwww.nissan.ca/fr/connect and sign up orcreate an account through the prompts onthe NissanConnect® Mobile Apps. Once reg-istered, download the NissanConnect® Mo-bile Apps from your compatible phone’s ap-plication download source and then log intothe application. If you already have an ac-count created through the App, please log in.

CONNECT PHONETo use this feature, a compatible smart-phone must be connected via Bluetooth®or USB to the vehicle. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System with Navigation System” inthis section.

NOTE:

Apple iPhones® require the phone to beplugged in via USB for NissanConnect®Mobile Apps to function.For Android phones, NissanConnect®Mobile Apps requires the phone to bepaired via Bluetooth®.

NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (ifso equipped)


APPLICATION DOWNLOADOnce connected, the NissanConnect® Appwill search your phone to determine whichcompatible applications are currently in-stalled. The user will then choose whichapps they want to bring into their vehiclefrom the list of apps within the “Manage MyApps” section of the NissanConnect® Appon their smartphone. The vehicle will thendownload the in-vehicle interface for eachof these compatible applications. Oncedownloaded, the user can access their se-lected smartphone applications throughthe vehicle touch-screen. For additional in-formation, refer to www.nissanusa.com/connect or www.nissan.ca/en/connect orwww.nissan.ca/fr/connect regarding ap-plication availability.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistantcan be accessed from the vehicle. Siri EyesFree can be accessed in Siri Eyes Freemode to reduce user distraction. In thismode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-tion by voice control. After connecting acompatible Apple device by usingBluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activatedfrom the button on the steeringwheel.Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registeredin the U.S. and other countries.• Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as

displaying pictures or opening apps, maynot be available while driving.

• For getting best results, always updateyour device to the latest software version.

• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatethe surrounding noises (traffic noises, vi-bration sounds, etc.), which may preventthe system from recognizing the voicecommands correctly.

• For functions that can be used in Siri EyesFree, please refer to the Apple website.

REQUIREMENTSSiri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S orlater. Devices released before iPhone® 4Sare not supported by the Siri® Eyes Freesystem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri fordetails about device compatibility.Siri must be enabled on the phone. Pleasecheck phone settings.If the device has a lock screen, Siri must beaccessible from the lock screen. Pleasecheck phone settings.For best results, always update your deviceto the latest software version.

SIRI® EYES FREE (models withoutNavigation System) (if so equipped)


OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE1. Push button for more than 1.5

seconds.

2. Speak your command and then listen tothe Siri® Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push thebutton again within 5 seconds of the end ofthe Siri Eyes Free announcement to extendthe session.

Example 1 – Playing music1. Push button for more than 1.5

seconds.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change toBluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* whenthe music starts playing. Mode selectionis determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with theUSB cable.If the audio track does not start playingautomatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, trychanging the track or audio source to re-sume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native musicapp. Performance of music control func-tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook orother 3rd party music apps may vary andis controlled by the iPhone®.

Example 2 – Replying to text messages1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected

and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-play a notification for new incoming textmessages.

2. After reading the message, push orpush and hold the button to replyusing Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message”or a similar command to reply using SiriEyes Free.

LHA2589


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDESymptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri EyesFree from switch on thesteering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Audio Source does notchange automatically toiPod® or Bluetooth® Au-dio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd partymusic apps may vary.For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade perfor-mance.Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on thesteering wheel.

Play, pause, next track,previous track or playtimer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd partymusic apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/audio being played backfrom a connectediPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot receive text mes-sage notifications on thevehicle audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text mes-sage notifications by SiriEyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push the button on the steering wheel for more than 1.5seconds for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.


Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistantcan be accessed from the vehicle. Siri EyesFree can be accessed in Siri Eyes Freemode to reduce user distraction. In thismode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-tion by voice control. After connecting acompatible Apple device by usingBluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activatedfrom the button on the steeringwheel.Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registeredin the U.S. and other countries.• Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as

displaying pictures or opening apps, maynot be available while driving.

• For best results, always update your de-vice to the latest software version.

• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatethe surrounding noises (traffic noises, vi-bration sounds, etc.), which may preventthe system from recognizing the voicecommands correctly.

• For functions that can be used in Siri EyesFree, please refer to the Apple website.

REQUIREMENTSSiri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S orlater. Devices released before iPhone® 4Sare not supported by the Siri® Eyes Freesystem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri fordetails about device compatibility.Siri must be enabled on the phone. Pleasecheck phone settings.If the device has a lock screen, Siri must beaccessible from the lock screen. Pleasecheck phone settings.For best results, always update your deviceto the latest software version.

SIRI® ACTIVATIONSiri® Eyes Free function can be activated bypushing button on the steeringwheel for more than 1.5 seconds.1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled

iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional in-formation, refer to “Connecting proce-dure” in this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-tablished, push and hold the but-ton to activate the Siri Eyes Freefunction.

LHA2589

SIRI® EYES FREE (models withNavigation System) (if so equipped)


OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE1. Push or push and hold the button.

2. Speak your command and then listen tothe Siri Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push thebutton again within 5 seconds of the end ofthe Siri Eyes Free announcement to extendthe session.Example 1 – Playing music1. Push or push and hold the button.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change toBluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* whenthe music starts playing. Mode selectionis determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with theUSB cable.If the audio track does not start playingautomatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, trychanging the track or audio source to re-sume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native musicapp. Performance of music control func-tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook orother 3rd party music apps may vary andis controlled by the iPhone®.Example 2 – Replying to text messages1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected

and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-play a notification for new incoming textmessages.

2. After reading the message, push orpush and hold the button to replyusing Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message”or a similar command to reply using SiriEyes Free.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREESETTINGSSettings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found inthe Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-tings” in this section.1. Press the [ ] button.


3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.

5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to setthe activation.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDESymptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri EyesFree from switch on thesteering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Audio Source does notchange automatically toiPod® or Bluetooth® Au-dio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd partymusic apps may vary.For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade perfor-mance.Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on thesteering wheel.

Play, pause, next track,previous track or playtimer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd partymusic apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/audio being played backfrom a connectediPhone®


Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direction guid-ance from a connectediPhone®


Cannot receive text mes-sage notifications on thevehicle audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text mes-sage notifications by SiriEyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the button on the steering wheelfor Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.


When installing a CB, ham radio or carphone in your vehicle, be sure to observethe following precautions; otherwise, thenew equipment may adversely affect theengine control system and other electronicparts.

WARNING

• A cellular phone should not be usedfor any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibitthe use of cellular phones whiledriving.

• If you must make a call while yourvehicle is in motion, the hands freecellular phone operational mode (ifso equipped) is highly recom-mended. Exercise extreme caution atall times so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while talk-ing on the phone, pull off the road toa safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

• Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

• Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electroniccontrol system harnesses. Do notroute the antenna wire next to anyharness.

• Adjust the antenna standing-waveratio as recommended by themanufacturer.

• Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

• For additional information, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer.

• Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Do-ing so will bypass the variable volt-age control system and the vehiclebattery may not charge completely.For additional information, refer to“Variable voltage control system” inthe “Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

• Use electrical accessories with theengine running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

WARNING

• Use a phone after stopping your ve-hicle in a safe location. If you have touse a phone while driving, exerciseextreme caution at all times so fullattention may be given to vehicleoperation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-tery, use a phone after starting theengine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


Your NISSAN is equipped with theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Ifyou have a compatible Bluetooth® enabledcellular phone, you can set up the wirelessconnection between your cellular phoneand the in-vehicle phone module. WithBluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephonecall with your cellular phone in the vehicle.Once your cellular phone is connected tothe in-vehicle phone module, no otherphone connecting procedure is required.Your phone is automatically connectedwith the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition with the previously connected cellu-lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to acceptconnections to other Bluetooth® de-vices. If your phone does not connect au-tomatic ally to the system, consult thephone's owner's manual for details ondevice operation.You can connect up to five differentBluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you cantalk on only one cellular phone at a time.Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System, refer to the following notes.• Set up the wireless connection between

a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using thehands-free phone system.

• Some Bluetooth® enabled cellularphones may not be recognized or workproperly. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and connecting in-structions.

LHA4813


• You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground park-ing garage, near a tall building or in amountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to preventit from being dialed.

• When the radio wave condition is notideal or ambient sound is too loud, it maybe difficult to hear the other person'svoice during a call.

• Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away fromthe in-vehicle phone module to preventtone quality degradation and wirelessconnection disruption.

• While a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth® wireless connec-tion, the battery power of the cellularphone may discharge quicker than usual.The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem cannot charge cellular phones.

• For additional information, you can visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

• Some cellular phones or other devicesmay cause interference or a buzzing noiseto come from the audio system speakers.Storing the device in a different locationmay reduce or eliminate the noise.

• For additional information, refer to thecellular phone owner's manual regardingthe telephone charges, cellular phoneantenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATIONFCC Regulatory information– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use onlythe supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-tenna, modification, or attachmentscould damage the transmitter and mayviolate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1.1) This device may not cause interfer-

ence and2.2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

IC Regulatory information– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets allrequirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regu-lations.

BLUETOOTH® is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. andlicensed toPanasonic.

USING THE SYSTEMThe system allows hands-free operation ofthe Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.If the vehicle is in motion, some commandsmay not be available so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-ized, which takes a few seconds. If thebutton is pressed before the initializationcompletes, the system will announce“There is no phone connected” and will notreact to voice commands.


Operating tipsTo get the best performance out of theNISSAN Voice Recognition System, observethe following:• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Keep all vents pointed awayfrom the microphone and close the win-dows to eliminate surrounding noises(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),which may prevent the system from rec-ognizing voice commands correctly.

• Wait until the tone sounds before speak-ing a command. Otherwise, the com-mand will not be received properly.

• Start speaking a command within 5 sec-onds after the tone sounds.

• Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

• For calling contacts by name, please sayboth the first and last name of the con-tact for better recognition.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,press the button located on thesteering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.After the tone sounds, speak a command.The command given is picked up by themicrophone, and voice feedback is givenwhen the command is accepted.• If a command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces, “Please say or select acommand from the displayed list.” Makesure the command is said exactly asprompted by the system and repeat thecommand in a clear voice.

• If you want to go back to the previouscommand, you can say “Go back” anytime the system is waiting for a response.

• You can cancel a command when thesystem is waiting for a response by say-ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Recog-nition session. You can also press andhold the button on the steeringwheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to endthe Voice Recognition session. Wheneverthe Voice Recognition session is can-celed, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

• If you want to adjust the volume of thevoice feedback, push the (+ or -) volumecontrol switches on the steering wheelwhile being provided with feedback. Youcan also use the radio volume controlknob.

Voice Prompt InterruptIn most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel. After interrupting the system, waitfor a beep before speaking your command.One Shot Call (if so equipped)To use the system faster, you may speakthe second level commands with the mainmenu command on the main menu. Forexample, press the button and afterthe tone say, “Call Redial”.


INDICATORSWhen a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth® wireless connection, indica-tors O1 for the phone and text messaging aredisplayed on the top of the screen.

Indicator DescriptionIndicates there are unread receivedmessages.Indicates the Bluetooth® devicethat is currently connected.Indicates the strength of the signalthe Bluetooth® device is receiving.Indicates the amount of remainingBluetooth® device battery.

CONTROL BUTTONSThe control buttons for the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System are located onthe steering wheel.

VOICE COMMAND BUTTONPress and hold the buttonfor less than 1.5 seconds to initi-ate the Voice Recognition session.To exit the Voice Recognition ses-sion press and hold the formore than 1.5 seconds. For addi-tional information, refer to “Voiceprompt interrupt” in this section.

You can use the button tointerrupt the system feedbackand give a command at once.

If an iPhone® is connected, Siri®can be accessed by pressing the

button for more than twoseconds. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in thissection.

PHONE BUTTONTo answer an incoming call or toend a call press the button.

To reject a call press and hold thebutton.

LHA4723 LHA2561


CONNECTING PROCEDURENOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-formed when the vehicle is stationary. Ifthe vehicle starts moving during the pro-cedure, the procedure will be canceled.To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System:Manual Connecting Procedure1. Press the MENU button on the con-

trol panel.

2. Touch the “Connections” key on thescreen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add New”key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found amessage with a PIN appears on thescreen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept theconnection.

6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menutouch the “ ” key on the Connectionsscreen. The following options areavailable:

Menu Item ResultBluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

LHA4726


NOTE:

Some cellular phones may require you toaccept certain permissions in order toenable features on your Bluetooth® sys-tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro-cess, please check your cellular phone’sdisplay for a pop-up with the request togrant phonebook access.Granting phonebook access permissionwill allow your contacts to be down-loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys-tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu-lar phone stating that the Bluetooth®system would like to access your con-tacts and call history. Please select “Al-low” or Yes” to grant this permission.Automatic Connecting ProcedureIf no phone is connected to the system,press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, thesystem will announce “transferring to theadd phone settings menu”. The system willstart the pairing procedure. When a com-patible phone is found, a message with aPIN appears on the screen. Operate theBluetooth® phone to complete the con-nection process. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connectionsscreen” in this section.

VOICE COMMANDSVoice commands can be used to operatethe Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Press the button to bring up thephone command menu. The commandsavailable are:• Call <name>• Dial <number>• Recent Calls• Read/Send Text (if so equipped)• Siri® (if so equipped)• Voice Assistant (if so equipped)• Phonebook• Quick Dial• Redial• Select Phone• Add Phone• Call <name> Mobile• Call <name> Home• Call <name> Office• Call <name> Main• Call <name> Other• Settings

“Call <name>”Speak this command to make a call to acontact that is stored in the phonebook.Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name toinitiate a call. If the system does not recog-nize the name it will display a list of similarnames. After the prompt, speak or touchan item number from the displayed list toplace the call.

“Dial <number>”Speak this command to make a call with aspoken phone number. After the prompt,say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phonenumber. The system will repeat the num-ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or“Correction” to re-enter the phone number.


“Recent Calls”The following commands are available un-der “Recent Calls”:• Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last 20 in-coming calls to the vehicle. If the call is froman entry in the phonebook, the name willbe displayed. Otherwise, the phone num-ber of the incoming call will be displayed.When prompted, speak or touch the itemnumber on the screen to place the call.Touch the “Next” key to move through thelist of incoming calls.

• Outgoing CallsSpeak this command to list the last 20outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the callwas to an entry in the phonebook, thename will be displayed. Otherwise, thephone number of the outgoing call will bedisplayed.When prompted, speak or touch the itemnumber on the screen to place the call.Touch the “Next” key to move through thelist of outgoing calls.

• Missed CallsSpeak this command to list the last 20missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is froman entry in the phonebook, the name willbe displayed. Otherwise, the phone num-ber of the missed call will be displayed.When prompted, speak or touch the itemnumber on the screen to place the call.Touch the “Next” key to move through thelist of missed calls.

“Read Text/Send Text” (if soequipped)Speak this command to access text mes-saging functions. For additional information,refer to “Text messaging” in this section.

“Phonebook through voicecommand”Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quicksteps to access entries stored in thephonebook. Commands are organized bythe phone number type selected in the cel-lular device. For additional information, re-fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.The following commands are available:• <Say a Contact Name>• <Say a Contact Name> Main• <Say a Contact Name> Home

• <Say a Contact Name> Mobile• <Say a Contact Name> Office• <Say a Contact Name> OtherFor additional information on manually se-lecting phonebook entries, refer to “Makinga call” in this section.

“Quick dial”Speak this command to access the Quickdial menu. After the prompt, speak or se-lect an item number on the displayed list toplace the call. For additional information,refer to “Making a call” in this section.

“Redial”Speak this command to call the last num-ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” todial the number of the last outgoing call.The system will display “Redialing <name/number>”. The name of the phonebook en-try will be displayed if it is available, other-wise the number being redialed will bedisplayed.

“Select Phone”Speak this command to access the Con-nections menu. For additional information,refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” inthis section.


“Add Phone”Speak this command to access the Con-nections menu. For additional information,refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” inthis section.

“Settings”Speak this command to access the Sys-tem Voice settings menu. The system willexit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one ofthe following options on the screen tochange the settings.• Beep Only for Opening Prompt

By touching the “ON” key, the indicatorlight will illuminate, the system voice willturn off and only a tone will sound whenthe Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is activated. To turn the system voiceback on, touch the “ON” key again, theindicator light will turn off.

• Best Match ListWhen the system doesn't recognize aphonebook name or dial number, it willprovide a list of similar sounding results.To turn this off, touch the “ON” key, theindicator light will turn off. To turn on,touch the “ON” key again, the indicatorlight will turn on.

PHONE DISPLAY SCREENThe Phone screen can be displayed bypressing the button on the controlpanel.The following options are displayed:• Quick Dial

Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi-tional information, refer to “Quick dial” inthis section.

• PhonebookDisplays the Phonebook screen. For addi-tional information, refer to “Making a call”in this section.

• Call HistoryDisplays the Call History screen. For addi-tional information, refer to “Making a call”in this section.

• Dial NumberDisplays the Dial Number screen. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Making acall” in this section.

• Text MessageDisplays the received message screen.For additional information, refer to “Textmessaging” in this section.

• ConnectionsDisplays the Connections screen. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Bluetooth®connections screen” in this section.

• VolumeDisplays the volume adjustment screen.For additional information, refer to “Vol-ume & beeps” in this section.

LHA4705


MAKING A CALLTo make a call press the button on thecontrol panel. Touch an option from menuscreen:• Phonebook

Select a person and the phone numberyou wish to call from the phonebook.Depending on the device, the phonebookwill be downloaded from the cellularphone automatically when it is con-nected. If the automatic download doesnot take place, the phone number mustbe transferred to the hands-free phonesystem from the cellular phone prior tousing this method. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Phone and text messagesettings” in this section.

• Call HistorySelect a phonebook name or phonenumber from the recent incoming, out-going or missed calls tabs. Touch aphonebook name or phone numberlisted to initiate the call.

• Dial NumberEnter the phone number manually usingthe keypad displayed on the screen.Touch the “OK” key on the screen to initi-ate the call.

For additional options to make a call, referto “Voice commands” in this section.

Quick DialQuick Dial entries can be used to quicklymake a call. The system allows up to 20entries to be stored. To set up a quick dialpress the button on the control panel.Touch the “Quick Dial” key to display a list ofquick dial entries. Touch the “Edit” key toedit current entries or touch the “Add New”key to make a new entry. Two methods aregiven to create a quick dial entry:• Touch the “Copy from Call History” key to

save a phone number from the Incoming,Outgoing or Missed call history lists. Se-lect the person or phone number fromthe menu to be added. A registrationmenu will display the Entry #, phone num-ber, phone number type stored in the cel-lular phone and Voice Tag. Touch the “OK”key.

• Touch the “Copy from Phonebook” key tosave a number from the phonebook. Usethe scroll keys on the side to move up anddown through the menu. Select a personto be added. A menu will display the Entry#, phone number, phone number typestored in the cellular phone and VoiceTag. Touch the “OK” key.

Voice tagA voice tag can be recorded for each of theregistered Quick Dial numbers and can beused to dial the number by speaking it. Onthe Quick Dial registration screen, touchthe “Voice Tag” key. Select a relationshipfrom the list or create a new voice tag. Torecord a new voice tag touch the “Custom-ize” key on the screen then touch the “Store”key. Speak a name after the prompt, thenew tag will be stored. To edit or create anew voice tag touch the “Customize” keyagain. Touch the “Play” key to play the re-corded voice tag, touch the “Restore” key toedit the voice tag or “Delete” to delete thecurrent voice tag.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen a call is received by the phone con-nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, the call information isdisplayed on the control panel display.Press the button on the steeringwheel or touch the “ Answer” key onthe screen to accept the call. To reject thecall touch the “ Decline” key on thescreen.


If the user is not able to answer the callright away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis-played on the screen. A message will beplayed for the caller: “I’m not able to take acall right now.” The user may then acceptthe call when available or reject the call.To reject a call, press and hold thebutton on the steering wheel.

DURING A CALLWhile a call is active the following optionswill appear on the control panel display:• Mute

Touch this key to mute or unmute thesystem.

• Dial NumberTouch this key to dial digits during thephone call.

• Use HandsetTouch this key to transfer the call to thehandset. To transfer the call back fromthe handset to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, press the but-ton on the control panel then select the“Transfer Hands-free” key on the screen.

• Switch CallThis option will only be available when asecond call is active.If supported by the phone, theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemallows for call waiting functionality. If acall is received while another call is al-ready active, a message will be displayedon the screen. Press the button onthe steering wheel or touch the “Answer” key on screen to accept the in-coming call. Touch the “ Decline” keyon the screen to reject the second call.

While a call is active, press the buttonon the steering wheel to access additionaloptions. Speak one of the following com-mands:• “Send Digits”

Speak this command followed by the dig-its to enter digits during the phone call.

• “Switch call”Speak this command to hold the secondcall and switch back to the original call.

ENDING A CALLTo end an active call, press the buttonon the steering wheel or touch the “Hang up” key on the screen.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)WARNING

• Laws in some jurisdictions may re-strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.Check local regulations before usingthis feature.

• Laws in some jurisdictions may re-strict the use of some of the applica-tions and features, such as socialnetworking and texting. Check localregulations for any requirements.

• Use the text messaging feature afterstopping your vehicle in a safe loca-tion. If you have to use the featurewhile driving, exercise extreme cau-tion at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while usingthe text messaging feature, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopyour vehicle.


NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled ifthe connected device does not supportthe Message Access Profile (MAP). Foradditional information, refer to thephone’s owner’s manual for details andinstructions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-mission to enable text messaging. Checkthe phone’s screen during Bluetooth®pairing. For some phones, you may needto enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’sBluetooth® menu for text messages toappear on the headunit. For additionalinformation, refer to your phone’s own-er’s manual. Text message integrationrequires that the phone support MAP(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-ing and sending text messages. Somephones may not support all text mes-saging features. Please refer towww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-ibility information, as well as your de-vice’s owner’s manual.The system allows for the sending and re-ceiving of text messages through the ve-hicle interface.

The availability of the text message func-tion may vary depending on the cellularphone.When the cellular phone connected to thevehicle receives a text message, a notifica-tion will appear on the control panel dis-play. To check the message, touch the“Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to savethe message to be checked later.Access text messaging through the ve-hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone orthrough the vehicles control panel.

Text messaging using Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System (if soequipped)Sending a text message (if so equipped)1. Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

3. The system will provide a list of availablecommands in order to determine therecipient of the text message. Choosefrom the following:• Phonebook• Quick Dial• Incoming Calls

• Outgoing Calls• Missed Calls• Dial

4. Once a recipient is chosen, the systemprompts for which message to send.Nine predefined messages are availableas well as three custom messages. Tochoose one of the predefined mes-sages, speak one of the following afterthe tone:• “Driving, can't text”• “Call me”• “On my way”• “Running late”• “Okay”• “Yes”• “No”• “Where are you?”• “When?”

To send one of the custom messages, say“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-tom message is stored, the system willprompt for the number of the desired cus-tom message. For additional informationon setting and managing custom textmessages, refer to “Phone and text mes-sage settings” in this section.


Reading a received text message1. Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say “Read Text” after the tone.The display will show a list of 20 messageswith the sender and delivery time. Touchthe “Next” key on the screen to view all mes-sages. To view a text message press the

button on the steering wheel andspeak the number item list on the screen.The following options will be available:• Play

Speak this command to have the systemsay the message.

• ReplySpeak this command to send a text mes-sage response to the sender of the textmessage.

• CallSpeak this command to call the sender.

• PreviousSpeak this command to move to the pre-vious text message (if available).

• NextSpeak this command to move to the nexttext message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,it can also be used to create custom mes-sages that are sent through the phone. Foradditional information, refer to “Siri® EyesFree (models without Navigation System)”in this section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if thevehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages canonly be sent through Siri.

Text messaging using the controlpanelDisplay received message list1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Text Message” key on thescreen

3. Touch an item on the list to read or replyto the message.

Up to 100 messages can be stored in themessage list.

Received message screenTouching the “Read” key on the incomingmessage notification screen or selecting amessage from the message list will showthe details of the received message on thedisplay.Available actions:• Prev.

Touch this key to read the previous mes-sage.

• NextTouch this key to read the next message.

• Play/StopTouch the “Play” key to have the hands-free phone system read out the receivedmessage. Touch the “Stop” key to stopreading.

• CallIf the sender of the message is registeredin the phonebook, touch the “Call” key tomake a call to the sender.

• ReplyA reply message can be selected fromthe predefined list or by a custom mes-sage.


Sending a text message (if so equipped)This function may not be supported de-pending on the cellular phone.1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Text Message” key on thescreen.

3. Touch the “Create Message” key on thescreen.

The following items are available:

Available item ActionTo Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.

Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list.Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook.Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history.

Select Text Fixed Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.Customized Touch to display a list of custom text messages. Custom text can be created or edited from the setting

menu. For additional information, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.Send Touch to send the message.


BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONSSCREEN1. “ ” (back) key2. Bluetooth tab3. Connections screen4. “Add New” key5. “ ” (settings) key6. “ ” (info) key7. “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key8. “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System connection) keyAccess the Connections screen to changesettings and view Bluetooth® information.To access the Connections screen pressthe MENU button on the control panel.

Touch the “Connections” key on the screenthen select the Bluetooth tab.The paired phone will be added to the liston the Bluetooth® connections screen.Touching the name of another device onthe list will switch the connected device.

“ ” (back) key

Touch the “ ” key to go back to theprevious screen.

Connecting Bluetooth®For additional information on connecting acellular phone or device to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Con-necting procedure” in this section.

NOTE:

Some cellular phones or other devicesmay cause interference or a buzzingnoise to come from the audio systemspeakers. Storing the device in a differ-ent location may reduce or eliminate thenoise.

Bluetooth tabThis tab will display up to 6 Bluetooth® de-vices. If 6 devices are already connected,one of the devices must be deleted beforeanother device can be connected.

“Add New” keyTouch the key on the screen to connect anew Bluetooth® device. For additional in-formation, refer to “Connecting procedure”in this section.

“ ” (Bluetooth® settings) keyTouch the “ ” key on the screen todisplay a list of options.• Bluetooth

Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth®connection on or off

• Favorite (Connection first)Touch this key to change which devicewill be connected first when multiple de-vices are connected to the vehicle.Turn the “ ” key on or off to make thedevice a favorite connection.Turn the “ ” key on or off to make thedevice a favorite connection.

• PinTouch this key to customize the PIN code.Input a four digit number then touch the“OK” key. The new PIN will be set.

LHA4716


“ ” (info) key

Touch the “ ” key on the screen todisplay the information of the cellularphone or to delete the device.Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paireddevice then select “Yes” when a messageappears.

“ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System connection) keyA list of connected devices will be displayedon the screen. Touch the “ ” key next tothe name to connect a device to theHands-Free Phone System. If the phone islisted as a favorite, a star will appear on theicon. Touch the key again to disconnect thedevice. The device will not be removedfrom the list. For additional information onremoving a device, refer to “ (info) key”in this section.

“ ” (Bluetooth® Audioconnection) keyA list of connected devices will be displayedon the screen. Touch the “ ” key next tothe name to connect a device toBluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as afavorite, a star will appear on the icon.Touch the key again to disconnect the de-vice. The device will not be removed fromthe list. For additional information on re-moving a device, refer to “ (info) key” inthis section.

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGESETTINGSBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set-tings can be changed according to the us-er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set-tings menu press the MENU button onthe control panel. Touch the “Settings” keythen touch the “Phone” key.

LHA4721


The following options are available:Menu Item Result

Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section.Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.

Phonebook Download Entire Phone-book

All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle aredownloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.

Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off.

Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off.Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages or cre-

ate a custom message.Edit Custom Text Create or edits a customized text message reply. To set a custom message, touch the “Add New” key. Select a

message from the recent text log. Touch the “OK” key to set the message or the “Select” key to choose a differ-ent message. Up to three custom messages can be set. To delete a message select the custom message andtouch the “Delete” key.

Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.

Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.


Volume & beepsThere are several methods to customizethe volume settings.Volume & BeepsThe Volume & Beeps screen can be foundby pressing the MENU button on thecontrol panel, touching the “Settings” keyon the screen and selecting “Volume &Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow-ing options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on thescreen.The available settings are:• Ringtone

Adjust the volume level of the ringtone ofincoming calls.

• Outgoing CallAdjust the volume level of the outgoingcalls.

• Voice Prompt Vol.Adjust the volume level of the systemvoice.

• Text-to-speech Vol.Adjust the volume of the replay voice fortext messaging.

• Button BeepsTurns on/off the button beep sounds andalarm for prohibited operations.

Volume SettingsThe Volume settings screen can be foundby pressing the button on the controlpanel then touching the “Volume” key onthe screen. To adjust the volume of thefollowing options, touch the “–” and “+” keyson the screen.The available settings are:• Ringtone

Adjust the volume level of the ringtone ofincoming calls.

• Outgoing CallAdjust the volume level of the outgoingcalls.

WARNING

• Use a phone after stopping your ve-hicle in a safe location. If you have touse a phone while driving, exerciseextreme caution at all times so fullattention may be given to vehicleoperation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-tery, use a phone after starting theengine.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)


Your NISSAN is equipped with theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Ifyou have a compatible Bluetooth® enabledcellular phone, you can set up the wirelessconnection between your cellular phoneand the in-vehicle phone module. WithBluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephonecall with your cellular phone in the vehicle.Once your cellular phone is connected tothe in-vehicle phone module, no otherphone connecting procedure is required.Your phone is automatically connectedwith the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition with the connected cellular phoneturned on and carried in the vehicle.You can register up to five differentBluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you cantalk on only one cellular phone at a time.NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-ports the phone commands, so dialing aphone number using your voice is possible.For additional information, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition System” in this section.Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System, refer to the following notes.• Set up the wireless connection between

a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-freephone system.

• Some Bluetooth® enabled cellularphones may not be recognized by thein-vehicle phone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and connecting in-structions.

• You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

LHA3144


– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground park-ing garage, near a tall building or in amountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to preventit from being dialed.

• When the radio wave condition is notideal or ambient sound is too loud, it maybe difficult to hear the other person'svoice during a call.

• Immediately after the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position, it may be im-possible to receive a call for a short periodof time.

• Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away fromthe in-vehicle phone module to preventtone quality degradation and wirelessconnection disruption.

• While a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth® wireless connec-tion, the battery power of the cellularphone may discharge quicker than usual.The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem cannot charge cellular phones.

• If the hands-free phone system seems tobe malfunctioning, refer to “Trouble-shooting guide” in this section. You canalso visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetoothor www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

• Some cellular phones or other devicesmay cause interference or a buzzingnoise to come from the audio systemspeakers. Storing the device in a differentlocation may reduce or eliminate thenoise.

• Refer to the cellular phone owner'smanual regarding the telephonecharges, cellular phone antenna andbody, etc.

• The signal strength display on the moni-tor will not coincide with the signalstrength display of some cellular phones.

REGULATORY INFORMATIONFCC Regulatory information– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use onlythe supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-tenna, modification, or attachmentscould damage the transmitter and mayviolate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1.1) This device may not cause interfer-

ence and2.2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

IC Regulatory information– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets allrequirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regu-lations.

BLUETOOTH® is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. andlicensed to Bosch.


VOICE COMMANDSYou can use voice commands to operatevarious Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem features using the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition system. For additional informa-tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice RecognitionSystem” in this section.

Voice Prompt InterruptWhile using the Voice Recognition system,the system voice can be interrupted to al-low the user to speak commands. Whilethe system is speaking, press thebutton on the steering wheel. The systemvoice will stop and a tone will be heard.After the tone, speak desired command(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call (if so equipped)To use the system faster, you may speakthe second level commands with the mainmenu command on the main menu. Forexample, press the button and afterthe tone say, “Call Redial”.

CONNECTING PROCEDURENOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-formed when the vehicle is stationary. Ifthe vehicle starts moving during the pro-cedure, the procedure will be canceled.1. Press the [ ] button on the control

panel.



4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. Initiate the connecting process from thehandset. The system will display the mes-sage: “Confirm on your Bluetooth devicethat the PIN XXXXXX is displayed”. If the PINis displayed on your Bluetooth® device, se-lect “Pair” to complete the pairing process.

For additional information, refer to theBluetooth® device's owner's manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOKTo access the vehicle phonebook:1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the dis-played list.

4. The number of the entry will be dis-played on the screen. Touch the numberto initiate dialing.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touchthe “A-Z” key in the upper right corner ofthe screen. Turn the TUNE knob tochoose a letter or number and thenpress the ENTER/AUDIO button. The listwill move to the first entry that beginswith that number or letter.

LHA2773


MAKING A CALLTo make a call, follow the procedure below:1. Press the button on the control

panel. The “Phone” screen will appear onthe display.

2. Select one of the following options tomake a call:

• “Phonebook”: Select the name from anentry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

• “Call Lists”: Select the name from the in-coming, outgoing or missed.

• “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call fromthe vehicle.

• “ ”: Input the phone number manuallyusing a keypad displayed on the screen.For additional information, refer to “Howto use the touch-screen” in this section.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen a call is placed to the connectedphone, the display will change to phonemode.To accept the incoming call, either:• Press the button on the steering

wheel, or• Touch the icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call, either:• Press the button on the steering

wheel, or• Touch the icon on the screen.

DURING A CALLWhile a call is active, the following optionsare available on the screen:• “Handset”

Select this option to switch control of thephone call over to the handset.

• “Mute Mic.”Select this option to mute the micro-phone. Select again to unmute the mi-crophone.

• Phone iconSelect to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALLTo end a phone call, select the phoneicon on the screen or press the buttonon the steering wheel.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)WARNING

• Laws in some jurisdictions may re-strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.Check local regulations before usingthis feature.

• Laws in some jurisdictions may re-strict the use of some of the applica-tions and features, such as socialnetworking and texting. Check localregulations for any requirements.

• Use the text messaging feature afterstopping your vehicle in a safe loca-tion. If you have to use the featurewhile driving, exercise extreme cau-tion at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while usingthe text messaging feature, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopyour vehicle.


NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled ifthe connected device does not supportthe Message Access Profile (MAP). Foradditional information, refer to thephone’s owner’s manual for details andinstructions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-mission to enable text messaging. Checkthe phone’s screen during Bluetooth®pairing. For some phones, you may needto enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’sBluetooth® menu for text messages toappear on the headunit. For additionalinformation, refer to your phone’s own-er’s manual. Text message integrationrequires that the phone support MAP(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-ing and sending text messages. Somephones may not support all text mes-saging features. For additional informa-tion, please refer towww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-ibility information, as well as your de-vice’s owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-ceiving of text messages through the ve-hicle interface.Sending a text message:1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of availablecommands in order to determine therecipient of the text message. Choosefrom the following:• To (a name)• Enter Number• Missed Calls• Incoming Calls• Outgoing Calls

For additional information about these op-tions, refer to “Voice commands” in thissection.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the systemprompts for which message to send.Nine predefined messages are availableas well as three custom messages. Tochoose one of the predefined mes-sages, speak one of the following afterthe tone:• “Driving, can't text”• “Call me”• “On my way”• “Running late”• “Okay”• “Yes”• “No”• “Where are you?”• “When?”• “Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages, say“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-tom message is stored, the system willprompt for the number of the desired cus-tom message. For additional informationon setting and managing custom textmessages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” inthis section.


Reading a received text message:1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.The text message, sender and deliverytime are shown on the screen. Use the

buttons to scroll through all text mes-sages if more than one are available. Pressthe button to exit the text messagescreen. Press the button to accessthe following options for replying to the textmessage:• Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender ofthe text message using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System.

• Send TextSpeak this command to send a text mes-sage response to the sender of the textmessage.

• Read TextSpeak this command to read the textmessage again.

• Previous TextSpeak this command to move to the pre-vious text message (if available).

• Next TextSpeak this command to move to the nexttext message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,it can also be used to create custom mes-sages that are sent through the phone. Foradditional information, refer to “Siri® EyesFree (models with Navigation System)” inthis section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if thevehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages canonly be sent through Siri.


BLUETOOTH® SETTINGSTo access the phone settings:1. Press the [ ] button.



Menu Item ResultPhone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Bluetooth Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

LHA2844


PHONE SETTINGSTo access the phone settings:1. Press the [ ] button.



4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and ad-just the following settings as desired:

• Start Siri® by:Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to sethow Siri® is operated on the steeringwheel.

• Sort Phonebook By:Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” tochoose how phonebook entries are al-phabetically displayed on the screen.

• Use Phonebook From:Touch “Handset” to use the phone'sphonebook. Touch “SIM” to use thephonebook on the SIM card. Select “Both”to use both sources.

• Download Phonebook Now:Touch to download the phonebook tothe vehicle from the chosen source.

• Record Name for Phonebook Entry:Touch to record a name for a phonebookentry for use with the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition System.

• Phone Notifications for:Notifications may be displayed on thecenter display screen.

• Text Messaging (if so equipped):Touch to toggle the text message func-tionality on or off.

• Show Incoming Text for:Text notifications may be displayed onthe center display screen. Touch “Off ” toturn off all text notifications.

• Auto Reply:Touch to toggle the auto reply functional-ity on or off.

• Auto Reply Message:Touch to indicate preferred message tobe sent when “Auto Reply” function is ac-tivated.

• Use Vehicle's Signature:Touch to toggle on or off the addition ofthe vehicle signature to outgoing mes-sages.

• Custom Text Messages:Touch this option to select a custommessage to edit. There are 4 customermessage slots available.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to allvoice commands without difficulty. If prob-lems are encountered, try the following so-lutions.Where the solutions are listed by number,try each solution in turn, starting with num-ber 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys-tem” in this section.2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level inthe vehicle.4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry fromthe phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additionalinformation, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.


The NISSAN Voice Recognition System al-lows hands-free operation of the systemsequipped on this vehicle, such as thephone and navigation systems.To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,press the button located on thesteering wheel. When prompted, speak thecommand for the system you wish to acti-vate. The command given is picked up bythe microphone and performed when it isproperly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recog-nition will provide a voice response as wellas a message in the center display to in-form you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When com-pleted, the system is ready to accept voicecommands. If the button is pressedbefore the initialization completes, the sys-tem will announce: “Voice Recognition Sys-tem not ready. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say acategory like phone or a command likepoints of interest followed by a brandname”. A list of available commands isthen spoken by the system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face iconon the display changes, speak a com-mand. Available commands are dis-cussed in this section.

4. Voice and display feedback are providedwhen the command is accepted.

• If the command is not recognized, thesystem announces: “Command not rec-ognized”. Repeat the command in a clearvoice.

• If you want to cancel the command or goback to the previous menu of com-mands, press the button. The sys-tem will announce: “Canceling Voice Rec-ognition” or “Go back” depending on thecurrent menu level.

• If you want to adjust the volume of thevoice feedback, use the volume controlswitches on the steering wheel or thevolume knob on the control panel.

• The voice command screen can also beaccessed using the control panel display:

1.1) Press the [ ] button.2.2) Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

LHA2589

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


Operating tipsTo get the best performance out of NISSANVoice Recognition, observe the following:• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminatethe surrounding noises (traffic noises, vi-bration sounds, etc.), which may preventthe system from recognizing the voicecommands correctly.

• Wait until a tone sounds before speakinga command. Otherwise, the commandwill not be received properly.

• Start speaking a command within 3.5seconds after the tone sounds.

• Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words. SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate thefollowing systems:• Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System• Navigation• Audio• Information• My Apps• HelpFor additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbersNISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-tain way to speak numbers in voice com-mands. Refer to the following examples.General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can beused for “0”.Phone numbersSpeak phone numbers according to thefollowing example. For 1-800-662-6200, saydial number and then speak the phonenumber in any of the following formats:• “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”• “one eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”• “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”For the best voice recognition phone dial-ing results, say phone numbers as singledigits. Also, full numbers can only be spo-ken for “800”. For example, you cannot say555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.

LHA4373


BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREEPHONE SYSTEM VOICECOMMANDSTo access the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System voice commands:1. Press the button.2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle

phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise,say “Phone” to access various phonecommands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off ”, thesystem announces: “Bluetooth® is off.Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”If no phone is connected to the system andthe vehicle is stationary, the system an-nounces: “There is no phone connected.Would you like to connect a phone now?”Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All furtherBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemvoice commands are only available if aphone is connected.If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® isset to “On”, the following voice commandsare available:• Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact in whichyou are trying to call. System will confirmcorrect contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.

• Dial NumberAllows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.After the number is entered, say “Dial” toinitiate dialing. Say “Correction” to cor-rect the number entered. Say “Go Back”to return to the main menu.

• List PhonebookStarting with the first alphabetical entryin the vehicle phonebook, the systemprompts for an additional command.Say “Dial” to call the number of thephonebook entry. Say “Send Text” tosend a text message to the number ofthe phonebook entry. Say “Next Entry” toskip to the next alphabetical entry in thevehicle phonebook, where the same op-tions will then be available.

• Recent CallsThe system prompts for an additionalcommand. Say “Missed Calls”, “IncomingCalls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display a listof such calls on the screen.Speak the number of the entry displayedon the screen to dial that number or say“Next Page” to view entries on the nextpage (if available).

• RedialRedials the last called number.

• Read TextReads an incoming text message.

• Send TextSends a text message.

• Select PhoneThe system replies “Please use manualcontrols to continue”. Use manual con-trols to change the active phone fromamong the listed phones connected tothe vehicle.

• Siri (if so equipped)The system replies “starting Siri”. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Siri® EyesFree (models with Navigation System)” inthis section.

For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwith Navigation System” in this section.


NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECOMMANDSThe following voice commands are avail-able for the navigation system:• Street Address (address)• Points of Interest (name)• POI by Category• Home• Address Book• Previous Destinations• Enter Address in Steps• Cancel RouteFor additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDSTo access the audio system voice com-mands:1. Press the button.

2. Say “Audio”

3. Speak a command from the followingavailable commands:

• Play (AM, FM, etc.)Allows user to select radio band

• Tune AM (number)Allows user to tune directly to a desiredAM frequency

• Tune FM (number)Allows user to tune directly to a desiredFM frequency

• SXM channel (number)Allows user to tune directly to a desiredSXM station (if so equipped)

• CD Track (number)Allows user to select track to be played

• Play Song (name)Allows user to select song name to beplayed

• Play Artist (name)Allows user to select artist to be played

• Play Album (name)Allows user to select album name to beplayed

For additional information, refer to “Audiosystem” in this section.

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDSThe following voice commands are avail-able for the information functions of thenavigation system:• Traffic• Fuel Prices• Stocks• Movie Listings• Current Weather• Weather Map• 5 — day Forecast• 6 — hour ForecastFor additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDSMany Apps can be accessed using thisvoice command. For additional informa-tion, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile Apps”in this section.


HELP VOICE COMMANDSThe following voice commands can bespoken to have the system provide in-structions and tips for using the NISSANVoice Recognition System.• List Commands• What Can I Say?• General Help• Go Back• Quit• Exit

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to allvoice commands without difficulty. If prob-lems are encountered, follow the solutionsgiven in this guide for the appropriate error.Where the solutions are listed by number,try each solution in turn, starting with num-ber one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system responds “CommandNot Recognized” or the system failsto recognize the command cor-rectly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.


“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and“Made for iPad” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed to connectspecifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respec-tively, and has been certified by the devel-oper to meet Apple performance stan-dards. Apple is not responsible for theoperation of this device or its compliancewith safety and regulatory standards.Please note that the use of this accessorywith iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wire-less performance.iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPodshuffle and iPod touch are trademarks ofApple Inc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries. Lightning is a trademark ofApple Inc.

iPod®/IPHONE®


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . .5-11Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12NISSAN Intelligent Key® batterydischarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Automatic transmission (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Using 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . 5-34Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . 5-37Hill start assist system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-38Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-39Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-41

WARNING


• Properly secure all cargo with ropesor straps to help prevent it from slid-ing or shifting. Do not place cargohigher than the seatbacks. In a sud-den stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

• Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless car-bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide isdangerous. It can cause uncon-sciousness or death.

• If you suspect that exhaust fumesare entering the vehicle, drive with allwindows fully open, and have the ve-hicle inspected immediately.

• Do not run the engine in closedspaces such as a garage.

• Do not park the vehicle with the en-gine running for any extended lengthof time.

• Keep the rear vent windows, lift-gates, doors and trunk lids (if soequipped) closed while driving, oth-erwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with one ofthese open, follow these precau-tions:1. Open all the windows.2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dialto high to circulate the air.

• If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the liftgate or thebody, follow the manufacturer's rec-ommendation to prevent carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle.

• The exhaust system and body shouldbe inspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:a. The vehicle is raised for service.b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involv-ing damage to the exhaust sys-tem, underbody, or rear of thevehicle.

• If a special body, camper, or otherequipment is added for recreationalor other usage, follow the manufac-turer's recommendation to preventcarbon monoxide entry into the ve-hicle. Do not occupy these areaswhile the engine is running even ifthe vehicle is parked. Some recre-ational vehicle appliances such asstoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc.may also generate carbon monoxide.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

THREE-WAY CATALYSTThe three-way catalyst is an emission con-trol device installed in the exhaust system.Exhaust gases in the three-way catalystare burned at high temperatures to helpreduce pollutants.

WARNING

• The exhaust gas and the exhaustsystem are very hot. Keep people,animals or flammable materialsaway from the exhaust systemcomponents.

• Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

• Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriouslyreduce the three-way catalyst's abil-ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions are de-tected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing the three-way catalyst.

• Do not race the engine while warm-ing it up.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as pos-sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, and it isthe driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-rect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumi-nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction,

Starting and driving 5-3

the telltale will flash for approximately 1minute and then remain continuously illu-minated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunc-tion indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, includ-ing the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioning prop-erly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.Additional information:• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSdoes not monitor the tire pressure of thespare tire.

• The TPMS will activate only when the ve-hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example,a flat tire while driving).

• The low tire pressure warning light doesnot automatically turn off when the tirepressure of your tires are adjusted. Afterthe tires are inflated to the recom-mended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tirepressure gauge to check the tire pres-sure.

• The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warningmessage is displayed in the odometerwhen the low tire pressure warning lightis illuminated and low tire pressure is de-tected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warningmessage turns off when the low tire pres-sure warning light turns off. The low tirepressure warning light remains illumi-nated until the tires are inflated to therecommended COLD tire pressure. TheCHECK TIRE PRES warning message isdisplayed each time the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position as long as thelow tire pressure warning light remainsilluminated. For additional information,refer to “Check tire pressure warningmessage” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

• The CHECK TIRE PRES warning is not dis-played if the low tire pressure warninglight illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-function.

• The CHECK TIRE PRES warning appearseach time the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position as long as the low tirepressure warning light remains illumi-nated.

• Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s opera-tion and the outside temperature. Do notreduce the tire pressure after driving be-cause the tire pressure rises after driving.Low outside temperature can lower thetemperature of the air inside the tirewhich can cause a lower tire inflationpressure. This may cause the low tirepressure warning light to illuminate. If thewarning light illuminates, check the tirepressure for all four tires.

• The Tire and Loading Information label islocated in the driver's door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tirepressure warning light” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section and “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.


WARNING


• If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pulloff the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires andincrease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident andcould result in serious personal in-jury. Check the tire pressure for allfour tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light off. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible. For additionalinformation, refer to “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual for changing a flat tire.

• When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, when aspare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warninglight will flash for approximately 1minute. The light will remain on after1 minute. Have your tires replacedand/or TPMS system reset as soon aspossible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.


• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or anymetal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-dows. This may cause poor reception ofthe signals from the tire pressure sen-sors, and the TPMS will not functionproperly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-porarily interfere with the operation of theTPMS and cause the low tire pressurewarning light to illuminate.Some examples are:• Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.• If a transmitter set to similar frequencies

is being used in or near the vehicle.• If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or nearthe vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light mayilluminate in the following cases:• If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and

tire without TPMS.• If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.• If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.


FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate theequipment.For Canada:This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other types ofvehicles.They have higher ground clearance thanpassenger cars to make them capable ofperforming in a variety of on-pavementand off-road applications. This gives thema higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-hicles. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allow-ing you to anticipate problems. However,they are not designed for cornering at thesame speeds as conventional 2-WheelDrive vehicles any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to perform satis-factorily under off-road conditions. If at allpossible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result inloss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll-over crash, an unbelted person is signifi-cantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.For additional information, refer to “Drivingsafety precautions” in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in lossof control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or suddensteering maneuvers, because these drivingpractices could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle.As with any vehicle, loss of control couldresult in a collision with other vehicles orobjects or cause the vehicle to roll over,particularly if the loss of control causesthe vehicle to slide sideways.Be attentive at all times, and avoid drivingwhen tired. Never drive when under the in-fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs whichmay cause drowsiness). Always wear yourseat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual, and also in-struct your passengers to do so.


Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,an unbelted person is significantly morelikely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt..

OFF-ROAD RECOVERYWhile driving, the right side or left sidewheels may unintentionally leave the roadsurface. If this occurs, maintain control ofthe vehicle by following the procedure be-low. Please note that this procedure is onlya general guide. The vehicle must be drivenas appropriate based on the conditions ofthe vehicle, road and traffic.1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-celerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer thevehicle to follow the road while vehiclespeed is reduced. Do not attempt todrive the vehicle back onto the road sur-face until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turnthe steering wheel until both tires returnto the road surface. When all tires are onthe road surface, steer the vehicle tostay in the appropriate driving lane.• If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road surface basedon vehicle, road or traffic conditions,gradually slow the vehicle to a stop ina safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSRapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” canoccur if the tire is punctured or is damageddue to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid airpressure loss can also be caused by drivingon under-inflated tires.Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-dling and stability of the vehicle, especiallyat highway speeds.Help prevent rapid air pressure loss bymaintaining the correct air pressure andvisually inspecting the tires for wear anddamage. For additional information, referto “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly losesair pressure or “blows-out” while driving,maintain control of the vehicle by followingthe procedure below. Please note that thisprocedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road andtraffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pres-sure. Losing control of the vehicle maycause a collision and result in personalinjury.• The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.• Do not rapidly apply the brakes.• Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.• Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-celerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.


4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo-cation off the road and away from trafficif possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andcontact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Changing a flat tire” inthe “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-stream reduces coordination, delaysreaction time and impairs judgement.Driving after drinking alcohol increasesthe likelihood of being involved in anaccident injuring yourself and others.Additionally, if you are injured in an ac-cident, alcohol can increase the sever-ity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-ever, you must choose not to drive underthe influence of alcohol. Every year thou-sands of people are injured or killed inalcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-cal laws vary on what is considered to belegally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and mostpeople underestimate the effects of alco-hol.Remember, drinking and driving don't mix!That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don'tdrive if your ability to operate your vehicle isimpaired by alcohol, drugs, or some otherphysical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONSYour NISSAN is designed for both normaland off-road use. However, avoid driving indeep water or mud as your NISSAN ismainly designed for leisure use, unlike aconventional off-road vehicle.Remember that 2-Wheel Drive models areless capable than 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)models for rough road driving and extrica-tion when stuck in deep snow or mud, orthe like.

Please observe the following precautions:WARNING

• Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

• Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up orstraight down the slopes. Off-roadvehicles can tip over sideways muchmore easily than they can forward orbackward.

• Many hills are too steep for any ve-hicle. If you drive up them, you maystall. If you drive down them, you maynot be able to control your speed. Ifyou drive across them, you may rollover.

• Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

• Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could causean accident.


• If your engine stalls or you cannotmake it to the top of a steep hill,never attempt to turn around. Yourvehicle could tip or roll over. Alwaysback straight down in R (Reverse)gear. Never back down in N (Neutral),using only the brake, as this couldcause loss of control.

• Heavy braking going down a hillcould cause your brakes to overheatand fade, resulting in loss of controland an accident. Apply brakes lightlyand use a low gear to control yourspeed. Use the hill descent controlfeature (if so equipped).

• Unsecured cargo can be thrownaround when driving over rough ter-rain. Properly secure all cargo so itwill not be thrown forward and causeinjury to you or your passengers.

• To avoid raising the center of gravityexcessively, do not exceed the ratedcapacity of the roof rack (if soequipped) and evenly distribute theload. Secure heavy loads in the cargoarea as far forward and as low aspossible. Do not equip the vehiclewith tires larger than specified in thismanual. This could cause your ve-hicle to roll over.

• Do not grip the inside or spokes ofthe steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could movesuddenly and injure your hands. In-stead drive with your fingers andthumbs on the outside of the rim.

• Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengershave their seat belts fastened.

• Always drive with the floor mats inplace as the floor may become hot.

• Lower your speed when encounter-ing strong crosswinds. With a highercenter of gravity, your NISSAN is moreaffected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

• Do not drive beyond the perfor-mance capability of the tires, evenwith 4WD engaged (if so equipped).

• For 4WD equipped vehicles, do notattempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could resultin serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

• Do not attempt to test a 4WDequipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-mometer (such as the dynamom-eters used by some states for emis-sions testing), or similar equipmenteven if the other two wheels areraised off the ground. Make sure youinform test facility personnel thatyour vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamom-eter. Using the wrong test equipmentmay result in drivetrain damage orunexpected vehicle movementwhich could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

• Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

• If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at highspeeds. Your NISSAN 4WD vehicle hasa higher center of gravity than a pas-senger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as passenger cars. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly couldresult in loss of control and/or a roll-over accident.


• Always use tires of the same type,size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), and tread patternon all four wheels. Install tire chainson the rear wheels when driving onslippery roads and drive carefully.

• Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water.For additional information, refer to“Wet brakes” in this section.

• Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle andit rolls forward, backward or side-ways, you could be injured.

• Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent mainte-nance may be required. For addi-tional information, refer to “Mainte-nance under severe operatingconditions” in the “Maintenance andschedules” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button igni-tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-cept in an emergency. (The engine willstop when the ignition switch is pushedthree consecutive times in quick suc-cession or the ignition switch is pushedand held for more than 2 seconds.) Ifthe engine stops while the vehicle isbeing driven, this could lead to a crashand serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed withoutdepressing the brake pedal, the ignitionswitch position will illuminate as follows:Push center:• Once to change to ACC.• Two times to change to ON.• Three times to return to OFF.The ignition switch will automatically re-turn to the LOCK position when any door iseither opened or closed with the switch inthe OFF position.The shift lever can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the brake pedal isdepressed.If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the ignition switch cannot be movedfrom the LOCK position.Some indicators and warnings for opera-tion are displayed in the meter. For addi-tional information, refer to “Warning lights,indicator lights and audible reminders” inthe “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

LSD3828

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


OPERATING RANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only beused when the Intelligent Key is within thespecified operating range.When the Intelligent Key battery is almostdischarged or strong radio waves are pres-ent near the operating location, the Intelli-gent Key system’s operating range becomesnarrower and may not function properly.If the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even some-one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,to push the ignition switch to start the en-gine.

The operating range of the engine startfunction is inside of the vehicle O1 .• The luggage area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Keymay function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in-strument panel or inside the glove box,storage bin or door pocket, the IntelligentKey may not function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed near thedoor or window outside the vehicle, theIntelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONSLOCK (Normal parking position)The ignition switch can only be locked inthis position.The ignition switch will be unlocked when itis pushed to the ON position while carryingthe Intelligent Key.The ignition switch will lock when any dooris opened or closed with the ignitionswitched off.

ON (Normal operating position)This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.ON has a battery saver feature that will turnthe ignition switch to the OFF position, if thevehicle is not running, after some time un-der the following conditions:• All doors are closed.• The shift lever is in P (Park).The battery saver feature will be canceled ifany of the following occur:• Any door is opened.• The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position.• The ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-tion switch in the AUTO ACC or ON posi-tion when the engine is not running foran extended period. This can dischargethe battery.

OFFThe ignition switch is in the OFF positionwhen the engine is turned off using theignition switch. No lights will illuminate onthe ignition switch.

LSD3854


AUTO ACC:With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, theIntelligent Key with you, and the ignitionswitch placed from the ON to the OFF po-sition, the radio can still be used for a periodof time, or until the driver’s door is opened.After a period of time, functions such asradio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System may be restarted bypressing the “ON-OFF button/VOLUMEcontrol knob” or the key fob unlock button.For additional information, refer to “Monitor,climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-tion systems” in this manual.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFFTo shut off the engine in an emergencysituation while driving, perform the follow-ing procedure:• Rapidly push the ignition switch three

consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-onds, or

• Push and hold the ignition switch formore than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®BATTERY DISCHARGEIf the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®is discharged or environmental conditionsinterfere with the Intelligent Key operation,start the engine according to the followingprocedure:1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime willsound.)After step 3 is performed, when the igni-tion switch is pushed without depress-ing the brake pedal, the ignition switchposition will change to the ACC position.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress-ing the brake pedal within 10 secondsafter the chime sounds. The engine willstart.

NOTE:• When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine isstarted by the above procedure, the In-telligent Key battery discharge warn-ing light appears in the meter evenwhen the Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle. This is not a malfunction. Toturn off the Intelligent Key battery dis-charge warning light, touch the igni-tion switch with the Intelligent Keyagain.

• If the Intelligent Key battery dischargewarning light appears, replace the bat-tery as soon as possible. For additionalinformation, refer to “Battery replace-ment” in the “Do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

SSD0860


NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered key.If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the de-vice (which may have caused the inter-ference) separate from the registeredkey.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.

• Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

• Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake, and windshield-washer fluidas frequently as possible, or at leastwhenever you refuel.

• Check that all windows and lights areclean.

• Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

• Check that all doors are closed.• Position seat and adjust head restraints/

headrests.• Adjust inside and outside mirrors.• Fasten the seat belt and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in theON position. For additional information,refer to “Warning lights, indicator lightsand audible reminders” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of thismanual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-tral). P (Park) is recommended.The starter is designed not to operateunless the shift lever is in either P(Park) or N (Neutral).

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion. Depress the brake pedal and pushthe ignition switch to start the engine.To start the engine immediately, pushand release the ignition switch while de-pressing the brake pedal with the igni-tion switch in any position.• If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the acceleratorpedal a little (approximately 1/3 to thefloor) and while holding, crank the en-gine. Release the accelerator pedalwhen the engine starts.

• If the engine is very hard to start be-cause it is flooded, depress the accel-erator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it. Push the ignition switch tothe ON position to start cranking theengine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stopcranking by pushing the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position. After

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE


cranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine withyour foot off the accelerator pedal bydepressing the brake pedal and push-ing the ignition switch to start the en-gine. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start, push the ignition switchto the OFF position and wait 10 secondsbefore cranking again, otherwise thestarter could be damaged.

4. Warm-upAllow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Do not race theengine while warming it up. Drive at amoderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather. In coldweather, keep the engine running for aminimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shut-ting it off. Starting and stopping the en-gine over a short period of time maymake the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift leverto the P (Park) position and push theignition switch to the OFF position.

In preparation for the next engine start, theengine may have a slightly delayed shutoffafter placing the ignition switch in the OFFposition, depending on the driving condi-tions.

NOTE:Care should be taken to avoid situa-tions that can lead to potential bat-tery discharge and potential no-startconditions such as:1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularlyand/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)WARNING

• Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shiftingis completed. Failure to do so couldcause you to lose control and have anaccident.

• Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forwardor reverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle isreversing. This could cause an acci-dent or damage the transmission.

• Do not downshift abruptly on slip-pery roads. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

• Except in an emergency, do not shiftto the N (Neutral) position while driv-ing. Coasting with the transmissionin the N (Neutral) position may causeserious damage to the transmission.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


CAUTION

• To avoid possible damage to your ve-hicle, when stopping the vehicle onan uphill grade, do not hold the ve-hicle by depressing the acceleratorpedal. The foot brake should be usedfor this purpose.

The A/T in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power andsmooth operation.The recommended operating proceduresfor this transmission are shown on the fol-lowing pages. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance and driv-ing enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving theshift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand move the shift lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then graduallystart the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designedso the foot brake pedal MUST be de-pressed before shifting from P (Park) toany drive position while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.The shift lever cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignitionswitch is placed in the LOCK or OFF posi-tion.The shift lever may not be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, butthe engine is not running and the out-side temperature is extremely low. Shifting

To move the shift lever:Press the button OA while depressing

the brake pedalPress the button OA to shiftShift without depressing the brake

pedal

LSD3853


ShiftingAfter starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and move the shift lever out ofthe P (Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift le-ver is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unexpect-edly or roll away and result in seriouspersonal injury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition for any reason while the vehicle isin N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, theignition switch cannot be placed in theLOCK position. Move the shift lever to the P(Park) position, then the ignition switch canbe placed in the LOCK position.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, usethe P (Park) position only when the ve-hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position whenthe vehicle is parked or when starting theengine. Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift lever from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park).The P (Park) position is automatically en-gaged if you switch off the ignition.Apply the parking brake. When parking on ahill, apply the parking brake first, then movethe shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, usethe R (Reverse) position only when thevehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped be-fore selecting the R (Reverse) position. Thebrake pedal must be depressed to movethe shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) orany drive position to R (Reverse).N (Neutral)Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.The engine can be started in this position.You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart astalled engine while the vehicle is moving.D (Drive)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.


Manual shift modeMove the shift lever sideways toward themanual shift gate to activate the manualshift mode, then select “+” or “-” to shift up ordown. Shift ranges can be selected manu-ally.In the manual shift mode, the shift range isdisplayed on the position indicator in themeter. After moving the shift lever to themanual shift gate, the position indicatorvaries depending on the gear position andvehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔M8 ↔ M9 ↔ DM9 (Ninth)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔M8 ↔ M9M9 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M8 (Eighth)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔M8M8 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M7 (Seventh)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7M7 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.

M6 (Sixth)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6M6 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meterM5 (Fifth)For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5M5 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M4 (Fourth)Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4M4 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.

LSD3855


M3 (Third)Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3M3 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M2 (Second)Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2M2 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M1 (First)Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-ing on steep downhill grades.M1 will be displayed on the position indica-tor on the meter.

• Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower thanM4 range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting upMove the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shiftsto higher range.)When shifting downMove the shift lever to the − (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)• The transmission will automatically

downshift the gears. (For example, if youselect the 3rd range, the transmission willshift down between the 3rd and 1stgears.)

• Moving the shift lever rapidly to the sameside twice will shift the ranges in succes-sion.

When canceling the manual shift modeReturn the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi-tion to return the transmission to the nor-mal driving mode.

• In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission may not shift to the selectedgear immediately because of vehiclespeed. The transmission will upshift ordownshift when vehicle speedmatches the programmed transmis-sion shift points. This helps maintaindriving performance and reduces thechance of vehicle damage or loss ofcontrol.

• In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission will not upshift to a highergear than is manually selected. Whenthe vehicle speed decreases, the trans-mission automatically shifts down andshifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

Accelerator downshift— in D (Drive) position —For passing or hill climbing, depress theaccelerator pedal to the floor. This shiftsthe transmission down into a lower gear,depending on the vehicle speed.


WARNING

• Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead toan accident.

• Do not release the parking brakefrom outside the vehicle.

• Do not use the shift lever in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fullyengaged.

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, do notleave children, people who requirethe assistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever upOA .To release:1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brakelever slightly, press the button OB andlower the lever completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-ing light goes out.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL1. ACCEL•RES switch

2. COAST•SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. ON•OFF switch• If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it cancels automatically. The SET indica-tor light in the instrument panel thenblinks to warn the driver.

LSD2755 LSD2753

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL


• If the SET indicator light blinks, turn theON•OFF switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

• The SET indicator light may blink whenthe ON•OFF switch is turned on whilepushing the ACCEL•RES, COAST•SET, orCANCEL switch (located on the steeringwheel). To properly set the cruise controlsystem, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-ing under the following conditions:• When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.• In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.• On winding or hilly roads.• On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.).• In very windy areas.Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-out keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.To turn on the cruise control, push theON•OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator lightin the instrument panel comes on.To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-hicle to the desired speed, push the COAST-•SET switch and release it. The SET indica-tor light in the instrument panel comes on.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle maintains the set speed.• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-ously set speed.

• The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steep hills.If this happens, drive without the cruisecontrol.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods:• Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indica-

tor light in the instrument panel goes out.• Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator

light goes out.

• Turn the ON•OFF switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator light and SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically can-celed and the SET indicator light in the in-strument panel goes out if:• The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph

(13 km/h) below the set speed.• Move the shift lever to N (Neutral).To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, pushand release the COAST•SET switch.

• Push and hold the ACCEL•RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

• Push and release the ACCEL•RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST•SET switch and release it.

• Push and hold the COAST•SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slowsto the desired speed.


• Push and release the COAST•SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push andrelease the ACCEL•RES switch. The vehiclereturns to the last set cruising speed whenthe vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to ob-tain maximum engine performanceand ensure the future reliability andeconomy of your new vehicle. Failure tofollow these recommendations mayresult in shortened engine life and re-duced engine performance.

• Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not runthe engine over 4,000 rpm.

• Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

• Avoid quick starts.• Avoid hard braking as much as possible.• Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle orother parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel EfficientDriving Tips to help you achieve the mostfuel economy from your vehicle.1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application• Avoid rapid starts and stops.• Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.• Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed• Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.• Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-ber of stops.

• Maintaining a steady speed can mini-mize red light stops and improve fuelefficiency.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS


3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at HigherVehicle Speeds• Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool thevehicle due to reduced engine load.

• Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is moreefficient to use A/C to cool the vehicledue to increased aerodynamic drag.

• Recirculating the cool air in the cabinwhen the A/C is on reduces coolingload.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds andDistances• Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where le-gally allowed) can improve fuel effi-ciency due to reduced aerodynamicdrag.

• Maintaining a safe following distancebehind other vehicles reduces unnec-essary braking.

• Safely monitoring traffic to anticipatechanges in speed permits reducedbraking and smooth accelerationchanges.

• Select a gear range suitable to roadconditions.

5. Use Cruise Control• Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady speed.• Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when drivingon flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route• Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling• Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30–60 seconds savesfuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads• Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruisingspeed through the toll and avoid stop-ping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up• Limit idling time to minimize impact to

fuel economy.• Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef-fectively circulate the engine oil beforedriving.

• Your vehicle will reach its ideal operat-ing temperature more quickly whiledriving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool• Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-sible.

• When entering a hot vehicle, openingthe windows will help to reduce theinside temperature faster, resulting inreduced demand on your A/C system.


• Keep your engine tuned up.• Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.• Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tirewear and lowers fuel economy.

• Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

• For vehicles equipped with , use 4Hor 4L position only when necessary.4-Wheel Drive operation lowers fueleconomy.

• Use the recommended viscosity engineoil. For additional information, refer to “En-gine oil and oil filter recommendations” inthe “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

WARNING

• For 4WD equipped vehicles, do notattempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could resultin serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

• Do not attempt to test a 4WDequipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-mometer (such as the dynamom-eters used by some states for emis-sions testing), or similar equipmenteven if the other two wheels areraised off the ground. Make sure youinform test facility personnel thatyour vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamom-eter. Using the wrong test equipmentmay result in drivetrain damage orunexpected vehicle movementwhich could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

CAUTION

• Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or4LO position on dry hard surfaceroads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in4H or 4LO may cause unnecessarynoise, tire wear and increased fuelconsumption.If the 4WD warning light turns onwhen you are driving on dry hard sur-face roads:– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2–Wheel Drive(2WD).

– In the 4LO position for automatictransmission vehicles, stop thevehicle and shift the shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position with thebrake pedal depressed and shiftthe 4WD shift switch to 2WD.


INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)(if so equipped)


TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCEDURESThe part-time 4WD system provides three positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the desired drive mode according to the drivingconditions.2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitch Position Wheels Driven

Indicator LightUse Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure4WD shift Transfer 4LO

position

2WDRear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads

(Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicatetransfer shift position engaged.Shifting between the 2WD and 4Hdrive modes can be done while driv-ing. The indicator will change whenthe drive mode is changed. Shiftingbetween the 2WD and 4H modesmust be performed at speed below100 km/h (60 mph).

4H4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-

covered roads

N (Neutral) *1May blink

N (Neutral) disengages the auto-matic transmission (A/T) mechanicalparking lock, which will allow the ve-hicle to roll. Do not leave the transfershift position in N (Neutral).*2The 4LO indicator blinks when shift-ing between 4H and 4LO

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Move the shift lever to the N (Neu-

tral) position with the brake pedaldepressed.

3. Depress and turn the 4WD shiftswitch to 4LO or 4H with thebrake pedal depressed.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT EN-GAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRSTSTOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSEDTHE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THESHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL) FORA/T VEHICLES. *3

4LO

4 wheels IlluminatedFor use when maximum power andtraction is required (for example, onsteep grades or rocky, sandy, muddyroads)


*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the transfer 4LO position indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedureis completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gearmay grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.1. Turn off the engine by placing the ignition switch in the OFF position.

2. Start the engine.- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position.4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to the desired mode.- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be in the ON position and the vehicle's engine must be running for a shift to take place and forthe indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when 4LOis selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.When the 4LO position is selected, the VDC system is disabled and the VDC off indicator light illuminates, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicatorlight” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is usedto select either 2WD or 4WD depending onthe driving conditions. There are threetypes of drive modes available, 2WD, 4H and4LO.The 4WD shift switch electronically controlsthe transfer case operation. Rotate theswitch to move between each mode, 2WD,4H and 4LO.To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicleMUST be stationary, move the shift leverto N (Neutral), and depress the brakepedal. The switch must be depressedand turned when changing into or out of4LO.

WARNING

• When parking, apply the parkingbrake before stopping the engineand make sure that the 4WD shift in-dicator light is on and the ATP warn-ing light goes off. Otherwise, the ve-hicle could unexpectedly move evenif the A/T is in the P (Park) position.

• The transfer 4LO position indicatorlight must stop blinking and remainilluminated or turn off before shiftingthe transmission into gear. If the shiftlever is shifted from the N (Neutral)position to any other gear when thetransfer 4LO position indicator lightis blinking, the vehicle may moveunexpectedly.

CAUTION

• Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

• The 4H position provides greatertraction. Avoid excessive speed, as itwill cause increased fuel consump-tion and higher oil temperatures, andcould damage drivetrain compo-nents. Speeds over 62 mph (100km/h) in 4H is not recommended.

• The 4LO position provides maximumpower and traction. Avoid raising ve-hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-mum speed is approximately 31 mph(50 km/h).

• When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switchwhen making a turn or reversing.

• Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD and 4H) while driving onsteep downhill grades. Use the en-gine brake and low gears 2 (Secondgear) or 1 (Low gear), for enginebraking.

• Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD and 4H) with the rearwheels spinning.

• Do not drive on dry hard surfaceroads in the 4H or 4LO position. Driv-ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise andtire wear. NISSAN recommends driv-ing in the 2WD position under theseconditions.

• The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at lowambient temperatures and thetransfer 4LO position indicator lightmay blink even when the 4WD shiftswitch is shifted. After driving for awhile you can change the 4WD trans-fer case between 4H and 4LO.


When driving on rough roads:• Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.• Drive carefully according to the road sur-

face conditions.When the vehicle is stuck:• Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.• Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differen-

tial (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turnthe switch ON while the vehicle is station-ary and apply the throttle to try to free thevehicle.

• If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock thevehicle back and forth between R (Re-verse) and D (Drive) gears.

• If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under the tires.Then try the recovery procedures above.Tire chains may be effective.

CAUTION

• Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

• Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations• Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending ondriving conditions.

• If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position while in the4H or 4LO position, you may feel a jolt.This is not abnormal.

• When the vehicle is stopped after mak-ing a turn, you may feel a slight joltafter the shift lever is moved to N (Neu-tral) or P (Park). This occurs because thetransfer clutch is released and not be-cause of a malfunction.

CAUTION

• When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H posi-tion. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn orreversing.

• Do not shift the 4WD shift switchwhile driving on steep downhillgrades. Use the engine brake and lowautomatic transmission gears (M1 orM2) for engine braking.

• Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

• Before placing the 4WD shift switchin the 4H position from 2WD, ensurethe vehicle speed is less than 62 mph(100 km/h). Failure to do so can dam-age the 4WD system.

• Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD0145


4WD shift indicator lightThe 4WD shift indicator light is located inthe odometer display.The light should turn off within 1 secondafter placing the ignition switch in the ONposition.While the engine is running, the 4WD shiftindicator light will illuminate the positionselected by the 4WD shift switch.• The 4WD shift indicator light may blink

while shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light willcome on.

• If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD shift indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-tion changes to 2WD when the 4WDshift switch is shifted to the 4H positionat low ambient temperatures, the 2WDmode may be being engaged due tomalfunctioning drive system. If the in-dicator does not return to normal andthe 4WD warning light comes on, havethe system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on orblinks when:

Comes on

There is a mal-function in the4–Wheel Drive

system

Blinks slowlyThe differencein wheel rota-

tion is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the me-ter.The 4WD warning light comes on when theignition switch is placed in the ON position.It turns off soon after the engine is started.If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD sys-tem when the ignition switch is ON, thewarning light will either remain illuminatedor blink.

LSD0147


If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.A large difference between the diametersof front and rear wheels will make thewarning light blink slowly (about once per 1second). Change the 4WD shift switch into2WD and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

• If the warning light comes on orblinks slowly during operation, haveyour vehicle checked as soon as pos-sible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warn-ing light turns on.

• When the warning light comes on,the 2WD mode may be engaged evenif the 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Beespecially careful when driving. Ifcorresponding parts are malfunc-tioning, the 4WD mode will not be en-gaged even if the 4WD shift switch isshifted.

• Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or4LO position on dry hard surfaceroads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in4H or 4LO may cause unnecessarynoise, tire wear and increased fuelconsumption.If the 4WD warning light turns onwhen you are driving on dry hard sur-face roads:– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.– In the 4LO position for automatic

transmission vehicles, stop thevehicle and shift the shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position with thebrake pedal depressed and shiftthe 4WD shift switch to 2WD.


• The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warn-ing light blinking.

The E-Lock system can provide additionaltraction and should only be used when avehicle has become or is becoming stuck.This system operates by electronically“locking” the two rear drive wheels to-gether, allowing them to turn at the samespeed. The system is used when it is notpossible to free a stuck vehicle even whenusing the 4LO position (4-Wheel Drive ve-hicles).When added traction is required, activatethe E-Lock system by pushing the switchON. For additional information, refer to“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual. Once thesystem fully engages, the indicator light inthe instrument panel will remain on. Whenthe system is activated, both rear wheelswill engage, providing added traction.The rear wheels may momentarily slip ormove to engage the system, and the sys-tem will only engage up to approximately 4mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, thesystem should be turned off and drivingresumed.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


The Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) system is dis-abled and the ABS light illuminates whenthe E-Lock system is on. Also, the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system is disabledand the indicator light illuminateswhen the E-Lock system is on.

WARNING

• Never leave the E-Lock system onwhen driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehiclemay result in the rear wheels slippingand result in an accident and per-sonal injury. After using the E-Locksystem to free the vehicle, turn thesystem off.

• Use the E-Lock system only whenfreeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LOposition before using the E-Lock sys-tem. Never use the E-Lock system ona slippery road surface such as snowor ice surface. Using the E-Lock sys-tem when driving in these road con-ditions may cause unexpectedmovement of the vehicle during en-gine braking, accelerating or turning,which may result in an accident andserious personal injury.

CAUTION

• After using the E-Lock system, turnthe switch OFF to prevent possibledamage to driveline componentsfrom extended use.

• Do not drive the vehicle at speedsfaster than 12 mph (20 km/h) whenthe system is engaged. Doing socould damage drivetraincomponents.

• Do not turn on the E-Lock systemwhile the tires are spinning. Doing socould damage drivetraincomponents.


WARNING

• Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

• Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

• Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.

• Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls ormake the vehicle move. Unattendedchildren could become involved inserious accidents.

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, do not leavechildren, people who require the assis-tance of others or pets unattended inyour vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough tocause a significant risk of injury ordeath to people and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels asillustrated.

• HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB OA :Turn the wheels into the curb and movethe vehicle forward until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

• HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB OB :Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

• HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURBOC :Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move away fromthe center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


The power assisted steering uses a hy-draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-sist steering.If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,you will still have control of the vehicle.However, much greater steering effort isneeded, especially in sharp turns and atlow speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will overheat the brakes,wear out the brake pads faster, and reducegas mileage.To help reduce brake wear and to preventthe brakes from overheating, reduce speedand downshift to a lower gear before goingdown a slope or long grade. Overheatedbrakes may reduce braking performanceand could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

• While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-celerating could cause the wheels toskid and result in an accident.

• If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the powerassist for the brakes will not work.Braking will be harder.

Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet. Asa result, your braking distance will be lon-ger and the vehicle may pull to one sideduring braking.To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brakepedal to heat up the brakes. Do this untilthe brakes return to normal. Avoid drivingthe vehicle at high speeds until the brakesfunction correctly.

Parking brake break-inBreak in the parking brake shoes wheneverthe stopping effect of the parking brake isweakened or whenever the parking brakeshoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,in order to assure the best braking perfor-mance.This procedure is described in the vehicleservice manual. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)WARNING

• The ABS is a sophisticated device, butit cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can help maintain ve-hicle control during braking on slip-pery surfaces. Remember that stop-ping distances on slippery surfaceswill be longer than on normal sur-faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or ifyou are using tire chains. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Ultimately, thedriver is responsible for safety.

• Tire type and condition may also af-fect braking effectiveness.– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size andtype as specified on the Tire andLoading Information label. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Tireand Loading Information label” inthe “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, referto “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheelsdo not lock during hard braking or whenbraking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheeland varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding.By preventing each wheel from locking, thesystem helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swervingand spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.Depress the brake pedal with firm steadypressure, but do not pump the brakes. TheAnti-lock Braking System will operate toprevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stopping dis-tances.

Self-test featureThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you startthe engine and move the vehicle at a lowspeed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noiseand/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.This is normal and does not indicate a mal-function. If the computer senses a mal-function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-nates the ABS warning light on theinstrument panel. The brake system thenoperates normally but without anti-lockassistance.If the ABS warning light illuminates duringthe self-test or while driving, have the ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.


Normal operationThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.When the ABS senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actuatorrapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-sure. This action is similar to pumping thebrakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-tion in the brake pedal and hear a noisefrom under the hood or feel a vibrationfrom the actuator when it is operating. Thisis normal and indicates that the ABS is op-erating properly. However, the pulsationmay indicate that road conditions are haz-ardous and extra care is required whiledriving.

• The ABLS system uses automatic brak-ing to transfer power from a slipping drivewheel to the wheel on the same axle withmore traction. The ABLS system appliesbraking to the slipping wheel, which helpsredirect power to the other wheel.

• On 4–Wheel Drive models the ABLS sys-tem operates in both 4H and 4LO modes.If 4WD mode is engaged, the ABLS sys-tem operates for both drive axles. On2–Wheel Drive vehicles, the ABLS systemoperates on the drive axle only.

• The ABLS system is always on. In someconditions, the system may automati-cally turn the ABLS system off. If the sys-tem is automatically turned off, normalbrake function will continue. ABLS willfunction even when the Vehicle DynamicControl system is turned off.

• The ABLS does not operate if both wheelson a drive axle are slipping.

WARNING

• The ABLS system helps provide in-creased traction, but will not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering op-eration or by careless driving or dan-gerous driving practices. Reduce ve-hicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slip-pery surfaces. Always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN approved for your vehicleor are extremely deteriorated, theABLS system may not operate prop-erly. This could adversely affect ve-hicle handling performance, and theslip indicator light may illuminate.

• If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the ABLS systemmay not operate properly and the slipindicator light may illuminate.

• If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the ABLSsystem may not operate properly andthe slip indicator light may illuminate.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)SYSTEM


The VDC system uses various sensors tomonitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.Under certain driving conditions, the VDCsystem helps to perform the followingfunctions:• Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so poweris transferred to a non-slipping drivewheel on the same axle.

• Controls brake pressure and engine out-put to reduce drive wheel slip based onvehicle speed (traction control function).

• If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOthe indicator light will come on andthe VDC system will be turned off. Foradditional information, refer to “Using4–Wheel Drive (4WD)” in this section.

• Controls brake pressure at individualwheels and engine output to help thedriver maintain control of the vehicle inthe following conditions:– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increasedsteering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver tomaintain control of the vehicle, but it can-not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, theindicator light in the instrument panelflashes so note the following:• The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is requiredto help keep the vehicle on the steeredpath.

• You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise or vibration fromunder the hood. This is normal and indi-cates that the VDC system is workingproperly.

• Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-dicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

indicator light will come on in the in-strument panel. The VDC system auto-matically turns off when these indicatorlights are off.The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off theVDC system. The indicator light illumi-nates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn offthe system, the VDC system still operatesto prevent one drive wheel from slipping bytransferring power to a non-slipping drivewheel. The indicator light flashes if thisoccurs. All other VDC functions are off andthe indicator light will not flash.The VDC system is automatically reset toon when the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position then back to the ON position.The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-ture that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle for-ward or in reverse at a slow speed. Whenthe self-test occurs, you may hear a clunknoise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and is not an indica-tion of a malfunction.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to helpthe driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speedand be especially careful when driv-ing and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deterio-rated, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly. This could adversely af-fect vehicle handling performance,and the indicator light may flashor the indicator light mayilluminate.

• If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-tem may not operate properly andboth the and indicatorlights may illuminate.

• If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, both theand indicator lights mayilluminate.

• When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

• When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

• If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones areused, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate.

• The VDC system is not a substitutefor winter tires or tire chains on asnow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTIONDuring braking while driving through turns,the system optimizes the distribution offorce to each of the four wheels dependingon the radius of the turn.

WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to helpthe driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speedand be especially careful when driv-ing and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deterio-rated, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly. This could adversely af-fect vehicle handling performance,and the indicator light may flashor the indicator light mayilluminate.


• If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-tem may not operate properly andboth the and the indicatorlights may illuminate.

• If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, both theand indicator lights mayilluminate.

• When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

• When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

• If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones areused, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate.

• The VDC system is not a substitutefor winter tires or tire chains on asnow covered road.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehiclespeed when driving on steep down-hill grades. Always drive carefully andattentively when using the hill de-scent control system and deceleratethe vehicle speed by depressing thebrake pedal if necessary. Be espe-cially careful when driving on frozen,muddy or extremely steep downhillroads. Failure to control vehiclespeed may result in a loss of controlof the vehicle and possible seriousinjury or death.

• The hill descent control may not con-trol the vehicle speed on a hill underall load or road conditions. Always beprepared to depress the brake pedalto control vehicle speed. Failure to doso may result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

The hill descent control system helpsmaintain vehicle speed when driving under15-21 mph (25-35 km/h) on steeper down-hill grades. Hill descent control is usefulwhen engine braking alone in 4H or 4L can-not control vehicle speed. Hill descent con-trol applies the vehicle brakes to control

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-centrate on steering while reducing theburden of brake and accelerator operation.• When additional braking is required on

steep downhill roads, activate the hill de-scent control system by pushing theswitch on. For additional information, re-fer to “Hill descent control switch” in the“Instruments and controls” section of thismanual.

• Once the system is activated, the indica-tor light will remain on in the instrumentpanel. For additional information, refer to“Hill descent control system ON indicatorlight” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-pressed while the hill descent control sys-tem is on, the system will stop operatingtemporarily. As soon as the accelerator orbrake pedal is released, the hill descentcontrol system begins to function again ifthe hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.For the best results, when descendingsteep downhill grades, the hill descent con-trol switch should be on and the shift leverin 2 (Second gear) or 1 (Low gear) for enginebraking.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill start as-sist system to prevent the vehiclefrom moving backward on a hill. Al-ways drive carefully and attentively.Depress the brake pedal when thevehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Beespecially careful when stopped on ahill on frozen or muddy roads. Failureto prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards may result in a loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and possibleserious injury or death.

• The hill start assist system is not de-signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-still on a hill. Depress the brake pedalwhen the vehicle is stopped on asteep hill. Failure to do so may causethe vehicle to roll backwards andmay result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

• The hill start assist may not preventthe vehicle from rolling backwardson a hill under all load or road condi-tions. Always be prepared to depressthe brake pedal to prevent the ve-hicle from rolling backwards. Failureto do so may result in a collision orserious personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hillstart assist system automatically keepsthe brakes applied. This helps prevents thevehicle from rolling backward in the time ittakes the driver to release the brake pedaland apply the accelerator.Hill start assist will operate automaticallyunder the following conditions:• The shift lever is moved to a forward or

reverse gear.• The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to rollback and hill start assist will stop operatingcompletely.Hill start assist will not operate when theshift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park)or on a flat and level road.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if soequipped)


WARNING

• Always turn and look back beforebacking up. The RSS is not a substi-tute for proper backing procedures.

• Read and understand the limitationsof the RSS as contained in this sec-tion. Inclement weather may affectthe function of the RSS; this may in-clude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

• This system is not designed to pre-vent contact with small or movingobjects.

• The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in detecting large station-ary objects to help avoid damagingthe vehicle. The system will not de-tect small objects below the bumper,and may not detect objects close tothe bumper or on the ground.

• If your vehicle sustains damage tothe rear bumper fascia, leaving itmisaligned or bent, the sensing zonemay be altered causing inaccuratemeasurement of obstacles or falsealarms.

The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver ofobstacles near the rear bumper when theshift lever is in R (Reverse). The system maynot detect objects at speeds above 3 mph(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu-lar or moving objects.The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft (1.8m) from the rear bumper with a decreasedcoverage area at the outer corners of thebumper (refer to the illustration for approxi-mate zone coverage areas). As you movecloser to the obstacle, the rate of the toneincreases. When the obstacle is less than 10in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound con-tinuously. If the RSS detects a stationary orreceding object further than 10 in (25.0 cm)from the side of the vehicle, the tone will

sound for only 3 seconds. Once the systemdetects an object approaching, the tonewill sound again.The RSS automatically turns on when theshift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and theignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on theinstrument panel allows the driver to turnthe RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, theignition must be on, and the shift lever in R(Reverse). An indicator light on the switchwill illuminate when the system is turnedoff. If the indicator light illuminates whenthe RSS is not turned off, it may indicate amalfunction in the RSS.Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rearbumper fascia) free from snow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt (do not cleanthe sensors with sharp objects). If the sen-sors are covered, it will affect the accuracyof the RSS.

WSD0103

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if soequipped)


FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer through the key hole. If the lockbecomes frozen, heat the key before in-serting it into the key hole or use the re-mote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped).

ANTIFREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),check the antifreeze to assure proper win-ter protection. For additional information,refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during ex-tremely cold weather conditions, the batteryfluid may freeze and damage the battery. Tomaintain maximum efficiency, the batteryshould be checked regularly. For additionalinformation, refer to “Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATERIf the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-ing the engine block. Refill before operatingthe vehicle. For additional information, referto “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performance ofthese tires will be substantially reducedin snowy and icy conditions. If you oper-ate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all fourwheels. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some U.S. states and Canadian prov-inces prohibit their use. Check local,state and provincial laws before install-ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENTIt is recommended that the following itemsbe carried in the vehicle during winter:• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windowsand wiper blades.

• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

• Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” un-der these conditions. Try to avoiddriving on wet ice until the road issalted or sanded.

• Whatever the condition, drive withcaution. Accelerate and slow downwith care. If accelerating or down-shifting too fast, the drive wheels willlose even more traction.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


• Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on drypavement.

• Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

• Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake while onthe ice, and avoid any sudden steer-ing maneuvers.

• Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

• Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)Engine block heaters are used to assistwith cold temperature starting.The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)or lower.

WARNING

• Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical sys-tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You canbe seriously injured by an electricalshock if you use an ungroundedconnection.

• Disconnect and properly store theengine block heater cord beforestarting the engine. Damage to thecord could result in an electricalshock and can cause serious injury.

• Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-prongedextension cord rated for at least 10 A.Plug the extension cord into aGround Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.Failure to use the proper extensioncord or a grounded outlet can resultin a fire or electrical shock and causeserious personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engineblock heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a GroundFault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must beplugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-pending on outside temperatures, toproperly warm the engine coolant. Usean appropriate timer to turn the engineblock heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug andproperly store the cord to keep it awayfrom moving parts.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuckvehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

• If stopping for an emergency, be sureto move the vehicle well off the road.

• Do not use the hazard warning flash-ers while moving on the highway un-less unusual circumstances forceyou to drive so slowly that your ve-hicle might become a hazard to othertraffic.

• Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignitionswitch placed in any position.Some jurisdictions may prohibit the useof the hazard warning flasher switchwhile driving.

For Crew Cab model, lift up the rear benchseat and remove the net to remove the firstaid kit. For additional information, refer to“Folding the rear bench seat up” in the“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

LIC0394 LTI2502Crew Cab model

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)

6-2 In case of emergency

To shut off the engine in an emergencysituation while driving, perform the follow-ing procedure:– Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in lessthan 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignitionswitch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-tors tire pressure of all tires except thespare. When the low tire pressure warninglight is lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pres-sure) warning message is displayed in theodometer, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is be-ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMSwill activate and warn you of it by the lowtire pressure warning light. This system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-tional information, refer to “Warning lights,indicator lights and audible reminders” inthe “Instruments and Controls” section,and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

WARNING


• If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pulloff the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires andincrease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident andcould result in serious personal in-jury. Check the tire pressure for allfour tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If thelight still illuminates while driving af-ter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat or the TPMS may be mal-functioning. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. If no tire is flat and all tiresare properly inflated, have the ve-hicle checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

• When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tirepressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these services.


• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIf you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow:

Stopping the vehicle1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Move the shift lever to P(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic andto signal professional road assistancepersonnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Make sure the parking brake is se-curely applied and the shift lever isshifted into P (Park).

• Never change tires when the vehicleis on a slope, ice or slippery areas.This is hazardous.

• Never change tires if oncoming traf-fic is close to your vehicle. Wait forprofessional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite theflat tire to prevent the vehicle from movingwhen it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-hicle may move and result in personalinjury.

LCE2142

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire


Getting the spare tire and tools(King Cab® models)The tool storage compartment is locatedbetween the two rear jump seats.1. Turn the knob from the lock to the un-

lock position and remove the lid from thetool storage compartment.

2. Release the strap to remove the toolbag.

3. Collapse the jack to remove it from thestorage location by inserting the wheelnut wrench into the jack screw at the topof the jack as shown. Turn the wheel-nutwrench counterclockwise as shown un-til the jack screw becomes loose. Thenloosen the jack with your fingers until itbecomes free.

4. Remove the jack.

5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reversesteps 1 to 4.

LCE0109 LCE0110 LCE2164


Getting the spare tire and tools(Crew Cab models)The tools and tool bag are located behindthe rear bench seat.1. Remove the head restraints/headrests

and fold the rear bench seat down. Foradditional information, refer to “Foldingthe rear bench seat down ” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section of this manual.

2. Remove the tool bag and locate thewheel-nut wrench.

3. Collapse the jack to remove it from thestorage location by inserting the wheel-nut wrench into the jack screw as shownand turning the wheel-nut wrench to-wards you until the jack becomes loose.Then loosen the jack screw with yourfingers until it is free.

4. Remove the jack from behind the seat.

5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reversesteps 1 to 4.

Getting the spare tire and tools(All models)1. Seat the T-shaped end of the jacking rod

into the T-shaped opening of the sparetire winch. Apply pressure to keep thejacking rod engaged in the spare tire

LCE2159 LCE2165

WCE0070


winch and turn the jacking rod counter-clockwise to lower the spare tire.

2. Once the spare tire is completely low-ered, reach under the vehicle, removethe retainer chain, and carefully slide thetire from under the rear of the vehicle.

3. To reinstall the wheel, remove the centercap and insert the tire chain through thewheel. Be sure the rubber spacer is cen-tered on the wheel before lifting. Use theassembled jacking rod to slowly rotatethe winch clockwise to raise the wheelto the vehicle.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years andreplace as necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

CAUTION

• Be sure to center the spare tire sus-pending plate on the wheel and thenlift the spare tire.

• Failure to use the spacer may allowthe chain to get stuck on the wheelnut holes.

LCE2022


Removing bolt-on wheel caps (ifso equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so couldresult in personal injury.

The wheel cap O1 is only attached with thewheel nuts and is separate from the wheelO2 .

To remove the wheel cap, remove thewheel nuts after the jack is securely sup-porting the vehicle and the tire clears theground.For additional information, refer to “Jackingup vehicle and removing the damaged tire”in this section.Take care not to scratch the wheel cap orwheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removingthe damaged tire

WARNING

• Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle,support it with safety stands.

• Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicleon other vehicles. The jack is de-signed for lifting only your vehicleduring a tire change.

• Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle forjack support.

• Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

• Never use blocks on or under thejack.

• Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may causethe vehicle to move. This is especiallytrue for vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

• Do not allow passengers to stay inthe vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Never run the engine with a wheel(s)off the ground. It may cause the ve-hicle to move.LCE2367


Always refer to the illustration for the cor-rect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following in-structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheelnut wrench. Do not remove the wheelnuts until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head under the arrowstamped on the side of the frame or rearas shown.The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

WCE0152


3. Install the assembled jacking rod intothe jack as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack-ing lever and rod. Carefully raise the ve-hicle until the tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-move the tire.

Installing the spare tireThe spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. For additional information, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”section of this manual.1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on andtighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tightenwheel nuts alternately and evenly in thesequence illustrated (O1 ,O2 ,O3 ,O4 ,O5 ,O6 )until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence illustrated(O1 ,O2 ,O3 ,O4 ,O5 ,O6 ). Lower the vehiclecompletely .

WARNING

• Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

• Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause thenuts to become loose.

• Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 620 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

LCE0087

WCE0063


The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for 3 hours or more or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).COLD tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label lo-cated in the driver's door opening.5. Securely store the jacking equipment in

the vehicle and the flat tire under thevehicle. For additional information aboutstoring the flat tire, refer to “Getting thespare tire and tools” in this section.

WARNING

• Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properlysecured after use. Such items can be-come dangerous projectiles in an ac-cident or sudden stop.

• The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. For additional information,refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,the instructions and precautions belowmust be followed.

WARNING

• If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resultingin severe injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

• Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames awayfrom the battery.

• Do not allow battery fluid to comeinto contact with eyes, skin, clothingor painted surfaces. Battery fluid is acorrosive sulfuric acid solution whichcan cause severe burns. If the fluidshould come into contact with any-thing, immediately flush the con-tacted area with water.

• Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

• The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

• Whenever working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eye pro-tectors (for example, goggles or in-dustrial safety spectacles) andremove rings, metal bands, or anyother jewelry. Do not lean over thebattery when jump starting.

• Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and causeserious injury.

• The automatic engine cooling fan (ifso equipped) may come on at anytime without warning, even if the ig-nition switch is in the OFF positionand the engine is not running. Toavoid injury, keep hands and otherobjects away from it.

JUMP STARTING


WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damageto the charging system and cause per-sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring theirbatteries near each other.Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shiftlever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-sary electrical systems (lights, heater, airconditioner, etc.).

3. Connect the jumper cables in the se-quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ).

CAUTION

• Always connect positive (+) to posi-tive (+) and negative (−) to bodyground (for example, strut mountingbolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not tothe battery.

• Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that the cableclamps do not contact any othermetal.

4. Start the engine of the booster vehicleand let it run for a few minutes.

5. Keep the engine speed of the boostervehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start theengine of the vehicle being jumpstarted.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If the enginedoes not start right away, place the ig-nition switch in the OFF position andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

6. After starting the engine, carefully dis-connect the negative cable and then thepositive cable.

LCE2223


CAUTION

• Do not push start this vehicle. Thethree-way catalyst may bedamaged.

• Automatic transmission models can-not be push-started or tow-started.Attempting to do so may causetransmission damage.

WARNING

• Do not continue to drive if your ve-hicle overheats. Doing so could causeengine damage or a vehicle fire.

• To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant res-ervoir cap is removed, pressurizedhot water will spurt out, possiblycausing serious injury.

• Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated byan extremely high temperature gaugereading), or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc. take thefollowing steps.1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park).Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air condi-tioner temperature control to maximumhot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the ra-diator before opening the hood. If steamor coolant is escaping, turn off the en-gine. Do not open the hood further untilno steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from theengine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fanis running. The radiator hoses and radia-tor should not leak water. If coolant isleaking, the water pump belt is missingor loose, or the cooling fan does not run,stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into con-tact with, or get caught in, engine beltsor the engine cooling fan. The enginecooling fan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


6. After the engine cools down, check thecoolant level in the engine coolant res-ervoir tank with the engine running. Addcoolant to the engine coolant reservoirtank if necessary. Have your vehicle re-paired. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictionaland local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipmentcould damage your vehicle. Towing in-structions are available from a NISSANdealer. Local service operators are gener-ally familiar with the applicable laws andprocedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damageto your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It isadvisable to have the service operatorcarefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

• Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

• Never get under your vehicle after ithas been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

• When towing, make sure that thetransmission, axles, steering systemand powertrain are in working condi-tion. Use dollies or flatbed if any ofthe listed systems are not working.

• Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For additional information, refer to “Flattowing — 4WD with automatic transmis-sion,” “Flat towing — 2WD with automatictransmission” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends towing your vehiclebased upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-tional information, refer to the diagrams inthis section to ensure that your vehicle isproperly towed.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) modelswith automatic transmissionNISSAN recommends that towing dolliesbe used when towing your vehicle or placethe vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models equipped withan automatic transmission with any ofthe wheels on the ground as this maycause serious and expensive damageto the transfer case and transmission.

NOTE:

If the battery is completely drained thetransmission will not manually shift toother positions.

LCE2141


Two-Wheel Drive models withautomatic transmissionNISSAN recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels off theground or place the vehicle on a flatbedtruck as illustrated.

CAUTION

• Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive dam-age to the transmission. If it is neces-sary to tow the vehicle with the frontwheels raised always use towing dol-lies under the rear wheels.

• When towing automatic transmis-sion models with the front wheels onthe ground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in theOFF position and secure the steer-ing wheel in a straight-ahead po-sition with a rope or similar de-vice. Never secure the steeringwheel by placing the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position. Thismay cause damage to the steer-ing lock mechanism (for modelswith a steering lock mechanism).

NOTE:


VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing astuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:• Contact a professional towing ser-

vice to recover the vehicle if you haveany questions regarding the recov-ery procedure.

LCE2311


• Tow chains or cables must be at-tached only to main structural mem-bers of the vehicle.

• Do not use the vehicle tie-downs totow or free a stuck vehicle.

• Only use devices specifically de-signed for vehicle recovery and fol-low the manufacturer's instructions.

• Always pull the recovery devicestraight out from the front of the ve-hicle. Never pull at an angle.

• Route recovery devices so they donot touch any part of the vehicle ex-cept the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use a tow strap or other device de-signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-ways follow the manufacturer's instruc-tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicleWARNING

• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.• Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explodeand result in serious injury. Parts ofyour vehicle could also overheat andbe damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use the following procedure:1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behindthe vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left toclear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.• Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive).• Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.• Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive).

• Do not spin the tires above 34 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing ser-vice to remove the vehicle.


MEMO


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Environmental factors influence therate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance ofyour vehicle, it is important to take propercare of it.To protect the paint surfaces, wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:• After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.• After driving on coastal roads.• When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface.

• When dust or mud builds up on the sur-face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.When it is necessary to park outside, park ina shady area or protect the vehicle with abody cover.Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing thebody cover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap orgeneral purpose dishwashing liquid mixedwith clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

• Do not concentrate water spray di-rectly on the sonar sensors (if soequipped) on the bumper as this willresult in damage to the sensors. Donot use pressure washers capable ofspraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use ofhigh-pressure washers over 1,200 psi(8,274 kPa) can result in damage to orremoval of paint or graphics. Avoidusing a high-pressure washer closerthan 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle.Always use a wide-angle nozzle only,keep the nozzle moving and do notconcentrate the water spray on anyone area.

• Do not use car washes that use acidin the detergent. Some car washes,especially brushless ones, use someacid for cleaning. The acid may reactwith some plastic vehicle compo-nents, causing them to crack. Thiscould affect their appearance, andalso could cause them not to func-tion properly. Always check with yourcar wash to confirm that acid is notused.

• Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical de-tergents, gasoline or solvents.

• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot,as the surface may becomewater-spotted.

• Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty ofclean water.Inside edges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.Take care that the drain holes in the loweredge of the door are open. Spray waterunder the body and in the wheel wells toloosen the dirt and wash away road salt.A damp chamois can be used to dry thevehicle to avoid water spots.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.Polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-ered appearance before re-applying wax.A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosingthe proper product.• Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions suppliedwith the wax.

• Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as possiblefrom the surface of the paint to avoid last-ing damage or staining. Special cleaningproducts are available at a NISSAN dealeror any automotive accessory store. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these products.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, itis necessary to clean the underbody regu-larly in order to prevent dirt and salt frombuilding up and causing the acceleration ofcorrosion on the underbody and suspen-sion. Before the winter period and again inthe spring, the underseal must be checkedand, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-mal for glass to become coated with a filmafter the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easilyremove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,abrasive cleaners or chlorine-baseddisinfectant cleaners. They could dam-age the electrical conductors, radio an-tenna elements or rear window de-froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if soequipped)Wash the wheels regularly with a spongedampened in a mild soap solution, espe-cially during winter months in areas whereroad salt is used. If not removed, road saltcan discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:• Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

• Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same asambient temperature.

• Rinse the wheel to completely re-move the cleaner within 15 minutesafter the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with anon-abrasive chrome polish to maintainthe finish.

Appearance and care 7-3

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use oftire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply acoating to the tires to help reduce discolor-ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-ing and form a compound. This compoundmay come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:• Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easilythan with an oil-based tire dressing.

• Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to re-move).

• Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

• Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufac-turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats using avacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipethe vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened inmild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.Regular care and cleaning is required inorder to maintain the appearance of theleather (if so equipped).Before using any fabric protector, read themanufacturer's recommendations. Somefabric protectors contain chemicals thatmay stain or bleach the seat material.Use a cloth dampened only with water toclean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifi-cation sensor. This can also affect theoperation of the air bag system and re-sult in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

• Never use benzine, thinner or anysimilar material.

• Small dirt particles can be abrasiveand damaging to leather surfacesand should be removed promptly. Donot use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,detergents or ammonia-basedcleaners as they may damage theleather's natural finish.

• Never use fabric protectors unlessrecommended by the manufacturer.

• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERSMost air fresheners use a solvent thatcould affect the vehicle interior. If you usean air freshener, take the following precau-tions:• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they con-tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the airfreshener in a location that allows it tohang free and not contact an interior sur-face.

CLEANING INTERIOR


• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause im-mediate damage and discolorationwhen spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-er's instructions before using the air fresh-eners.

POWER MOONROOF (if soequipped)The sunshade is made from a tricot mate-rial.

CAUTION

To help prevent damaging the moon-roof while cleaning:• Do not rub the material with a cloth.

Doing so can damage the surface ofthe material or cause a stain tospread.

• Never use benzine, thinner or anysimilar chemical to clean the sun-shade. This may discolor the moon-roof and damage the surface.

• Clean water based stains by pattingthe surface with a clean soft clothdampened in warm water. Press aclean dry cloth onto the surface toremove as much dampness as pos-sible and then let air dry.

• Clean oil based stains by patting thesurface with a clean soft cloth damp-ened in warm water. Press a clean drycloth onto the surface to remove asmuch dampness as possible andthen let air dry.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interferencethat may result in a collision, injury ordeath:• NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver frontposition or install them upside downor backwards.

• Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,or equivalent floor mats, that arespecifically designed for use in yourvehicle model and model year.

LAI2085


• Properly position the mats in thefloorwell using the floor mat posi-tioning hook. For additional informa-tion, refer to "Floor mat installation"in this section.

• Make sure the floor mat does not in-terfere with pedal operation.

• Periodically check the floor mats tomake sure they are properlyinstalled.

• After cleaning the vehicle interior,check the floor mats to make surethey are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet andmake it easier to clean the interior. Matsshould be maintained with regular clean-ing and replaced if they become exces-sively worn.

Floor mat installationYour vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-sitioning hook(s). The number and shape ofthe floor mat positioning hooks for eachseating position varies depending on thevehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,follow the installation instructions providedwith the mat and the following:1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position and withthe parking brake fully applied, positionthe floor mat in the floorwell so that thefloor mat grommet holes are alignedwith the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into thehook(s) and ensure that the floor mat isproperly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-fere with pedal operation. With the igni-tion still in the OFF position, the shift le-ver in the P (Park) position and with theparking brake applied, fully apply and re-lease all pedals. The floor mat must notinterfere with pedal operation or preventthe pedal from returning to its normalposition.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for details about installing the floormats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of thefloor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely in the shade before using them. Foradditional information, refer to “Seat beltmaintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”section of this manual.

LAI2042Positioning hooks


WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up inthe retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seatbelts, since these materials may se-verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSIONMost vehicle corrosion is caused by:• The accumulation of moisture-retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,cavities, and other areas.

• Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

MoistureAccumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially those ar-eas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing and where atmospheric pollutionexists and road salt is used.

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate ofcorrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt inthe air in coastal areas, or heavy road saltuse accelerates the corrosion process.Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep

the vehicle clean.• Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.• Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumulation.• Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash withwater as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION


CAUTION

• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compart-ment by washing it out with a hose.Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaneror broom.

• Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic com-ponents inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor panand fenders.In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, it is recommended that you consulta NISSAN dealer.


8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38

When performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injury toyourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-lowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING

• Park the vehicle on a level surface,apply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the ve-hicle from moving. Move the shift le-ver to P (Park).

• Be sure the ignition switch is in theOFF or LOCK position when perform-ing any parts replacement or repairs.

• If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans,belts and any other moving parts.

• It is advisable to secure or removeany loose clothing and remove anyjewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.before working on your vehicle.

• Always wear eye protection when-ever you work on your vehicle.

• If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, besure there is proper ventilation forexhaust gases to escape.

• Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle,support it with safety stands.

• Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

• On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be servicedbecause the fuel lines are under highpressure even when the engine is off.It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

• Do not work under the hood whilethe engine is hot. Turn the engine offand wait until it cools down.

• Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other ve-hicle fluids can damage the environ-ment. Always conform to local regula-tions for disposal of vehicle fluid.

• Never leave the engine or the trans-mission related component harnessconnector disconnected while the ig-nition switch is in the ON position.

• Never connect or disconnect the bat-tery or any transistorized compo-nent while the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instruc-tions regarding only those items which arerelatively easy for an owner to perform.A Genuine NISSAN service manual is alsoavailable. For additional information, referto “Owner's Manual/Service Manual orderinformation” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.NISSAN recommends the use of GenuineNISSAN parts or equivalent. The use of partsthat do not meet or exceed NISSAN specifica-tions, can cause damage to your vehicle, andhave an effect on your warranty coverage. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerparts department who can provide informa-tion on the proper parts for your vehicle.You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, andcould affect warranty coverage. If in doubtabout any servicing, it is recommendedthat you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

NOTE:If the battery is dead the transmission willnot manually shift into other positions.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

VQ38DD engine1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse/Fusible link box3. Fuse/Fusible link box4. Fuse box5. Engine oil filler cap6. Engine oil dipstick7. Brake fluid reservoir8. Air cleaner9. Drive belt location10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Radiator cap12. Battery13. Engine coolant reservoir

LDI3520

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provideyear-round antifreeze and coolant protec-tion. The antifreeze solution contains rustand corrosion inhibitors. Additional enginecooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING

• Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiatorcool down. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escap-ing from the radiator. For additionalinformation on precautions, refer to“If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency” section of thismanual.

• The radiator and coolant reservoirare equipped with a pressure type ra-diator cap. To prevent engine dam-age, use only a Genuine NISSAN ra-diator cap.

CAUTION

• Never use any cooling system addi-tives such as radiator sealer. Addi-tives may clog the cooling systemand cause damage to the engine,transmission and/or cooling system.

• When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protec-tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additionalfreeze protection is needed due toweather where you operate your ve-hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-trate following the directions on thecontainer. If an equivalent coolantother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-low the coolant manufacturer’s in-structions to maintain minimum an-tifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C).The use of other types of coolant so-lutions other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)or equivalent may damage the en-gine cooling system.

• The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)or 7 years. Mixing any other type ofcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)(or equivalent coolant), includingGenuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or theuse of non-distilled water may re-duce the life expectancy of thefactory-fill coolant. For additional in-formation, refer to the "Maintenanceand schedules" section of thismanual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoirwhen the engine is cold. If the coolantlevel is below the MIN level OB , add coolantto the MAX level OA . If the reservoir is empty,check the coolant level in the radiatorwhen the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAXlevel OA .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixingany other type of coolant or the use ofnon-distilled water will reduce the life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-nance and schedules" section of thismanual.If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, it is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.For additional information on the locationof the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-gine compartment check locations” in thissection.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the enginecoolant. The service procedure can befound in the NISSAN Service Manual.Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine over-heating.

WARNING

• To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when theengine is hot.

• Never remove the radiator or enginecoolant reservoir cap when the en-gine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escap-ing from the radiator.

• Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or handcleaner as soon as possible.

• Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2831

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until itreaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between the H(High) and L (Low) marks OB . This is thenormal operating oil level range. If the oillevel is below the L (Low) mark OA , re-move the oil filler cap and pour recom-mended oil through the opening. Do notoverfill OC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the sever-ity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.Operating the engine with an insuffi-cient amount of oil can damage the en-gine, and such damage is not coveredby warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OILFILTERFor additional information on engine oiland oil filter change, refer to the instruc-tions outlined in this section.

Vehicle set-up1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using asuitable floor jack and safety jackstands.

LDI3521 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

• Place the safety jack stands under thevehicle jack-up points.

• A suitable adapter should be attached tothe jack stand saddle.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-port points are used to avoid vehicledamage.

LDI3524

O1 Oil filler capLDI3361

O2 Oil drain plug

Do-it-yourself 8-7

Removal of under-engineprotectors (if so equipped)1. Remove bolts OA and plate.

Engine oil and filter1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug and oil filter.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and com-pletely drain the oil.

LDI3363

O3 Oil filterLDI3368

O4 PlateLDI3366

8-8 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as theengine oil is hot.

WARNING

• Prolonged and repeated contactwith used engine oil may cause skincancer.

• Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or handcleaner as soon as possible.

• Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise.Remove the oil filter by turning it byhand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-face with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket ma-terial remaining on the sealing surfaceof the engine. Failure to do so couldlead to an oil leak and engine damage.

• The dipstick must be inserted inplace to prevent oil spillage from thedipstick hole when filling the enginewith oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.It is recommended that you use a Genu-ine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent, visityour NISSAN dealer parts departmentfor proper part.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until aslight resistance is felt, then tighten addi-tionally more than 2/3 turn.Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb (15.0 to 21.0 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with anew washer. Securely tighten the drainplug with a wrench. Do not use exces-sive force.Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)

9. Refill the engine with the recommendedoil through the oil filler opening, and in-stall the oil filler cap securely.

CAUTION

Do not spill fluids on engine cover. Thiscould damage the engine cover. If flu-ids are spilled, immediately clean sur-face with a neutral detergent. Do notuse an organic solvent such as brakecleaner.

For additional information about drain andrefill capacity, refer to “Recommendedfluids/lubricants and capacities” in the“Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual. The drain and refill ca-pacity depends on the oil temperature anddrain time. Use these specifications for ref-erence only. Always use the dipstick to de-termine the proper amount of oil in theengine.10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.Correct as required. Turn the engine offand wait more than 15 minutes. Checkthe oil level with the dipstick. Add en-gine oil if necessary.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

After the operation1. Reinstall engine protectors in reverse or-

der of removal.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to theground.

• Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.• Check your local regulations.

When checking or replacement is required,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION

• NISSAN recommends using GenuineNISSAN Matic P ATF. Do not mix withother fluids.

• Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-mission fluid in this transmission.Damage caused by the use of fluidsother than as recommended is notcovered under NISSAN’s New VehicleLimited Warranty.

• Using fluids that are not equivalentto Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF mayalso damage the transmission. Dam-age caused by the use of fluids otherthan as recommended is not coveredunder NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluidis also described on caution labels locatedin the engine compartment.

Check the power steering fluid level whenthe engine is stopped.The fluid level should be between the COLDMAX line and the COLD MIN line on thepower steering fluid reservoir at cold fluidtemperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C) or atthe HOT MAX line on the power steeringfluid reservoir at hot fluid temperatures of122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C).

LDI3077

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID(ATF)

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

8-10 Do-it-yourself

If the fluid is cold and is at or below theCOLD MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF-IIor equivalent to the COLD MAX line. If thefluid is hot and below the HOT MAX line, addGenuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to theHOT MAX line. Remove the cap and fillthrough the opening.

CAUTION

• DO NOT OVERFILL.• Do not reuse power steering fluid.• Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

For additional brake fluid specification in-formation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section of thismanual.

WARNING

• Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect thevehicle's stopping ability.

• Clean the filler cap before removing.• Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con-tainers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluidis spilled, immediately wash the sur-face with water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. Ifthe fluid level is below the MIN line OB or thebrake warning light comes on, add Genu-ine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line OA .If fluid must be added frequently, the sys-tem should be checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

LDI3526

BRAKE FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-11

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIRFill the windshield-washer fluid reservoirperiodically. Add windshield-washer fluidwhen the low windshield-washer fluidwarning light (if so equipped) comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,lift the cap off the reservoir and pour thewindshield-washer fluid into the reservoiropening.Add a washer solvent to the washer forbetter cleaning. In the winter season, add awindshield-washer antifreeze. Follow themanufacturer's instructions for the mix-ture ratio.Refill the reservoir more frequently whendriving conditions require an increasedamount of windshield-washer fluid.Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSANWindshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

• Do not substitute engine antifreezecoolant for windshield-washer solu-tion. This may result in damage to thepaint.

• Do not fill the windshield-washerreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methylalcohol based washer fluid concen-trates may permanently stain thegrille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer reservoir.

• Pre-mix washer fluid concentrateswith water to the manufacturer'srecommended levels before pouringthe fluid into the windshield-washerreservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer reservoir to mix the washerfluid concentrate and water.

LDI3136

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Caution symbols for battery WARNING

O1No smoking, No exposed flames, No

SparksDo not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the

battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

O2 Shield eyes Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion orbattery acid.

O3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

O4 Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or severe burns. After handling the battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub

your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immedi-ately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the

battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

O5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

O6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness orinjury.

• If the battery is labeled “do not open” it ismaintenance free and battery fluidshould not be checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ora qualified specialist workshop to con-firm the battery’s performance.

• Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bak-ing soda and water.

• Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

• If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 daysor longer, disconnect the negative (-) bat-tery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-13

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situationsthat can lead to potential battery dis-charge and potential no-start conditionssuch as:1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is not run-ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

• Do not expose the battery to flames,an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-drogen gas generated by the batteryis explosive. Explosive gases cancause blindness or injury. Do not al-low battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-furic acid can cause blindness or in-jury. After touching a battery or bat-tery cap, do not touch or rub youreyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. Ifthe acid contacts your eyes, skin orclothing, immediately flush with wa-ter for at least 15 minutes and seekmedical attention.

• When working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectionand remove all jewelry.

• Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands afterhandling.

• Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

• Do not tip the battery.

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.This battery is not equipped with remov-able vent caps.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jumpstarting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-tion of this manual. If the engine does notstart by jump starting, the battery mayhave to be replaced. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

LDI3302

8-14 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

• Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so willbypass the variable voltage controlsystem and the vehicle battery maynot charge completely.

• Use electrical accessories with theengine running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

NOTE:

If the battery is dead the transmissionwill not manually shift into otherpositions.Your vehicle is equipped with a variablevoltage control system. This system mea-sures the amount of electrical dischargefrom the battery and controls voltage gen-erated by the generator.The current sensor OA is located near thebattery along the negative battery cable. Ifyou add electrical accessories to your ve-hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitablebody ground such as the frame or engineblock area. 1. Power steering fluid pump pulley

2. Air conditioner compressor pulley3. Crankshaft pulley4. Automatic belt tensioner pulley5. Generator pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position before servicing drivebelt. The engine could rotate unexpect-edly.

LDI3525 LDI3500

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 8-15

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. Ifthe belt is in poor condition or is loose,have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for con-dition and tension in accordance withthe maintenance schedule found in the"Maintenance and schedules" section ofthis manual.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGSIridium-tipped spark plugsIt is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as con-ventional type spark plugs because theylast much longer. Follow the maintenancelog shown in the "Maintenance and sched-ules" section of this manual. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning orregapping.• Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

If replacement is required, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

8-16 Do-it-yourself

The dry paper type filter element may becleaned and reused. Replace it accordingto the maintenance log shown in the"Maintenance and schedules" section ofthis manual. When replacing the filter, wipethe inside of the air cleaner filter housingand the cover with a damp cloth.To remove the VQ38DD air cleaner filter:

�1 Unlatch the clips and remove the aircleaner cover. Remove the air cleanerfilter.

WARNING

• Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops theflame if the engine backfires. If it isn'tthere, and the engine backfires, youcould be burned. Do not drive withthe air cleaner removed, and be care-ful when working on the engine withthe air cleaner removed.

• Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine withthe air cleaner removed. Doing socould result in serious injury. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entryof airborne dust and pollen particles andreduces some objectionable outsideodors. The filter is located behind the glovebox. For additional information on changeintervals, refer to the "Maintenance andschedules" section of this manual.To replace the filter, perform the followingprocedure:1. Open the glove box and press in on the

sides so that it will open completely al-lowing it to hang by the cord.

LDI3523 LDI0442

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-17

2. Gently lift up on the tab O1 .

3. Pull the filter cover toward you and thendown O2 .

4. Remove the old filter O3 .

NOTE:

The filter is marked with air flow arrows.The end of the filter with the arrowshould face the rear of the vehicle. Thearrows should face downward.5. Insert the new filter into the housing and

slide it over to the right.

6. Replace the filter cover. The cover willclick into place under the tab.

7. Install the glove box door.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield-washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other mate-rial may be on the blade or windshield.Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.Clean each blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-tergent. Then rinse the blades with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

LDI2047

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

REPLACINGReplace the wiper blades if they are worn.1. Lift the wiper arm away from the

windshield.

2. Push and hold the release tab OA , andthen move the wiper blade down OB thewiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto thewiper arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

• After wiper blade replacement, re-turn the wiper arm to its original po-sition; otherwise it may be damagedwhen the hood is opened.

• Make sure the wiper blades contactthe glass; otherwise the arms may bedamaged from wind pressure.

• Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-ful not to let wax get into the windshield-washer nozzle . This may cause clogging orimproper windshield-washer operation. Ifwax gets into the nozzle, remove it with aneedle or small pin O1 .

LDI2725

LDI3120

Do-it-yourself 8-19

If the brakes do not operate properly, havethe brakes checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

Self-adjusting brakesYour vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-plied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if thebrake pedal height does not return tonormal. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicatorsThe disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, a high pitchedscraping or screeching sound will be heardwhen the vehicle is in motion. The noise willbe heard whether or not the brake pedal isdepressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops is nor-mal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information re-garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-propriate maintenance schedule informa-tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"section of this manual.

Two types of fuses are used. Type OA isused in the fuse boxes in the engine com-partment. Type OB is used in the passengercompartment fuse box.Type OA fuses are provided as spare fuses.They are stored in the passenger compart-ment fuse box.Type OA fuses can be installed in the enginecompartment and passenger compart-ment fuse boxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

If a type OA fuse is used to replace a type OB

fuse, the type OA fuse will not be level withthe fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.This will not affect the performance of thefuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in thefuse box securely.Type OB fuses cannot be installed in theunderhood fuse boxes. Only use type OA

fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may not be equipped withall fuses listed on the fuse label.

ENGINE COMPARTMENTWARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than that specified onthe fuse box cover. This could damagethe electrical system or electronic con-trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not comeon, check for an open fuse.1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-

light switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushingthe tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.The fuse puller is located in the center ofthe fuse block in the passengercompartment.

LDI0457 LDI2838

Do-it-yourself 8-21

5. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with anew fuse OB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-trical system checked and repaired. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition, checkthe fusible links. If any of these fusible linksare melted, replace with only GenuineNISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTWARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than that specified onthe fuse box cover. This could damagethe electrical system or electronic con-trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-

light switch are OFF.2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

LDI2826 LDI2839

8-22 Do-it-yourself

4. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with anequivalent good fuse OB .

5. Reverse step 2 to reinstall fuse box cover.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-trical system checked and repaired. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may not be equipped withall fuses listed on the fuse label.

Extended storage switchIf any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, remove the extended storage switchand check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used forlong term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-tended storage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replace only theopen fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storageswitch:1. To remove the extended storage switch,

be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in theOFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs OA found on eachside of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out fromthe fuse box OB .

LDI0456 LDI2736

Do-it-yourself 8-23

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-low the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key asfollows:1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA

into the slit OB of the corner and twist itto separate the upper part from thelower part. Place a cloth over the screw-driver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-24 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: CR2032 orequivalent.• Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so couldcause a malfunction.

• Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact pointswill seriously deplete the storage ca-pacity.

• Make sure that the + side faces thebottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated withOC and OD .

5. Operate the buttons to check theoperation.

If you need assistance with replacement, itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.Note:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.For Canada:This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-25

HEADLIGHTSThe headlight is a semi-sealed beam typewhich uses a replaceable headlight (halo-gen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from in-side the engine compartment without re-moving the headlight assembly.

CAUTION

• High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulbmay break if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

• When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

• DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

• Use the same number and wattageas shown in the chart.

• Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period oftime as dust, moisture and smokemay enter the headlight body and af-fect the performance of theheadlight.

• Aiming is not necessary after replac-ing the bulb. When aiming adjust-ment is necessary, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses the fog. This is not a malfunction. Iflarge drops of water collect inside the lens,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for servicing.

Removing the headlight bulb1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the rear end of the bulb.

WDI0294

LIGHTS

8-26 Do-it-yourself

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring OA counter-clockwise until it is free from the head-light reflector and then remove it.

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Donot shake or rotate the bulb OB whenremoving it.

Replacing the headlight bulb1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.• Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-

tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into thebulb plastic base until it snaps andstops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)For additional information on fog light bulbreplacement, refer to the instructions out-lined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulbIf fog light bulb replacement is required, it isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION

• High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulbmay break if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

• When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

• Use the same number and wattageas originally installed as shown in thechart.

• Do not leave the bulb out of the foglight for a long period of time as dust,moisture and smoke may enter thefog light body and affect the perfor-mance of the fog light.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*Headlight assembly

High/Low/Daytime running lights (if soequipped) 60/55 HB5

Turn/Park 28/8 W28/8WSide marker 3.8 194

Fog lights (if so equipped)* 55 H11Map light 8 —Room light* 8 —Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 2.1 —High-mounted stop light/Cargo light* 12.8 912Rear combination light

Turn 27 3156AKStop/Tail 27/7 3157KBack-up 16 921

License plate light 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit an NISSAN retailer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest partsinformation.

1. Map light2. Room light3. High-mounted stop light/Cargo light4. License plate light5. Rear combination light6. Fog light (if so equipped)7. Headlight assembly/Daytime running

light

LDI0713

8-28 Do-it-yourself

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D.When replacing a bulb, first remove the lensand/or cover using a cloth and suitable tool.

: Indicates bulb removal: Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth O1 to protect the housing.

WDI0306

LDI0478Map light

WDI0300Rear combination light

Do-it-yourself 8-29

To replace the license plate light:1. Apply force as shown in image to re-

move tension that locks bulb assemblyto the bumper.

2. Pivot bulb assembly away from bumperto release fully.

3. Rotate the bulb retainer as shown in theimage.

4. Pull the bulb out to remove and replace.*Left side assembly is shown. Right sideassembly is mirror.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” inthe “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-tors tire pressure of all tires except thespare. When the low tire pressure warninglight is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pres-sure) warning message is displayed in theodometer, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated.

LDI3134License plate light

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Do-it-yourself

TPMS will activate only when the vehicle isdriven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).Also, this system may not detect a suddendrop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tirewhile driving).For additional information, refer to “Low tirepressure warning light” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section, “Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or theTire and Loading Information label underthe “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tireand Loading Information label is affixed tothe driver side center pillar. Tire pressuresshould be checked regularly because:• Most tires naturally lose air over time.• Tires can lose air suddenly when driven

over potholes or other objects or if thevehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires are con-sidered COLD after the vehicle has beenparked for 3 or more hours, or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.Incorrect tire pressure, including underinflation, may adversely affect tire lifeand vehicle handling.

WARNING

• Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-denly and cause an accident.

• The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The ve-hicle weight capacity is indicated onthe Tire and Loading Information la-bel. Do not load your vehicle beyondthis capacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tire life,unsafe operating conditions due topremature tire failure, or unfavorablehandling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident. Load-ing beyond the specified capacitymay also result in failure of other ve-hicle components.

• Before taking a long trip, or when-ever you heavily load your vehicle,use a tire pressure gauge to ensurethat the tire pressures are at thespecified level.

• For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

Tire and Loading Information label�1 Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that canbe seated in the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-hicle loading information” in the“Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

�3 Original tire size: The size of thetires originally installed on the ve-hicle at the factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tiresto this pressure when the tires arecold. Tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parkedfor 3 or more hours, or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds. The recommended coldtire inflation is set by the manu-facturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up tothe vehicle's GVWR.

�5 Tire size: Refer to “Tire labeling” inthis section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI2007

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely ontothe valve stem. Do not press too hard orforce the valve stem sideways, or air willescape. If the hissing sound of air escap-ing from the tire is heard while checkingthe pressure, reposition the gauge toeliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specificationshown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label orthe Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too muchair is added, press the core of the valvestem briefly with the tip of the gaugestem to release pressure. Recheck thepressure and add or release air asneeded.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, in-cluding the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

Front and RearOriginal Tire:P265/70R16P265/75R16P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:P265/70R16P265/75R16P265/60R18P265/60R18

Size:Full SizeFull Size

P265/70R16Full Size

TIRE LABELINGFederal law requires tire manufac-turers to place standardized infor-mation on the sidewall of all tires.This information identifies and de-scribes the fundamental character-istics of the tire and also provides theTire Identification Number (TIN) forsafety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

LDI0393 WDI0394Example

Do-it-yourself 8-33

O1 Tire size (example: P215/65R1595H)1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (notall tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in milli-meters of the tire from sidewalledge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port. You may not find this infor-mation on all tires because it isnot required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You shouldnot drive the vehicle faster thanthe tire speed rating.

WDI0395Example

8-34 Do-it-yourself

O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)for a new tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. Thesymbol can be placed above, be-low or to the left or right of the TireIdentification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent theweek and year the tire was built.For example, the numbers 3103means the 31st week of 2003. Ifthese numbers are missing thenlook on the other sidewall of thetire.

O3 Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-ers.

O4 Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure.

O5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle, al-ways use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

LDI2786Example

Do-it-yourself 8-35

O6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates whether the tire requiresan inner tube (“tube type”) or not(“tubeless”).

O7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown if the tirehas radial structure.

O8 Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or brand name isshown.

Other Tire-related TerminologyIn addition to the many terms thatare defined throughout this section,Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or modelname molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding onthe other sidewall of the tire, or (2)the outward facing sidewall of anasymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

• When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow)and construction. A NISSAN dealermay be able to help you with infor-mation about tire type, size, speedrating and availability.

• Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factoryequipped tires, and may not matchthe potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximumspeed rating of the tire.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could af-fect the proper operation of the lowtire pressure warning system.

• Always use tires of the same type,size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels. Failure todo so may result in a circumferencedifference between tires on the frontand rear axles which can cause theVehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-tem to malfunction resulting in per-sonal injury or death, excessive tirewear and may damage the transmis-sion and differential gears.


All season tiresNISSAN specifies All Season tires on somemodels to provide good performance allyear, including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All Season tires are identified by ALLSEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.Snow tires have better snow traction thanAll Season tires and may be more appropri-ate in some areas.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Summer tiresNISSAN specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowyor icy conditions, NISSAN recommends theuse of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on allfour wheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load rat-ing to the original equipment tires. If you donot, it can adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-ings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.If you install snow tires, they must be thesame size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibittheir use. Check local, state and provinciallaws before installing studded tires. Skidand traction capabilities of studded snowtires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorerthan that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When installingtire chains, make sure they are the propersize for the tires on your vehicle and areinstalled according to the chain manufac-turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of awinter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are de-termined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recommendedby the tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damageto the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingtire chains. In addition, drive at a reducedspeed. Otherwise, your vehicle may bedamaged and/or vehicle handling andperformance may be adversely affected.Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Drivingwith chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.Use only the 2WD range when driving onclear paved roads.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRESTire rotationNISSAN recommends rotating thetires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).For additional information on tire re-placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”in the “In case of emergency” sectionin this manual.As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:98 ft-lb (133 ft-lb)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times.It is recommended that wheel nutsbe tightened to specification ateach tire rotation interval.

WARNING

• After rotating the tires, checkand adjust the tire pressure.

• Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

• Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

• For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “Impor-tant Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WDI0258 WDI0259

8-38 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

• Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking,bulging or objects caught inthe tread. If excessive wear,cracks, bulging or deep cutsare found, the tire(s) should bereplaced.

• The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. Whenthe wear indicators are visible,the tire(s) should be replaced.

• Tires degrade with age anduse. Have tires, including thespare, over 6 years old checkedby a qualified technician be-cause some tire damage maynot be obvious. Replace thetires as necessary to preventtire failure and possible per-sonal injury.

• Improper service of the sparetire may result in serious per-sonal injury. If it is necessary torepair the spare tire, it is rec-ommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

• For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “Impor-tant Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tiresWhen replacing a tire, use the same size,tread design, speed rating and load carry-ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

WARNING

• The use of tires other than those rec-ommended or the mixed use of tiresof different brands, construction(bias, bias-belted or radial), or treadpatterns can adversely affect theride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system, groundclearance, body-to-tire clearance,tire chain clearance, speedometercalibration, headlight aim and bum-per height. Some of these effectsmay lead to accidents and could re-sult in serious personal injury.

• If your vehicle was originallyequipped with four tires that werethe same size and you are only re-placing two of the four tires, installthe new tires on the rear axle. Placingnew tires on the front axle may causeloss of vehicle control in some drivingconditions and cause an accidentand personal injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

• If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimen-sion. Wheels of a different off-setcould cause premature tire wear, de-grade vehicle handling characteris-tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-terference with the brake discs. Suchinterference can lead to decreasedbraking efficiency and/or early brakepad wear. For additional informationon wheel off-set dimensions, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Technicaland consumer information” sectionof this manual.

• When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tirepressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


• The TPMS sensor may be damaged ifit is not handled correctly. Be carefulwhen handling the TPMS sensor.

• When replacing the TPMS sensor, theID registration may be required. It isrecommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for ID registration.

• Do not use a valve stem cap that isnot specified by NISSAN. The valvestem cap may become stuck.

• Be sure that the valve stem caps arecorrectly fitted. Otherwise the valvemay be clogged up with dirt andcause a malfunction or loss ofpressure.

• Do not install a damaged or de-formed wheel or tire even if it hasbeen repaired. Such wheels or tirescould have structural damage andcould fail without warning.

• The use of retread tires is notrecommended.


Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-beltedor radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and maydamage the transmission, transfercase and differential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-mended that all four tires be replaced withtires of the same size, brand, constructionand tread pattern. The tire pressure andwheel alignment should also be checkedand corrected as necessary. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.• For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Care of wheels• Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.• Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside ofthe vehicle is washed.

• Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause lossof pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

• NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in ar-eas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire)When replacing a wheel without the TPMSsuch as the spare tire, the TPMS will notfunction.Your vehicle may be equipped with a fullsize spare that is a different size or brandthan the tires originally installed on the ve-hicle. This full size spare tire is intended fortemporary use only and should be re-placed at the first opportunity.Observe the following precautions if theFULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tiremust be used. Otherwise, your vehiclecould be damaged or involved in an acci-dent:

WARNING

To help reduce the risk of a crash whichmay result in personal injury or death:• The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire

should be used for emergency useonly. It should be replaced with thestandard tire at the first opportunityto avoid possible tire or differentialdamage.

• Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving. The vehicle driving perfor-mance may be affected when drivingon wet or snow covered roads.

• When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire is installed, the Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) will normally notbe affected.

• When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire is installed, the followingsystems may not work correctly:– Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)• Periodically check the TEMPORARY

FULL SIZE spare tire inflation pres-sure. Always keep the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire inflated to thepressure specification shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

• With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE sparetire installed do not drive the vehicleat speeds faster than 50 mph (80km/h).

Do-it-yourself 8-41

• When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY FULLSIZE spare tire should be used on thefront wheels and the original tireused on the rear wheels. Use tirechains only on the drive wheels.

• Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire on other vehicles.

• Do not use more than one TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the sametime.

• Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

• Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may causedamage to the vehicle.

• Use of the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire on a vehicle that has tireslarger than were originally equippedcan affect the 4WD System. This mayresult in a circumference differencebetween tires on front and rear axleswhich can cause the 4WD system toautomatically place the vehicle in2WD and flash the 4WD light. Whenthe TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tireis replaced with a tire that matchesall other tires on the vehicle, and alltires are properly inflated the 4WDsystem will operate normally.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Explanation of general maintenanceitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . 9-5Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Additional maintenance items forsevere operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Maintenance under severe operatingconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your vehiclegood mechanical condition, as well as itsemissions and engine performance.It is the owner's responsibility to make surethat the scheduled maintenance, as well asgeneral maintenance, is performed.As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receivesproper maintenance. You are a vital link inthe maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCEGeneral maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation. They are essentialfor proper vehicle operation. It is your re-sponsibility to perform these proceduresregularly as prescribed.Performing general maintenance checksrequires minimal mechanical skill and onlya few general automotive tools.These checks or inspections can be doneby yourself, a qualified technician or, if youprefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEThe maintenance items listed in this sec-tion are required to be serviced at regularintervals. However under severe drivingconditions, additional or more frequentmaintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICEIf maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-cialists and are kept up-to-date with thelatest service information through techni-cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-grams. They are fully qualified to work onNISSAN vehicles before work begins.If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it isrecommended that you ask your NISSANdealer where the nearest NISSAN CertifiedCollision Center is located, or go to http://collision.nissanusa.com.You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-er's service department can perform theservice needed to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smells, be sure tocheck for the cause or have it checkedpromptly. In addition, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer if you thinkthat repairs are required.When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMSAdditional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.Doors and engine hood: Check that thedoors and engine hood operate properly.Also ensure that all latches lock securely.Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollersand links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood fromopening when the primary latch is re-leased.When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights, stoplights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and otherlights are all operating properly and in-stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts aremissing, and check for any loose wheelnuts. Tighten if necessary.Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-ery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in alltires, including the spare, to the pressurespecified. Check carefully for damage, cutsor excessive wear.Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components: Replace theTPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve coreand cap when the tires are replaced due towear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-hicle should pull to either side while drivingon a straight and level road, or if you detectuneven or abnormal tire wear, there maybe a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-way speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.Windshield: Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield at leastevery six months for cracks or other dam-age. Have a damaged windshield repairedby a qualified repair facility. It is recom-mended that you have a damaged wind-shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or aNISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locatea collision center in your area, refer tohttp://collision.nissanusa.com.Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing scheduled maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure the pedaldoes not catch or require uneven effort.Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-nism: On a fairly steep hill check that thevehicle is held securely with the shift leverin the P (Park) position without applying anybrakes.Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smoothoperation. If the brake pedal suddenly goesdown further than normal, the pedal feelsspongy or the vehicle seems to take longerto stop, have your vehicle checked imme-diately. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service. Keep thefloor mat away from the pedal.Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.Parking brake: Check the parking brakeoperation regularly. The vehicle should besecurely held on a fairly steep hill with onlythe parking brake applied. If the parking

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.Seats: Check seat position controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to en-sure they operate smoothly and all latcheslock securely in every position. Check that thehead restraints/headrests move up anddown smoothly and the locks (if so equipped)hold securely in all latched positions.Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (for example, buckles, anchors,adjusters and retractors) operate properlyand smoothly, and are installed securely.Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,wear or damage.Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.Warning lights and chimes: Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operatingproperly.Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properlyand in sufficient quantity when operatingthe heater or air conditioner.Windshield wiper and washer*: Checkthat the wipers and washer operate prop-erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (for example, eachtime you check the engine oil or refuel).Battery (for maintenance free batter-ies)*: This vehicle is equipped with a sealedmaintenance free battery. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forservice.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situationsthat can lead to potential battery dis-charge and potential no-start conditionssuch as:1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is not run-ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the fluidlevel is between the MAX and MIN lines onthe reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drivebelts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level spot andturning off the engine. Wait more than 15minutes for the oil to drain back into the oilpan.Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If thesound of the exhaust seems unusual orthere is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-ately have the exhaust system inspected. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after thevehicle has been parked for a while. Waterdripping from the air conditioner after useis normal. If you should notice any leaks or iffuel fumes are evident, check for the causeand have it corrected immediately.


Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold, withthe engine off. Check the lines for properattachment, leaks, cracks, etc.Radiator and hoses: Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects,leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-mation, rot or loose connections.Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to control dust. Itis very important to remove these sub-stances, otherwise rust may form on thefloor pan, frame, fuel lines and around theexhaust system. At the end of winter, theunderbody should be thoroughly flushedwith plain water, being careful to cleanthose areas where mud and dirt may accu-mulate. For additional information, refer tothe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.Windshield-washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided togive you a better understanding of thescheduled maintenance items that shouldbe regularly checked or replaced. Themaintenance schedule indicates at whichmileage/time intervals each item requiresservice.In addition to scheduled maintenance,your vehicle requires that some items bechecked during normal day-to-day opera-tion. For additional information, refer to“General maintenance” in this section.Items marked with “*” are recommendedby NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.You are not required to perform mainte-nance on these items in order to maintainthe warranties which come with yourNISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-tervals are required.When applicable, additional informationcan be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use ofnon-OEM approved aftermarket flush-ing systems and strongly advisesagainst performing these services on aNISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-proved chemicals or solvents, the use ofwhich has not been validated by NISSAN.For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMMAINTENANCE:Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts forwear, fraying or cracking and for propertension. Replace any damaged drive belts.Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-vals. When driving for prolonged periods industy conditions, check/replace the filtermore frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE ITEMS


Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at thespecified interval. When adding or replacingcoolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent with the proper mixture. (For ad-ditional information on the proper mixturefor your area, refer to “Engine cooling system”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.)NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolantor the use of non-distilled water may re-duce the recommended service intervalof the coolant.Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oiland oil filter at the specified intervals. Forrecommended oil grade and viscosity referto “Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.Evaporative emissions control vaporlines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-ness. Tighten connections or replace partsas necessary.Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, pipingand connections for leaks, looseness, ordeterioration. Tighten connections or re-place parts as necessary.Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.Install new plugs of the same type as origi-nally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODYMAINTENANCE:Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect forproper installation. Check for chafing,cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.Replace any deteriorated or damagedparts immediately.Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace anydeteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as necessary.Propeller shaft(s):Check for damage,looseness, and grease leakage.In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specifiedintervals. When driving for prolonged peri-ods in dusty conditions, replace the filtermore frequently.Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-pension parts, drive shaft boots: Checkfor damage, looseness, and leakage of oilor grease. Under severe driving conditions,inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). When rotating tires,check for damage and uneven wear. Re-place if necessary.Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: Vi-sually inspect for signs of leakage at speci-fied intervals.Off-road maintenance: Check the follow-ing items frequently whenever you driveoff-road through deep sand, mud or water:• Brake pads and rotors• Brake linings and drums• Brake lines and hoses• Differential, transmission and transfer

case oil• Steering linkage• Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts• Engine air filter• Clutch housing drain (AWD only)


To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-nance schedules that may be used, de-pending upon the conditions in which youusually drive. These schedules containboth distance and time intervals, up to120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. Formost people, the odometer reading will in-dicate when service is needed. However, ifyou drive very little, your vehicle should beserviced at the regular time intervalsshown in the schedule.After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96months, continue maintenance at thesame mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMSFOR SEVERE OPERATINGCONDITIONSAdditional maintenance items for severeoperating conditions should be per-formed on vehicles that are driven underespecially demanding conditions. Addi-tional maintenance items should be per-formed if you primarily operate your vehicleunder the following conditions:• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles(16 km) with outside temperatures re-maining below freezing.

• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go“rush hour” traffic.

• Extensive idling and/or low speed drivingfor long distances, such as police, taxi ordoor-to-door delivery use.

• Driving in dusty conditions.• Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.• Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a

car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, bothstandard and severe maintenance itemsshould be performed at every interval.

The following tables show the standardmaintenance schedule. Depending uponweather and atmospheric conditions,varying road surfaces, individual drivinghabits and vehicle usage, additional ormore frequent maintenance may be re-quired.After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96months, continue maintenance at thesame mileage/time intervals.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE


STANDARD MAINTENANCEAbbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, L = Lubricate

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONPerform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL7.5(12)6

15(24)12

22.5(36)18

30(48)24

37.5(60)30

45(72)36

52.5(84)42

60(96)48

67.5(108)

54

75(120)

60

82.5(132)66

90(144)

72

97.5(156)

78

105(168)

84

112.5(180)

90

120(192)

96Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R RAutomatic transmission fluid NOTE (2)(3) I I I I I I I IBrake fluid� R R R RBrake lines and cables I I I I I I I IBrake pads and rotors� I I I I I I I IDrive belts NOTE (4) I* I* I* I* I*Engine coolant* NOTE (5)(6)Engine oil & oil filter� R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R REVAP vapor lines & fuel lines I* I* I* I*Exhaust system� I I I IFuel filter NOTE (7)In-cabin microfilter R R R R R R R RIntake & exhaust valve clearance NOTE (8)Intelligent Key battery I R R R RPropeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)� I I I I I I I IPropeller shaft grease (4WD models) L L L L L L L LSpark plugs NOTE (9) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)Steering gear and linkage, axle & suspension parts� I I I ITire rotation NOTE (10)Transfer fluid & differential gear oil NOTE (11) I I I I I I I I


NOTE:Maintenance items with “�” should be performed more frequently according to the “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.(2) Request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 77000, replace the AT fluid.(3) If using under severe conditions such as towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic P automatic transmission fluid. Using automatic transmissionfluid that is not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic P may damage the transmission or impact transmission durability. Damage caused by the use of fluidother than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.(4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged.(5) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months.(6) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.(7) Periodic maintenance is not required.(8) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.(9) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified replacement mileage.(10) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in the section.(11) If towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance inorder to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.


The maintenance intervals shown on thepreceding pages are for normal operatingconditions. If the vehicle is mainly operatedunder severe driving conditions as shownbelow, more frequent maintenance mustbe performed on the following items asshown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures re-maining below freezing.

• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go“rush hour” traffic.

• Extensive idling and/or low speed drivingfor long distance, such as police, taxi ordoor-to-door delivery use.

• Driving in dusty conditions.• Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.• Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-

top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance intervalBrake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 monthsBrake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsEngine oil and oil filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsExhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsPropeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsSteering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVEREOPERATING CONDITIONS


7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG



Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:


MEMO


10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine oil and oil filterrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

When traveling or registering in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-12Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Installing front license plate withgrommets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Securing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Utili-track® channel system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Crew cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23King Cab® models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Special Body vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Flat towing – 4WD with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Flat towing – 2WD with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Owner's Manual/Service Manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid typeCapacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetricMeasure

USMeasure

ImperialMeasure

Fuel 80 L 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” inthis section.

Engine oil*1Drain and refill*1: For additional informa-tion, refer to “Engine” inthe “Do-it-yourself ” sec-tion of this manual.

With oil filterchange 5 L 5-1/4 qt 4-3/8 qt

• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recom-mended.• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damagecaused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec-ommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oilfilter recommendation” in this section.

Without oil filterchange 4.7 L 5 qt 4-1/8 qt

Engine coolant(with reservoir) 12 L 3-1/8 gal 2-5/8 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-tions in the “Do-it-yourself ” section.

• Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF or equivalent• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF (orequivalent) ONLY in NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mixwith other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to GenuineNISSAN Matic P ATF may damage the automatic transmission.Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recom-mended is not covered under the NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Transfer fluid 1.5L 1-5/8 qt 1-3/8 qt

• Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M or equivalent• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M (or equivalent)may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability,and may damage the transfer. Damage caused by fluids otherthan as recommended is not covered by the NISSAN’s New Ve-hicle Limited Warranty.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid typeCapacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetricMeasure

USMeasure

ImperialMeasure

Front final drive oil 0.85 L 1-3/4 pt 1-1/2 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 orequivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil

Rear final drive oil 2.0 L 4-1/4 pt 3-1/2 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil synthetic 75W-140 or API GL-5synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-140

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent.

Brake fluid — — —• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalentDOT 3.*2: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —• HFC-134a (R-134a)• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specificationlabel” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG (DH-PR) or equivalent• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specificationlabel” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONUse unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-dex) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler doorlabel can operate on E-85. Fuel sys-tem or other damage can occur ifE-85 is used in vehicles that are notdesigned to run on E-85.

• Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

• Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

• Do not use a fuel containing morethan 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed to run on afuel containing more than 15% etha-nol. Using a fuel containing morethan 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe-cifically designed for a fuel contain-ing more than 15% ethanol can ad-versely affect the emission controldevices and systems of the vehicle.Damage caused by such fuel is notcovered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

• Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadi-enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).Using fuel containing MMT may ad-versely affect vehicle performanceand vehicle emissions. Not all fueldispensers are labeled to indicateMMT content, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer formore details. Note that Federal andCalifornia laws prohibit the use ofMMT in reformulated gasoline.

• U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to beidentified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common ab-breviation or the appropriate per-centage for that region.

Gasoline specificationsNISSAN recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)specifications where it is available. Many ofthe automobile manufacturers developedthis specification to improve emission con-trol system and vehicle performance. Askyour service station manager if the gaso-line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing re-formulated gasolines. These gasolines arespecially designed to reduce vehicle emis-sions. NISSAN supports efforts towardscleaner air and suggests that you use re-formulated gasoline when available.


Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MethylTert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol withor without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use offuels of which the oxygenate content andthe fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-not be readily determined. If in doubt, askyour service station manager.If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.• The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

• If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 15% oxygenate.

• If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as enginestalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,immediately change to a non-oxygenatefuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.Take care not to spill gasoline during re-fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenatescan cause paint damage.

E–15 fuelE-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.E-15 can only be used in vehicles designedto run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-tions require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified with small, square,orange and black label with the commonabbreviation or the appropriate percent-age for that region.

E–85 fuelE-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.E-85 can only be used in a Flexible FuelVehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-hicle. U.S. government regulations requirefuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange and blacklabel with the common abbreviation or theappropriate percentage for that region.


Fuel containing MMTMMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-ditive. NISSAN does not recommend theuse of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel mayadversely affect vehicle performance, in-cluding the emissions control system. Notethat while some fuel pumps label MMTcontent, not all do, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer for more de-tails.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-ample, fuel injector cleaner, octanebooster, intake valve deposit removers,etc.) which are sold commercially. Many ofthese additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active sol-vents or similar ingredients that can beharmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended cancause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”(“Spark knock” is a metallic rappingnoise.) If severe, this can lead to enginedamage. If you detect a persistent heavyspark knock even when using gasolineof the stated octane rating, or if you hearsteady spark knock while holding asteady speed on level roads, it is recom-mended that you have a NISSAN dealercorrect the condition. Failure to correctthe condition is misuse of the vehicle, forwhich NISSAN is not responsible.Incorrect ignition timing may result inspark knock, after-run and/or overheating,which may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or engine damage. If any of the abovesymptoms are encountered, have your ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is nota cause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oilIt is essential to choose the correct grade,quality and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance.For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”in this section. NISSAN recommends theuse of an energy conserving oil in order toimprove fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-cation or International Lubricant Standard-ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)certification and SAE viscosity standard.These oils have the API certification markon the front of the container. Oils which donot have the specified quality label shouldnot be used as they could cause enginedamage.

Oil additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important to select the engine oilviscosity based on the temperatures atwhich the vehicle will be operated beforethe next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-ity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. Whenreplacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter forthe reason described in “Change intervals.”

LTI2051


Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Using en-gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-fied quality, or exceeding recommended oiland filter change intervals could reduceengine life or cause severe damage to theengine. Damage to the engine caused byimproper maintenance or use of incorrectoil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.Your engine was filled with a high-qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not haveto change the oil before the first recom-mended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how youuse your vehicle.NISSAN recommends the use of GenuineNISSAN parts or equivalent. The use ofparts that do not meet or exceed NISSANspecifications, can cause damage to yourvehicle, and have an effect on your war-ranty coverage. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer parts departmentwho can provide information on the properparts for your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditionsmay require more frequent oil and filterchanges:• repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures• driving in dusty conditions• extensive idling• towing a trailer• stop and go commutingFor additional information, refer to the“Maintenance and schedules” section ofthis manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in yourNISSAN vehicle must be charged with therefrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) andNISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG (DH-PR)or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oilwill cause severe damage to the airconditioning system and will requirethe replacement of all air conditionersystem components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth'sozone layer. Although this refrigerant doesnot affect the earth's atmosphere, certaingovernment regulations require the recov-ery and recycling of any refrigerant duringautomotive air conditioner system service.A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-cians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system re-frigerant.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer when servicing your air conditionersystem.


ENGINEModel VQ38DDType Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.480 (95.5 x 88.4)Displacement cu in (cm 3) 231.8 (3,799)Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6Idle speed

Refer to the “Emission control information label” on the underside of the hood.A/T in N (Neutral) positionIgnition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)CO % at idleSpark plug FXE22HR-11Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel 1.18 (30) 16 x 7JJ

Aluminum 1.18 (30) 16 x 7J

Aluminum 1.18 (30) 18 x 7.5J

Tires Size

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

Spare tire Size

Steel 16” Full size

Alloy 16” Full size

Alloy 18” Full size

Alloy 18” P265/70R16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall lengthShort wheel base in (mm) 205.5 (5,220)Long wheel base in (mm) 219.4 (5,574)

Overall width in (mm) 72.8 (1,850)Overall height (includes roof rails)

Crew Cab modelsS, SV in (mm) 70.1 (1,780)Pro-4X in (mm) 73.9 (1,878)

King Cab® modelsS in (mm) 69.7 (1,770)SV in (mm) 69.7 (1,770)

Track WidthFront and rear in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)

WheelbaseShort wheel base in (mm) 125.9 (3,200)Long wheel base in (mm) 139.9 (3,554)

Gross vehicle weightrating

lbs. (kg)

Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label”in this section.

Gross axle weightrating

Front lbs. (kg)Rear lbs. (kg)


When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should firstfind out if the fuel available is suitable foryour vehicle's engine.Using fuel with an octane rating that is toolow may cause engine damage. All gaso-line vehicles must be operated with un-leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid takingyour vehicle to areas where appropriatefuel is not available.When transferring the registration ofyour vehicle to another country, state,province or district, it may be necessaryto modify the vehicle to meet local lawsand regulations.The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standardsvary according to the country, state, prov-ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-tions may differ.When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation and registration are the re-sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-sponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe VIN plate is attached as shown. Thisnumber is the identification for your vehicleand is used in the vehicle registration.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine asshown.

LTI0085 LTI2495VQ38DD engine

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGIN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATIONLABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-cation label is affixed as shown. This labelcontains valuable vehicle information, suchas: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year ofmanufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label isattached to the underside of the hood asshown.

LTI0135Type A (if so equipped)

WTI0099Type B (if so equipped)

LTI0133


TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. The label islocated as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is af-fixed as shown.

LTI2252Type A (if so equipped)

WTI0100Type B (if so equipped)

LTI2486


INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATEWITH GROMMETSUse the following steps to mount the frontlicense plate with grommets:1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the

location mark (small dimple) using a 0.37in (9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to thedrill. Insert two plastic grommets pro-vided. Install the license plate holder usingthe two bolts (and washers) provided.

2. Mount the license plate using twoM6-14 mm bolts.License plate bolt tightening torque:

3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb. (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WARNING

• It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area inside a ve-hicle. In a collision, people rid-ing in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled.

• Do not allow people to ride inany area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andseat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your ve-hicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

TERMSIt is important to familiarize yourselfwith the following terms beforeloading your vehicle:• Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment,fluids, emergency tools, and sparetire assembly. This weight doesnot include passengers and cargo.

• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weightof passengers and cargo.

• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other op-tional equipment. This informationis located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limitspecified for the front or rear axle.This information is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-bel.

• GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum totalweight rating of the vehicle, pas-sengers, cargo, and trailer.

• Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum to-tal weight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum com-bined weight of occupants andcargo that can be loaded into thevehicle. If the vehicle is used to towa trailer, the trailer tongue weightmust be included as part of thecargo load. This information is lo-cated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

• Cargo capacity - permissibleweight of cargo, the subtractedweight of occupants from the loadlimit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITYBefore driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both theGVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.For additional information, refer to“Measurement of weights” in thissection.Do not exceed the load limit of yourvehicle shown as “The combinedweight of occupants and cargo” onthe Tire and Loading Information la-bel. Do not exceed the number ofoccupants shown as “Seating Ca-pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-cupants and cargo”, add the weightof all occupants, then add the totalluggage weight. Examples areshown in the following illustration.


Steps for determining correctload limit1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXlbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For ex-ample, if the XXX amount equals1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150lbs. passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or(640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.)

LTI2320Example


5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the avail-able cargo and luggage load ca-pacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Con-sult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed the GVWRor the GAWR for your vehicle. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Mea-surement of weights” in this section.Also check tires for proper inflationpressures. For additional informa-tion, refer to the “Tire and LoadingInformation label” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SECURING THE LOADFor your convenience, tie down hooks (if soequipped) are placed at each corner of thetruck box. These may be used to help se-cure cargo loaded into the truck box.

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo with ropesor straps to help prevent it from slid-ing or shifting. Do not place cargohigher than the seatbacks. In a sud-den stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

• Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts ofyour vehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. This could re-sult in loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

LTI0102


UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (ifso equipped)1. Side channels

2. Header channel

3. Floor channels

WARNING

• Properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats into the Utili-track®channel system. Also, do not attachany rope or straps directly to thechannel. Failure to properly installthe tie-down cleats or attachingropes or straps directly to the chan-nel can cause the cargo to becomeunsecured. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.


The Utili-track® channel system allows youto move tie-down clamps in the bed to thebest location to secure a load.The tie-down cleats must be installed sothe clamp is properly seated in the notchesin the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seatedin the notches, it will not be flush with therail and cannot be properly tightened. Thebolt in the center of the cleat must be tight-ened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)Check the tightness of the tie-down cleatperiodically during a trip to make sure thecenter bolt has not become loose.

LTI2082


Install the tie-down cleat as follows:1. Remove the side channels by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed.Properly store the side channels.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpen-dicular to the channel as shown. Thenrotate the cleat clockwise 90° and slide itto the desired location.

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on thebottom fully seat into the channeldetents.

LTI0103

LTI0104


5. There should be no gap between thebottom of the cleat and the top of thechannel. Tighten the center bolt handtight (20-40 in-lbs.).

WTI0124


CAUTION

• Install only one cleat per section ofchannel.

• Applying loads at angles to the cleatsgreater than 45° or loads greaterthan 150 lbs. (header and floor chan-nels) or 200 lbs. (side channels) maycause damage to the channel or bed.

LTI0106


WARNING

Do not install accessories over the gapbetween the front and rear side chan-nels. Doing this could affect the rearstructure in certain rear impacts, whichcould result in serious injury.

LOADING TIPS• The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

• Do not load the front and rear axleto the GAWR. Doing so will exceedthe GVWR.

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help preventit from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargocould cause personal injury.

LTI01231 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation


• Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rearGAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can changethe way your vehicle handles.This could result in loss of con-trol and cause personal injury.

• Overloading not only canshorten the life of your vehicleand the tire, but can also causeunsafe vehicle handling andlonger braking distances. Thismay cause a premature tirefailure which could result in aserious accident and personalinjury. Failures caused by over-loading are not covered by thevehicle’s warranty.

CREW CAB MODELSCrew Cab short wheel base modelsshould not be used to carry a slide-incamper.

KING CAB® MODELSThis information is provided for you toproperly install a slide-in camper and isbased on the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration regulations. It is rec-ommended that, before installing thecamper, you carefully read the following in-formation and ensure that the campermeets the specifications.This information may not apply to someCanada model vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLESSome vehicles are equipped with commer-cial or camper bodies. However, this Own-er's Manual does not cover these options.For additional information, refer to thebody manufacturer's instruction manual.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OF GRAVITYThe illustration indicates the recom-mended cargo center of gravity location.Crew Cab / King Cab®:L1 = 48.4 in (1,230 mm)Crew Cab LWB:L1 = 48.6 in (1,234 mm)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. If aload is too far back, it can affect handlingcharacteristics. If a load is too far for-ward, the front axle may be overloaded.

LTI0128

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADINGINFORMATION


When the truck is used to carry a slide-incamper, the total cargo load of the truckconsists of the camper manufacturer'sweight figure,• the weight of installed additional camper

equipment not included in the campermanufacturer's weight figure,

• the weight of camper cargo,• and the weight of passengers in the

camper.The total cargo load should not exceed thetruck's cargo weight rating and the camp-er's center of gravity should fall within the

truck's recommended center of gravityzone when installed.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading canadversely affect vehicle handling, brak-ing and performance and may lead toaccidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITYThe vehicle payload weight capacityshown on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, refer to “Tire and Loading Informationlabel” in this section, indicates the maxi-mum total weight of passengers, optionalequipment (air conditioning, trailer hitch,etc.) and cargo that your vehicle is de-signed to carry.Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the GVWR or theGAWR for your vehicle. For additional infor-mation, refer to ''Vehicle loading informa-tion'' in this section.Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. For additional information, refer tothe Tire and Loading Information label.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTSSecure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of your vehicle. When thetruck camper is loaded, drive to ascale and weigh on the front and onthe rear wheels separately to deter-mine axle loads. Individual axle loadsshould not exceed either of thegross axle weight rating (GAWR). Thetotal of the axle loads should not ex-ceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings are given onthe vehicle certification label that islocated on the left side of the vehicle,normally the dash, hinge pillar, doorlatch post, or door edge next to thedriver. If weight ratings are exceeded,move or remove items to bring allweights below the ratings.

LTI0129


WARNING

• Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely af-fect vehicle handling, braking andperformance and may lead toaccidents.

• Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

• Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavyload for the first 500 mile (805 km).Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

• For the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50mph (80 km/h) and do not makestarts at full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of your ve-hicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be usedprimarily to carry passengers and cargo.Remember that towing a trailer places ad-ditional loads on your vehicle's engine,drive train, steering, braking and other sys-tems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towingcapability and the special equipment re-quired for proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceedthe value specified in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart found in this section.The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.• When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) should not exceed the valuespecified in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight ofthe towing vehicle (including passengersand cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-ing loads greater than these or using im-proper towing equipment could adverselyaffect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance.The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer isnot only related to the maximum trailerloads, but also the places you plan to tow.Tow weights appropriate for level highwaydriving may have to be reduced for lowtraction situations (for example, on slipperyboat ramps).

LTI0161

TOWING A TRAILER


Temperature conditions can also affecttowing. For example, towing a heavy trailerin high outside temperatures on gradedroads can affect engine performance andcause overheating. The engine protectionmode, which helps reduce the chance ofengine damage, could activate and auto-matically decrease engine power. Vehiclespeed may decrease under high load. Planyour trip carefully to account for trailer andvehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase the chanceof a collision. Be especially carefulwhen driving. If the vehicle cannotmaintain a safe driving speed, pull tothe side of the road in a safe area. Allowthe engine to cool and return to normaloperation. For additional information,refer to “If your vehicle overheats” inthe “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-proper towing procedures is not cov-ered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weightdistributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or usethe trailer tongue load specified by thetrailer manufacturer. The tongue loadmust be within the maximum tongue loadlimits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allowfor proper tongue load.

WTI0160


Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross AxleWeight (GAW)The GVW of the towing vehicle must notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label. The GVW equals thecombined weight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongueload and any other optional equipment. Inaddition, front or rear GAW must not ex-ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label.

Towing capacities are calculated assum-ing a base vehicle with driver and any op-tions required to achieve the rating. Addi-tional passengers, cargo and/or optionalequipment, such as the trailer hitch, willadd weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity andtrailer tongue load.The vehicle and trailer need to be weighedto confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-sured using platform type scales commonlyfound at truck stops, highway weigh stations,building supply centers or salvage yards.To determine the available payload capacityfor tongue load, use the following procedure.1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with allof the passengers and cargo that arenormally in the vehicle when towing atrailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight fromthe GVWR. The remaining amount is theavailable maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity,use the following procedure.1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

"Towing Load/Specification" chart foundin this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight fromthe GCWR. The remaining amount is theavailable maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-ment and cargo, that are normally in thetrailer when it is towed. Make sure theGross Trailer Weight is not more than theGross Trailer Weight Rating shown on thetrailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.Also weigh the front and rear axles on thescale to make sure the Front Gross AxleWeight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are notmore than Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label. The cargo in the trailer andvehicle may need to be moved or removedto meet the specified ratings.Example:• Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale- including passengers, cargoand hitch - 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg).

CA0036


• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -5,815 lbs. (2638 kg).

• Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification" chart -11,133 lbs. (5050 kg).

• Maximum Trailer towing capacity from“Towing Load/Specification" chart - 6,100lbs. (2767 kg).

5,815 lbs. (2638 kg) GVWR– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg) GVW

= 630 lbs. (286 kg) Available fortongue weight

11,133 lbs. (5050 kg) GCWR– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg) GVW

= 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg) Capacity availablefor towing

630 lbs. (286 kg) Available tongueweight

/ 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg) Available capacity= 10 % tongue

weight

The available towing capacity may be lessthan the maximum towing capacity due tothe passenger and cargo load in the ve-hicle.Remember to keep trailer tongue weightbetween 10 - 15 percent of the trailer weightor within the trailer tongue load specifica-tion recommended by the trailer manufac-turer. If the tongue load becomes exces-sive, rearrange the cargo to obtain theproper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specificationshown in the “Towing Load/Specification”chart even if the calculated availabletongue weight is greater than 15 percent. Ifthe calculated tongue weight is less than10 percent, reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.Always verify that available capacities arewithin the required ratings.

Trailer frontal area

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontalarea specification may exceed the tow-ing capacity of the vehicle. This mayaffect the towing performance andlead to vehicle damage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towingload of a trailer. The frontal area is the totalarea of the vehicle and trailer that is af-fected by air resistance while towing. Donot exceed the maximum trailer frontalarea specification shown in the "TowingLoad/Specification” chart. The frontal areacan be determined by multiplying thewidth of the trailer by the height of thetrailer. For example, a trailer that is 8 feetwide by 6 feet tall has a trailer frontal area of48 square feet.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in thismanual are for general reference only.The safe towing capacity of your ve-hicle is affected by dealer and factoryinstalled options and passenger andcargo loads. You must weigh the ve-hicle and trailer as described in thismanual to determine the actual vehicletowing capacity. Do not exceed thepublished maximum towing capacityor the GCWR or the GVWR shown on theFMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-sult in an accident causing serious per-sonal injury or property damage.


King Cab® models

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Towing Capacity*1, *2, *3 6,720 lbs. (3,048 kg) 6,510 lbs. (2,953 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load*2, *3 672 lbs. (305 kg) 651 lbs. (295 kg)Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 11,427 lbs. (5,183 kg) 11,427 lbs. (5,183 kg)

Maximum trailer frontal area 30 sq feet (2.78 sq meters)

Crew Cab models

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Towing Capacity*1, *2, *3 6,640 lbs. (3,012 kg) 6,380 lbs. (2,894 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load*2, *3 664 lbs. (301 kg) 638 lbs. (289 kg)Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 11,427 lbs. (5,183 kg) 11,427 lbs. (5,183 kg)

Maximum trailer frontal area 30 sq feet (2.78 sq meters)

*1:• The towing capacity is calculated using the SAE International SAE J2807 test method. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight

to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity.• All towing above 1,000 lbs. (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes.• NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lbs. (1,361 kg).

*2: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg) and 350 lbs. (158 kg) tongue load.*3: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.


TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitchYour vehicle may be equipped with an op-tional trailer tow package. The trailer towpackage includes a receiver-type framemounted hitch. This hitch is rated for themaximum towing capacity of this vehiclewhen the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount andhitch ball that is rated for the trailer to betowed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts andhitch balls are available from a NISSANdealer.If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-tional trailer tow package, check the tow-ing capacity of your bumper hitch orreceiver-type frame mounted hitch.Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch isavailable from a NISSAN dealer. Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to thevehicle to help avoid personal injury orproperty damage due to sway caused bycrosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-ing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier thanthe weight rating of the hitch compo-nents. Never exceed the weight ratingof the hitch components. Doing so cancause serious personal injury or prop-erty damage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size andweight rating for your trailer:• The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch ballsalso have the size printed on the top ofthe ball.

• Choose the proper class hitch ball basedon the trailer weight.

• The diameter of the threaded shank ofthe hitch ball must be matched to the ballmount hole diameter. The hitch ballshank should be no more than 1/16”smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

• The threaded shank of the hitch ball mustbe long enough to be properly secured tothe ball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mountThe hitch ball is attached to the ball mountand the ball mount is inserted into thehitch receiver. Choose a proper class ballmount based on the trailer weight. Addi-tionally, the ball mount should be chosen tokeep the trailer tongue level with theground.


Bumper towingThe Genuine NISSAN step bumper has pro-visions to install a trailer hitch ball and isdesigned to tow trailers of a maximumweight of 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg).To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circlein the center of the step bumper OA , thenremove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitchesA weight carrying or “dead weight” ballmount is one that is designed to carry thewhole amount of tongue weight and grossweight directly on the ball mount and onthe receiver.

Weight distribution hitchThis type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of barsattach to the ball mount and to the trailerto distribute the tongue weight (hitchweight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can'tcarry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongueweight transferred through the frame andpushing down on the front wheels. Thisgives stability to the tow vehicle.A weight-distributing hitch system (ClassIV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towingequipment manufacturers to determine ifthey recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system mayaffect the operation of trailer surgebrakes. If you are considering use of aweight-distributing hitch system with asurge brake-equipped trailer, check withthe surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-turer to determine if and how this can bedone.

Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using theweight-distributing hitch system.General set-up instructions are as follows:1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doorsclosed, allow the vehicle to stand for sev-eral minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference pointon the front and rear bumpers at thecenter of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-just the hitch equalizers so that the frontbumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 –13 mm) of the reference height mea-sured in step 2. The rear bumper shouldbe no higher than the reference heightmeasured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. Ifthe rear bumper is higher than themeasured reference height whenloaded, the vehicle may handle unpre-dictably which could cause a loss of ve-hicle control and cause serious per-sonal injury or property damage.

LTI0132


Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-feting caused by other vehicles can affecttrailer handling. Sway control devices maybe used to help control these affects. If youchoose to use one, contact a reputabletrailer hitch supplier to make sure the swaycontrol device will work with the vehicle,hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake system.Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using thesway control device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to towtrailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.(907 kg).

Class II hitchClass II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500lbs. (1,587 kg).The Genuine NISSAN step bumper is con-sidered a Class II ball mount.

Class III hitchClass III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000lbs. (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributing hitchshould be used to tow trailers that weighover 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVtrailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lbs.(4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but yourvehicle is only capable of towing the maxi-mum trailer weights shown in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart in this section.

CAUTION

• Special hitches which include framereinforcements are required for tow-ing above 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). SuitableGenuine NISSAN hitches, ball mountsand hitch balls for pickup trucks andsport utility vehicles are available ata NISSAN dealer.

• The hitch should not be attached toor affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

WARNING

• Do not use axle-mounted hitches.• Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

• To reduce the possibility of addi-tional damage if your vehicle isstruck from the rear, where practical,remove the receiver when not in use.

• Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures• When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recommendedcold tire pressure indicated on theTire and Loading Information label.

• Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-ing and proper inflation pressureshould be in accordance with thetrailer and tire manufacturer'sspecifications.


Safety chainsAlways use suitable safety chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. The safety chainsshould be crossed and should be attachedto the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper oraxle. The safety chains can be attached tothe bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to thebumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in thechains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially availablepower-type module/converter mustbe used to provide power for all trailerlighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-tery as a direct power source for alltrailer lights while using the vehicle taillight, stop light and turn signal circuitsas a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more than 15milliamps from the stop and tail lampcircuits. Using a module/converter thatexceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle's electricalsystem. See a reputable trailer dealerto obtain the proper equipment and tohave it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federaland/or local regulations. For assistance inhooking up trailer lights, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer or reputabletrailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with theoptional trailer tow package are equippedwith a 7-pin trailer harness connector. A flat4–pin harness is available from your dealerfor vehicles without a tow package. If yourtrailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connec-tor, an adapter will be needed to connectthe trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters areavailable at auto parts stores and hitch re-tailers.

Trailer brakesIf your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it is prop-erly installed.Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer har-ness connector are pre-wired for a trailerbrake controller. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brakeadapter harness.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake systemdirectly to the vehicle brake system.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, moststates require a separate braking systemon trailers with a loaded weight above aspecific amount. Make sure the trailermeets the local regulations and the regu-lations where you plan to tow.Several types of braking systems are available.Surge Brakes -The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-draulic line running to each trailer wheel.Surge brakes are activated by the trailerpushing against the hitch ball when thetow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surgebrakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system,there is no hydraulic or electric connectionfor brake operation between the tow ve-hicle and the trailer.Electric Trailer Brakes -Electric brakingsystems are activated by an electronic sig-nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe-cial brake-sensing module). If electric trailerbrakes are used, refer to “Electric trailerbrake controller" in this section.Have a professional supplier of towingequipment make sure the trailer brakes areproperly installed and demonstrate properbrake function testing.


Electric trailer brake controllerTrailers equipped with electric brakes mayrequire the installation of an aftermarkettrailer brake controller.A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is avail-able that is specifically designed to be usedwhen installing an aftermarket brake con-troller.Install the aftermarket electric trailer brakecontroller according to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

Pre-towing tips• Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle ifit has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes of either condi-tion.

• Always secure items in the trailer to pre-vent load shift while driving.

• Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center ofgravity low.

• Load the trailer so approximately 60% ofthe trailer load is in the front half and 40%is in the back half. Also make sure the loadis balanced side to side.

• Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,and trailer wheel lug nuts every time youattach a trailer to the vehicle.

• Be certain your rearview mirrors conformto all federal, state or local regulations. Ifnot, install any mirrors required for towingbefore driving the vehicle.

• Determine the overall height of the ve-hicle and trailer so the required clearanceis known.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understandingof the vehicle's behavior, you should prac-tice turning, stopping and backing up in anarea which is free from traffic. Steering sta-bility and braking performance will besomewhat different than under normaldriving conditions.• Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.• Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-tently becoming unlatched.

• Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.• When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you wantthe trailer to go. Make small correctionsand back up slowly. If possible, havesomeone guide you when you are back-ing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, if youmust do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift lever to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on thedownhill side of the vehicle and trailerwheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,slowly release the brake pedal until theblocks absorb the vehicle load.


4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case isin 4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light isoff. If the indicator light is flashing,or the ATP light is ON, make sure thetransmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and turnthe 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For addi-tional information, refer to “Automatictransmission park warning light” in the“Instruments and controls” section and“Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

7. Turn off the engine.To drive away:1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailerare clear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store theblocks.

• While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle maydecrease overall stability. Therefore, tomaintain adequate control, reduce yourspeed and shift to a lower gear. Avoidlong or repeated use of the brakes whendescending a hill, as this reduces theireffectiveness and could cause overheat-ing. Shifting to a lower gear instead pro-vides “engine braking” and reduces theneed to brake as frequently.

• If the engine coolant temperature rises toa high temperature, refer to “If your ve-hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

• Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

• Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle'sfirst 500 miles (805 km).

• For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).

• Have your vehicle serviced more oftenthan at intervals specified. For additionalinformation, refer to “MaintenanceSchedules” in the “Maintenance andschedules” section of this manual.

• When making a turn, your trailer wheelswill be closer to the inside of the turn thanyour vehicle wheels. To compensate forthis, make a larger than normal turningradius during the turn.

• Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,possibly causing vehicle sway. When be-ing passed by larger vehicles, be pre-pared for possible changes in crosswindsthat could affect vehicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins tosway:1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

to allow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditionsallow. This combination will help stabilizethe vehicle– Do not correct trailer sway by steering

or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently applythe brakes and pull to the side of theroad in a safe area.


3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it isbalanced as described in this section.

• Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than normalpassing. Remember, the length of thetrailer must also pass the other vehiclebefore you can safely change lanes.

• Downshift the transmission to a lowergear for engine braking when drivingdown steep or long hills. This will helpslow the vehicle without applying thebrakes.

• Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat, resulting in re-duced braking efficiency.

• Increase your following distance to allowfor greater stopping distances while tow-ing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brakegradually.

• NISSAN recommends that the cruisecontrol not be used while towing a trailer.

• Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehiclesthat are towing trailers. Obey the localspeed limits.

• Check your hitch, trailer wiring harnessconnections, and trailer wheel lug nutsafter 50 miles (80 km) of travel and atevery break.

• When launching a boat, don't allow thewater level to go over the exhaust tailpipe or rear bumper.

• Make sure you disconnect the trailerlights before backing the trailer into thewater or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, referto the “Do-it-yourself” section in thismanual.

FLAT TOWING – 4WD WITHAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONTowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home, is sometimescalled flat towing.

CAUTION

• DO NOT flat tow a 4WD vehicleequipped with an automatic trans-mission. Flat towing or using a ve-hicle dolly WILL DAMAGE internaltransmission parts due to lack oflubrication.

• For emergency towing proceduresrefer to “Towing recommended byNISSAN” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.


FLAT TOWING – 2WD WITHAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONTowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home, is sometimescalled flat towing.

CAUTION

• Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmissiondamage.

• Whenever flat towing your vehicle,always tow forward, never backward.

• DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground. Doing so WILL DAMAGEinternal transmission parts due tolack of transmission lubrication.

• For emergency towing proceduresrefer to “Towing recommended byNISSAN” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-hicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dollymanufacturer’s recommendations whenusing their product.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-hicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dollymanufacturer's recommendations whenusing their product.

NOTE:


DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:Treadwear 200 Traction AA TemperatureATreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Traction AA, A, B and CThe traction grades, from highest to low-est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include ac-celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and CThe temperature grades are A (the high-est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat, and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-cessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passengercar tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the mini-mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combi-nation, can cause heat build-up andpossible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-lowing emission warranties:For USA1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance WarrantyDetails of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet which comes withyour NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,you may obtain a replacement by writingto:• Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For CanadaEmission Control System WarrantyDetails of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet which comes withyour NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,you may obtain a replacement by writingto:• Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY


For USAIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-fying NISSAN.If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a re-call and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safetyfrom http://www.safercar.gov.You may notify NISSAN by contact-ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.For CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifyingNISSAN.If Transport Canada receives com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayrequest that NISSAN conduct a recallcampaign. However, TransportCanada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Cana-da's Defect Investigations and Re-calls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safetydefects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng(English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra(French speakers)Additional information concerningmotor vehicle safety may be ob-tained from Transport Canada'sRoad Safety Information Centre at1-800-333-0371 or online atwww.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (Englishspeakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers).To notify NISSAN of any safety con-cerns please contact our ConsumerInformation Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


WARNING

A vehicle equipped with Four-WheelDrive (4WD) should never be tested us-ing a two wheel dynamometer (such asthe dynamometers used by somestates for emissions testing), or similarequipment. Make sure you inform thetest facility personnel that your vehicleis equipped with 4WD before it is placedon a dynamometer. Using the wrongtest equipment may result in transmis-sion damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in seri-ous vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some statesand Canadian Provinces, your vehicle maybe required to be in what is called the“ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emissioncontrol system.The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the ready condition canbe obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-tion. Before taking the I/M test, check thevehicle's inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Place the ignitionswitch in the ON position without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) comes on steady for 20 secondsand then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M testcondition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-tion is “ready”. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purpose of anEDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, datathat will assist in understanding how a ve-hicle's systems performed. The EDR is de-signed to record data related to vehicle dy-namics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-cord such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;• Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;• How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.• Sounds are not recorded.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


These data can help provide a better un-derstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR dataare recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g.name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash in-vestigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer and NISSANdealer, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, that have the special equipment, canread the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only beaccessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for thismodel year and prior can be purchased. AGenuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information foryour vehicle. This manual is the same oneused by the factory-trained techniciansworking at NISSAN dealerships. GenuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-chased.For USAFor current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:www.nissan-techinfo.comFor current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:1-800-247-5321

For CanadaTo purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSANService Manual or Owner’s Manual, for thismodel year and prior, please contact yournearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in yourarea, call the NISSAN Information Center at1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-resentative will assist you.

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


MEMO


11 Index4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

A

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-70Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77

Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . .1-85Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-85, 2-20Air bag warning light,supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85, 2-20Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-17Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . .4-26, 4-34Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . .4-36Air conditioner specification label . .10-13Air conditioner system refrigerantrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations . . . . . . .10-8Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-36

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-25

Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . .2-15Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-33Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-47Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . .4-69Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . .4-54FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44, 4-49iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60, 4-63iPod® player operation . . . . . .4-60, 4-63Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Steering wheel audio controlswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71USB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . .2-51Automatic transmission positionindicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-18Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55

B

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40, 8-13

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-24

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-13Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-69Bluetooth® hands-free phonesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96

Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . .4-93Connecting procedure . . . . . .4-84, 4-99Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83Text messaging . . . . . . . . .4-89, 4-100Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwithout Navigation System . . . . . . . .4-79Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-33Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-28Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Brake wear indicators . . . . . .2-24, 8-20

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-19Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Brightness/contrast button . . . . . .4-9, 4-15Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-15Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

C

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79Cargo(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-14Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . .4-54Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-32Child restraints . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 1-30

Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-39, 1-42, 1-54, 1-65Top tether strap anchor pointlocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-13

Clock setting(models with Navigation System) . . . . .4-13Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . .4-54Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Compass and outside temperaturedisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Connect phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-10

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Brightness/contrast button . . . .4-9, 4-15Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-10Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13With navigation system. . . . . . .4-10, 4-11

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel) . . . . .4-71Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-34Heater and air conditioner controls(manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-7

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Curtain side-impact and rolloverair bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82

D

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system . .2-32Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-29

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-33Display controls (see control panelbuttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-10Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

E

Economy - fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-12, 6-3Emission control information label . . . .10-12Emission control system warranty. . . .10-38

11-2

EngineBefore starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-13Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-7Engine cooling system. . . . . . . . . . .8-4Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-17Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-7Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-10Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-40Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-2Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2Explanation of scheduled maintenanceitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .8-23Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

F

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-12

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-77Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-5Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-6

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-58, 2-59Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-7Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth®. .4-96Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-30Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-34Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-25, 4-35

Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-36Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . .5-37Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-58, 2-59

11-3

Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

I

Ignition switchPush-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-10

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-13In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-23Indicator

NISSAN Intelligent Key® batterydischarge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . .3-18Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-33Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-33Intelligent Key system

Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation . . . . .3-9Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-12Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60, 4-63

J

Jump seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-14

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-24Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . .3-9

KeysNISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-8NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . .10-13C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12Emission control information label . .10-12Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-85

Launch bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9License plate

Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-14Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-85, 2-20Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-28Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-15Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-28Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18Low windshield-washer fluidwarning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-79Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-23Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-18Low windshield-washer fluidwarning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Luggage (See vehicle loadinginformation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . .2-48

11-4

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-24Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Maintenance under severe operationconditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Malfunction indicator light. . . . . . . . . .2-22Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-33Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-18Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Vanity mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Mobile apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52, 7-5

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-8NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dischargeindicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-13NISSAN voice recognition system . . . .4-106NissanConnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-45Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-13Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-41Owner's manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-41

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-19Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . .5-31

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-96Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Power steering system . . . . . . . . . .5-32Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Precautions

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6Precautions on boosterseats . . . . . . . . . . .1-39, 1-42, 1-54, 1-65Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-39, 1-42, 1-54, 1-65Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-70Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

11-5

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-79FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44, 4-49Steering wheel audio control switch . .4-71

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-40Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . .5-39Rear sonar system OFF switch. . . . . . .2-38Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-29Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Recorders

Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-40Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-8Registering a vehicle in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-39Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7Child seat belts. .1-28, 1-39, 1-42, 1-54, 1-65

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-39Seat

Jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-5

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-26Injured person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15, 7-6Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-24Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-19

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-20Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Security system(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-13Security systems

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-25Self-adjusting brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-41

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-36Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-15Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . . .1-24Side air bag system (See supplementalside air bag, curtain and rollover air bagsystems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82Siri® Eyes-Free. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73, 4-76Smartphone connectivity . . . . . . . . . .4-72Sonar

Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-13Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-14Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

Starting the engine(gasoline engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Steering

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Power steering system . . . . . . . . . .5-32Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-71

11-6

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52, 7-5Supplemental air bag warninglabels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85Supplemental air bag warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85, 2-20Supplemental front impact air bagsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . .1-85Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-70

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-70Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Automatic power window switch. . . .2-51Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-30Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . .2-36Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-33Power door lock switch. . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-38Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-29Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Tailgate latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24, 3-25Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-7Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-13Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 6-6, 8-41Tire and Loading Informationlabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-37Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-30, 10-10

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-32

Towing2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-16Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-36, 10-37Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-28Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25Transceiver

HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-58, 2-59

TransmissionDriving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Travel (See registering a vehicle inanother country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Troubleshooting guide(NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . .4-110Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . .10-23Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

U

Under seat storage bin . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-37USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models with Navigation System) . . . . .4-58USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models without Navigation System) . . .4-55USB interface

Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59

11-7

Using 4-Wheel Drive (4WD). . . . . . . . . .5-23

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-15Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. .5-35Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . .2-27, 5-13Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-14Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle security system(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-13Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-99Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . .4-106

W

Warning4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-85, 2-20Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-15Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-17

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-17Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-17Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-6Low fuel warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-18Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-79Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-18, 2-20Supplemental air bag warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85, 2-20TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-25Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-85Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Warning lights, indicator lights andaudible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Weights(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . .10-10Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . .8-30, 10-10When traveling or registering in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-51

Manual windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Rear sliding window. . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Wiper

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28

11-8

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-dex) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler doorlabel can operate on E-85. Fuel sys-tem or other damage can occur ifE-85 is used in vehicles that are notdesigned to run on E-85.

• Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

• Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, becausethis will damage the three-waycatalyst.

• Do not use a fuel containing morethan 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed to run on afuel containing more than 15% etha-nol. Using a fuel containing morethan 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe-cifically designed for a fuel contain-ing more than 15% ethanol can ad-versely affect the emission controldevices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is notcovered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

• Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadi-enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).Using fuel containing MMT may ad-versely affect vehicle performanceand vehicle emissions. Not all fueldispensers are labeled to indicateMMT content, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer formore details. Note that Federal andCalifornia laws prohibit the use ofMMT in reformulated gasoline.

• U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to beidentified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common ab-breviation or the appropriate per-centage for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:Refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricantsand capacities” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:For additional information, refer to “Tire andLoading Information label” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section of thismanual.The label is typically located on the driverside center pillar or on the driver's door. Foradditional information, refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ofvehicle use, follow the break-in procedurerecommendations for the future reliabilityand economy of your new vehicle. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Break-inschedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in vehicledamage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

D40-D

Printing : October 2020Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.OM21EA 0D40U0

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE ... - Dealer E Process

Documents